Delta Ia-Mds Vfd-Ed Um en 20230614

Industrial Automation Headquarters
Delta Electronics, Inc.

Taoyuan Technology Center
No.18, Xinglong Rd., Taoyuan District,
Taoyuan City 330477, Taiwan
TEL: +886-3-362-6301 / FAX: +886-3-371-6301
Asia EMEA
Delta Electronics (Shanghai) Co., Ltd. Delta Electronics (Netherlands) B.V.
No.182 Minyu Rd., Pudong Shanghai, P.R.C. Sales: [email protected]
Post code : 201209 Marketing: [email protected]
TEL: +86-21-6872-3988 / FAX: +86-21-6872-3996 Technical Support: [email protected]
Customer Service: 400-820-9595 Customer Support: [email protected]
Service: [email protected]
Delta Electronics (Japan), Inc. TEL: +31(0)40 800 3900
Industrial Automation Sales Department
2-1-14 Shibadaimon, Minato-ku Delta Electronics (Netherlands) B.V.
Tokyo, Japan 105-0012 Automotive Campus 260, 5708 JZ Helmond, The Netherlands
TEL: +81-3-5733-1155 / FAX: +81-3-5733-1255 Mail: [email protected]
TEL: +31(0)40 800 3900
Delta Electronics (Korea), Inc. Delta Electronics (Netherlands) B.V.
1511, 219, Gasan Digital 1-Ro., Geumcheon-gu,
Coesterweg 45, D-59494 Soest, Germany
Seoul, 08501 South Korea
Mail: [email protected]
TEL: +82-2-515-5305 / FAX: +82-2-515-5302
TEL: +49 2921 987 238
Delta Energy Systems (Singapore) Pte Ltd. Delta Electronics (France) S.A.
4 Kaki Bukit Avenue 1, #05-04, Singapore 417939 ZI du bois Challand 2, 15 rue des Pyrénées,
TEL: +65-6747-5155 / FAX: +65-6744-9228 Lisses, 91090 Evry Cedex, France
Delta Electronics (India) Pvt. Ltd. TEL: +33(0)1 69 77 82 60
Plot No.43, Sector 35, HSIIDC Gurgaon,
PIN 122001, Haryana, India Delta Electronics Solutions (Spain) S.L.U
TEL: +91-124-4874900 / FAX: +91-124-4874945 Ctra. De Villaverde a Vallecas, 265 1º Dcha Ed.
Hormigueras – P.I. de Vallecas 28031 Madrid
Delta Electronics (Thailand) PCL. TEL: +34(0)91 223 74 20
909 Soi 9, Moo 4, Bangpoo Industrial Estate (E.P.Z), Carrer Llacuna 166, 08018 Barcelona, Spain
Pattana 1 Rd., T.Phraksa, A.Muang, Mail: [email protected]
Samutprakarn 10280, Thailand Digitized Automation for a Changing World
TEL: +66-2709-2800 / FAX: +66-2709-2827 Delta Electronics (Italy) S.r.l.
Via Meda 2–22060 Novedrate(CO)
Delta Electronics (Australia) Pty Ltd.
Unit 2, Building A, 18-24 Ricketts Road,
Mount Waverley, Victoria 3149 Australia
Piazza Grazioli 18 00186 Roma Italy
TEL: +39 039 8900365
Delta Elevator Drive
VFD-ED Series User Manual
Delta Energy System LLC
TEL: +61-1300-335-823 / +61-3-9543-3720
Vereyskaya Plaza II, office 112 Vereyskaya str.
17 121357 Moscow Russia
Americas Mail: [email protected]
TEL: +7 495 644 3240
Delta Electronics (Americas) Ltd.
5101 Davis Drive, Research Triangle Park, NC 27709, U.S.A. Delta Greentech Elektronik San. Ltd. Sti. (Turkey)
TEL: +1-919-767-3813 / FAX: +1-919-767-3969 Şerifali Mah. Hendem Cad. Kule Sok. No:16-A
34775 Ümraniye – İstanbul
Delta Electronics Brazil Ltd. Mail: [email protected]
Estrada Velha Rio-São Paulo, 5300 Eugênio de TEL: + 90 216 499 9910
Melo - São José dos Campos CEP: 12247-004 - SP - Brazil
TEL: +55-12-3932-2300 / FAX: +55-12-3932-237 Eltek Dubai (Eltek MEA DMCC)
OFFICE 2504, 25th Floor, Saba Tower 1,
Delta Electronics International Mexico S.A. de C.V. Jumeirah Lakes Towers, Dubai, UAE
Gustavo Baz No. 309 Edificio E PB 103 Mail: [email protected]
Colonia La Loma, CP 54060 TEL: +971(0)4 2690148
Tlalnepantla, Estado de México
TEL: +52-55-3603-9200
*We reserve the right to change the information in this manual without prior notice.
DELTA_IA-MDS_VFD-ED_UM_EN_20230614
www.deltaww.com
Copyright Notice
©Delta Electronics, Inc. All rights reserved.
All information contained in this user manual is the exclusive property of Delta Electronics Inc. (hereinafter
referred to as "Delta ") and is protected by copyright law and all other laws. Delta retains the exclusive
rights of this user manual in accordance with the copyright law and all other laws. No parts in this manual
may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, translated or used in any other ways without the prior
consent of Delta.
Limitation of Liability
The contents of this user manual are only for the use of the product manufactured by Delta. Except as
defined in special mandatory laws, Delta provides this user manual “as is” and does not offer any kind of
warranty through this user manual for using the product, either express or implied, including but not
limited to the following: (i) this product will meet your needs or expectations; (ii) the information contained
in the product is current and correct; (iii) the product does not infringe any rights of any other person. You
shall bear your own risk to use this product.
In no event shall Delta, its subsidiaries, affiliates, managers, employees, agents, partners and licensors
be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, derivative or consequential damages (including but not
limited to the damages for loss of profits, goodwill, use or other intangible losses) unless the laws contains
special mandatory provisions to the contrary.
Delta reserves the right to make changes to the user manual and the products described in the user
manual without prior notice and afterwards.
(Translation of the original instructions)
READ PRIOR TO INSTALLATION FOR SAFETY.
 Disconnect AC input power before connecting any wiring to the AC motor drive.
 Even if the power has been turned off, a charge may still remain in the DC-link
capacitors with hazardous voltages before the POWER LED is OFF. Do NOT touch the
internal circuits and components.
 There are highly sensitive MOS components on the printed circuit boards. These
components are especially sensitive to static electricity. Take anti-static measure before
touching these components or the circuit boards.
 Never modify the internal components or wiring.
 Ground the AC motor drive by using the ground terminal. The grounding method must
comply with the laws of the country where the AC motor drive is to be installed.
 Do NOT install the AC motor drive in a location with high temperature, direct sunlight or
inflammable materials or gases.
 Never connect the AC motor drive output terminals U/T1, V/T2 and W/T3 directly to the
AC mains circuit power supply.
 After finishing the wiring of the AC motor drive, check if U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3 are short-
circuited to ground with a multimeter. Do NOT power the drive if short circuits occur.
Eliminate the short circuits before the drive is powered.
 The rated voltage for AC motor drive must be ≤ 240V for 230V models (480V for 460V
models) and the mains supply current capacity must be ≤ 5000A RMS (≤ 10000A RMS
for the ≥ 40HP (30kW) models).
 Only qualified persons are allowed to install, wire and maintain the AC motor drives.
 Even if the three-phase AC motor is stopped, a charge with hazardous voltages may still
remain in the main circuit terminals of the AC motor drive.
 The performance of electrolytic capacitor will degrade if it is not charged for a long time.
It is recommended to charge the drive which is stored in no charge condition every 2
years for 3–4 hours to restore the performance of electrolytic capacitor in the motor
drive. NOTE: When power up the motor drive, use adjustable AC power source (e.g. AC
autotransformer) to charge the drive at 70%–80% of rated voltage for 30 minutes (do not
run the motor drive). Then charge the drive at 100% of rated voltage for an hour (do not
run the motor drive). By doing these, restore the performance of electrolytic capacitor
before starting to run the motor drive. Do NOT run the motor drive at 100% rated voltage
right away.
 Pay attention to the following precautions when transporting and installing this package
(including wooden crate and wood stave)
1. If you need to deworm the wooden crate, do NOT use fumigation or you will damage
the drive. Any damage to the drive caused by using fumigation voids the warranty.
2. Use other methods, such as heat treatment or any other non-fumigation treatment, to
deworm the wood packaging material.
3. If you use heat treatment to deworm, leave the packaging materials in an
environment of over 56°C for a minimum of thirty minutes.
 Connect the drive to a three-phase three-wire or three-phase four-wire Wye system to
comply with UL standards.
 If the motor drive generates leakage current over AC 3.5 mA or over DC 10 mA on a
grounding conductor, compliance with local grounding regulations or IEC61800-5-1
standard is the minimum requirement for grounding.
NOTE: The content of this manual may be revised without prior notice. Consult our distributors or download the
latest version at http://www.deltaww.com/iadownload_acmotordrive
I
Table of Contents
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................. 1-1
1-1 Nameplate Information…...........................................................................................................1-2
1-2 Model Name…………................................................................................................................1-3
1-3 Serial Number............................................................................................................................1-3
1-4 Apply After-sales Service by Mobile Device…………………….….………………………...……1-4
1-5 RFI Switch………………………………..…………….…………….….………………………...……1-7
1-6 Dimensions…………………….…………………...…………….….………………………...……1-10
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION ................................................................................................................. 2-1

2-1 Mounting Clearance..................................................................................................................2-2
2-2 Airflow and Power Dissipation....................................................................................................2-3
CHAPTER 3 WIRING ................................................................................................................................ 3-1

3-1 System Wiring Diagram.............................................................................................................3-3
3-2 Wiring.......................................................................................................................3-4
CHAPTER 4 MAIN CIRCUIT TERMINALS .............................................................................................. 4-1

4-1 Main Circuit Diagram..................................................................................................................4-3
4-2 Main Circuit Terminal Specifications……...................................................................................4-5
CHAPTER 5 CONTROL TERMINALS ..................................................................................................... 5-1

5-1 Remove the Cover before Wiring…...........................................................................................5-2
5-2 Control Terminal Specifications..................................................................................................5-4
5-3 Control Circuit Terminals............................................................................................................5-5
CHAPTER 6 OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES ................................................................................….………6-1

6-1 Brake Resistors and Brake Units Used in AC Motor Drives.......................................................6-2
6-2 Non-fuse Circuit Breaker……………………...............................................................................6-7
6-3 Fuse Specification Chart………………………………………………….…………………………...6-7
6-4 AC / DC Reactor ……................................................................................................................6-8
6-5 Zero Phase Reactor …………………….……...........................................................................6-33
6-6 EMC Filter…………………………….........................................................................................6-37
6-7 Digital Keypad……………........................................................................................................6-48
6-8 USB/RS-485 Communication Interface IFD6530.....................................................................6-52
CHAPTER 7 OPTION CARDS ................................................................................................................. 7-1

7-1 Option Card Installation..............................................................................................................7-2
7-2 EMED-PGABD-2........................................................................................................................7-5
7-3 EMED-PGHSD-3......................................................................................................................7-16
7-4 EMED-PGHSD-4......................................................................................................................7-24
CHAPTER 8 SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................................................... 8-1

8-1 230V Models..............................................................................................................8-2
II
8-2 460V Models........................................................................................................................8-2
8-3 General Specifications...............................................................................................................8-3
8-4 Operation, Storage and Transportation Environments...............................................................8-4
8-5 Derating Curve...........................................................................................................................8-5
CHAPTER 9 DIGITAL KEYPAD ...............................................................................................................9-1

9-1 Description of Keyboard Panel……………….............................................................................9-2
9-2 Keypad Operation Process………………………………….........................................................9-4
9-3 Description of the Digital Keypad KPC-CC01……………..........................................................9-5
9-4 Digital Keypad KPC-CC01 Functions………………………........................................................9-8
9-5 Digital Keypad KPC-CC01 Fault Codes and Descriptions........................................................9-19
9-6 TPEditor Installation…………………………………..................................................................9-25
CHAPTER 10 AUTO-TUNING PROCESS…... .......................................................................................10-1

10-1 Tuning in Easy Steps for IM………………............................................................................10-2
10-2 Tuning in Easy Steps for PM………………...........................................................................10-3
10-3 Descriptions of Tuning Steps……………………………………………………………………...10-4
10-4 Elevator Performance Fine-tuning …….................................................................................10-24
CHAPTER 11 SUMMARY OF PARAMETER SETTINGS....................................................................... 11-1
CHAPTER 12 DESCRIPTIONS OF PARAMETER SETTINGS ........................................................ 12-00-1

00 Drive Parameters…………....…………….……………………………………….……………..12-00-2
01 Basic Parameters………………………..……………………………………….……………….12-01-1
02 Digital Input / Output Parameters…………………………………………….………………...12-02-1
03 Analog Input / Output Parameters…………………………………………….………………..12-03-1
04 Multi-step Speed Parameters………………………………………………….………………..12-04-1
05 IM Parameters………………………….…..…………………………………….……………….12-05-1
06 Protection Parameters……………….……………………………………….………………..12-06-1
07 Special Parameters…………………….……………………………………….………………..12-07-1
08 PM Parameters……………………….………………………………………….………………..12-08-1
09 Communication Parameters………..……….……………………………….………………..12-09-1
10 Feedback Control Parameters.….…………………………………………….………………..12-10-1
11 Advanced Parameters…………………..……………………………………….……………….12-11-1
12 User-defined Parameters…………………..………………………………….………………...12-12-1
13 View User-defined Parameters……………………………………………….………………...12-13-1
CHAPTER 13 WARNING CODES ..........................................................................................................13-1
CHAPTER 14 FAULT CODES ................................................................................................................14-1
CHAPTER 15 MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING…... .......................................................... 15-1

15-1 Maintenance and Inspections…….………............................................................................15-3
15-2 Greasy Dirt Problems…………………..……...........................................................................15-6
15-3 Fiber Dust Problems…………………..…………..………………………………………………...15-7
III
15-4 Corrosion Problems ……........................................................................................................15-8
15-5 Industrial Dust Problems ……………...………........................................................................15-9
15-6 Installation and Wiring Problems….......................................................................................15-10
15-7 Multi-function Input / Output Terminal Application Problems……….......................................15-11
CHAPTER 16 SAFE TORQUE OFF FUNCTION…... ............................................................................. 16-1

16-1 Failure Rate of the Drives Safety Function .............................................................................16-2
16-2 Description of STO’s Functions…………….............................................................................16-3
16-3 Wiring Diagram……………………………..………………………………………..……………...16-4
16-4 Related Parameters ……........................................................................................................16-7
16-5 Timing Diagram Description…………...………........................................................................16-8
16-6 Fault Codes Related to STO…..............................................................................................16-11
APPENDIX A. EMC STANDARD INSTALLATION GUIDE………………………………………………......A-1

A-1 Introduction………………........................................................................................................A-3
A-2 How to Prevent EMC……..........................................................................................................A-4
A-3 Solution to EMC: Grounding……...............................................................................................A-7
A-4 Solution to EMC: Shielding………………………………………………......................................A-14
A-5 Solution to EMC: Filter………………….……………………………….......................................A-18
APPENDIX B. MODBUS PROTOCOL…………………...……………..…………………………………......B-1

B-1 Code Description …………........................................................................................................B-2
B-2 Data Format……........................................................................................................................B-2
B-3 Communication Protocol…........................................................................................................B-3
B-4 Address List…………………………...……………………………………......................................B-8
B-5 Exception Response…………………..…………………………………......................................B-12
APPENDIX C. REVISION HISTORY……………………………..…………………………………………......C-1
Issued Edition: 00
Firmware Version: V1.11 (Refer to Pr.00-06 on the product for the firmware version.)
Issued Date: June, 2023
IV
Chapter 1 Introduction | VFD-ED
Chapter 1 Introduction
1-1 Nameplate Information

1-2 Model Name
1-3 Serial Number
1-4 Apply After-sales Service by Mobile Device
1-5 RFI Switch
1-6 Dimensions
1-1
After you receive the AC motor drive, check the following:

1. Inspect the unit after unpacking to ensure that it was not damaged during shipment. Make sure that
the part number printed on the package corresponds with the part number indicated on the
nameplate.
2. Make sure that the voltage for the wiring is in the range indicated on the nameplate. Install the AC
motor drive according to this manual.
3. Before applying the power, make sure that all the devices, including power, motor, control board and
digital keypad are connected correctly.
4. When wiring the AC motor drive, make sure that the wiring for input terminals “R/L1, S/L2, T/L3” and
output terminals “U/T1, V/T2, W/T3” is correct to prevent drive damage.
5. When power is applied, select the language and set parameter groups with the digital operation
panel (KPED-LE01). When executing a trial run, begin with a low speed and then gradually increase
the speed until reaching the desired speed.
1-1 Nameplate Information

This example uses the 15HP/11kW 230V, three-phase motor drive.
Figure 1-1
1-2
1-2 Model Name
Figure 1-2
1-3 Serial Number
Figure 1-3
1-3
1-4 Apply After-sales Service by Mobile Device

1-4-1 Location of Service Link Label
Frame B
Figure 1-4 below shows the service link label (service label) that is located on the side of the case.
Service
Label
Figure 1-4
Frame C
Remove the front cover of the case to find the service link label (service label) located on the upper
left corner as shown in Figure 1-5 below.
Figure 1-5
1-4
Frame D
Service Label
Figure 1-6
Frame E
Service Label
Figure 1-7
1-5
1-4-2 Service Link Label
QR code
http://service.deltaww.com/ia/repair?sn=serial number
Serial number
Web address of after - sales service
Figure 1-8
Scan QR Code to request service

1. Find the QR code sticker (as Figure 1-8 shows above).
2. Run the QR code reader App on your smartphone.
3. Point your camera at the QR Code. Hold your camera steady until the QR code comes into
focus.
4. Access the Delta After-sales Service website.
5. Fill in the information in the columns marked with an orange star.
6. Enter the CAPTCHA and click Submit to complete the request.
Cannot find the QR Code?

1. Open a web browser on your computer or smartphone.
2. Enter https://service.deltaww.com/us/Repair/Request?type=IA in the browser address bar
and press the Enter key.
3. Fill in the information in the columns marked with an orange star.
4. Enter the CAPTCHA and click Submit to complete the request.
1-6
1-5 RFI Switch

The AC motor drive may emit electrical noise. You can use the RFI (Radio Frequency Interference)
switch to suppress interference on the power line. The RFI switches on Frames B, C, D, E are at similar
locations. Open the drive’s top cover to remove the RFI switch as shown in Figure 1-9 below.
Figure 1-9
NOTE: The RFI switches on Frame s B/C/D/E are at similar locations.
1-7
Isolating main power from ground

When the power distribution system for the motor drive is a floating ground system (IT Systems) or an
asymmetric ground system (Corner Grounded TN Systems), you must remove the RFI switch. Removing
the switch also cuts off the internal RFI capacitor (filter capacitor) between the system's frame and the
central circuits to avoid damaging the central circuits and reduces the ground leakage current.
Important points regarding ground connection

 To ensure the safety of personnel, ensure proper operation, and reduce electromagnetic radiation,
you must properly ground the motor and drive during installation.
 The diameter of the grounding cables must meet the size specified by safety regulations.
 You must connect the shielded cable to the motor drive’s ground to meet safety regulations.
 Only use the shielded cable as the ground for equipment when the above points are met.
 When installing multiple sets of motor drives, do not connect the motor drives’ grounds in series. See
the following image.
Figure 1-10 Figure 1-11

Pay particular attention to the following points
 Do not remove the RFI switch while the power is ON.
 Make sure the main power is OFF before removing the RFI switch.
 Removing the RFI switch also cuts the capacitor conductivity. Gap discharge may occur once the
transient voltage exceeds 1000 V.
NOTE: If you remove the RFI switch, you remove the reliable electrical isolation. In other words, all
controlled inputs and outputs become low-voltage terminals with basic electrical isolation. Also, when
you remove the internal RFI switch, the motor drive is no longer electromagnetic compatible (EMC).
 Do not remove the RFI switch if the main power is a grounded power system.
 You must remove the RFI switch when conducting high voltage tests. When conducting a high
voltage test for the entire facility, disconnect the main power and the motor if the leakage current is
too high.
Floating Ground System (IT Systems)

A floating ground system is also called an IT system, ungrounded system, or high impedance/resistance
(greater than 30 Ω) grounding system.
 Disconnect the ground cable from the internal EMC filter.
 In situations where EMC is required, check for excess electromagnetic radiation affecting nearby low-
voltage circuits. In some situations, the adapter and cable naturally provide enough suppression. If in
doubt, install an extra electrostatic shielded cable on the power supply side between the main circuit
and the control terminals to increase shielding.
 Do not install an external RFI/EMC filter. The external EMC filter passes through a filter capacitor and
connects power input to the ground. This is very dangerous and damages the motor drive.
1-8
Asymmetric Ground System (Corner Grounded TN Systems)

Caution: Do not remove the RFI switch while power to the motor drive input terminal is ON.
In the following four situations, you must remove the RFI switch. This is to prevent the system from
grounding through the RFI capacitor and damaging the motor drive.
Conditions for removing the RFI switch
1. Grounding at a corner in a triangle configuration 2. Grounding at a midpoint in a polygonal
configuration
L1
L1
L2 L2
L3 L3

3. Grounding at one end in a single-phase 4. No stable neutral grounding in a three-phase
configuration autotransformer configuration
L1 L1
L1
L2
L2
L3
N
L3
Figure 1-14
Figure 1-15
Using the RFI switch

In the situation as the diagram on the right shows, you can L1
use the RFI switch to pass through RFI capacitor to make
an internal grounding and reduce electromagnetic radiation.
In a situation with higher requirements for electromagnetic
compatibility and a symmetrical grounding power system,
you can install an EMC filter. For example, Figure 1-16 on
the right is a symmetrical grounding power system. L2
L3
Figure 1-16
1-9
1-6 Dimensions
Frame B
VFD022ED21S, VFD037ED21S, VFD040ED23S/43S
Figure 1-17
Unit: mm (inch)
Frame W W1 H H1 H2 D D1* S1 A B C
193.5 162.5 260.0 247.0 230.0 133.5 58.0 6.5 138.6 67.2 17.6
B
(7.60) (6.39) (10.22) (9.71) (9.04) (5.25) (2.28) (0.26) (5.46) (2.66) (0.69)
*D1: This dimension is for flange mounting application reference.
1-10
Frame C
VFD055ED23S/43S, VFD075ED23S/43S, VFD110ED23S/43S, VFD150ED43S, VFD185ED43S
Figure 1-18
Unit: mm (inch)
Frame W W1 W2 H H1 H2 D D1* S1 S2 S3 ∅1 ∅2
235.0 204.0 176.0 350.0 337.0 320.0 146.0 70.0 6.5 9.0 7.0 19.7 28.3
C
(9.25) (8.03) (6.93) (13.78) (13.27) (15.60) (5.75) (2.76) (0.26) (0.35) (0.28) (0.78) (1.11)
NOTE: A1–A4 and B1–B4 can be used for screwdriver installation; B1–B4 can also be used for sleeve installation
1-11
Frame D
VFD150ED23S, VFD185ED23S, VFD220ED23S/43S, VFD300ED43S
Figure 1-19
Unit: mm (inch)
Frame W W1 H H1 H2 D D1* S1 ∅1 ∅2 ∅3
255.0 226.0 403.8 384.0 360.0 178.0 94.0 8.5 17.5 32.0 26.0
D
(10.04) (8.90) (15.90) (15.12) (14.17) (7.01) (3.70) (0.33) (0.69) (1.26) (1.02)
1-12
Frame E
VFD300ED23S, VFD370ED23S/43S, VFD450ED43S, VFD550ED43S, VFD750ED43S
D
W SEE DETAIL A D1
W1 D2
H1
H2
H
S2
SEE DETAIL B
S1 S1
DETAIL A DETAIL B
(MOUNTING HOLE) (MOUNTING HOLE)
Figure 1-20
Unit: mm (inch)
Frame W W1 H H1 H2 D D1* D2 S1 S2
330.0 285.0 550.0 525.0 492.0 273.4 107.2 16.0 11.0 18.0
E
(12.99) (11.22) (21.65) (20.67) (19.37) (10.76) (4.22) (0.63) (0.43) (0.71)
1-13
Built-In Keyboard Panel
KPED-LE01 Unit: mm [inch]
Figure 1-21
1-14
Chapter 2 Installation | VFD-ED
Chapter 2 Installation
2-1 Mounting Clearance

2-2 Airflow and Power Dissipation
2-1
2-1 Mounting Clearance

 Prevent fiber particles, scraps of paper, shredded wood, sawdust, metal particles, etc. from
adhering to the heat sink.
 Install the AC motor drive in a metal cabinet to prevent the risk of fire.
 Install the AC motor drive in a Pollution Degree 2 (IEC 60664-1) environment with clean and
circulating air. A clean and circulating environment means air without polluting substances and dust.
The motor drives’ figures shown below are for reference only. The actual motor drives may look different.
H Air Flow
W W
Figure 2-1
Minimum Mounting Clearance
W (Width) H (Height)
Frame Capacity Model No.
mm (inch) mm (inch)
3.0–5.0 HP
B VFD022ED21S, VFD037ED21S, VFD040ED23S/43S 50 (2) 150 (6)
(2.2–4 kW)
7.5–15 HP VFD055ED23S/43S, VFD075ED23S/43S,

C 75 (3) 175 (7)
(5.5–11 kW) VFD110ED23S/43S, VFD150ED43S, VFD185ED43S
20–40 HP VFD150ED23S, VFD185ED23S, VFD220ED23S/43S,

D 75 (3) 200 (8)
(15–30 kW) VFD300ED43S
40–100 HP VFD300ED23S, VFD370ED23S/43S, VFD450ED43S,

E 75 (3) 200 (8)
(30–75 kW) VFD550ED43S, VFD750ED43S
NOTE: The minimum mounting clearances stated in Table 2-1 apply to AC motor drives frame B, Table 2-1
C, D and E. Failure to follow the minimum mounting clearances may cause the motor drive fan to
malfunction and cause heat dissipation problems.
2-2
2-2 Airflow and Power Dissipation

Power Dissipation for
Airflow Rate for Cooling
AC Motor Drive
Model No. Flow Rate (cfm) Flow Rate (m3/hr) Power Dissipation (W)
Loss External
External Internal Total External Internal Total Internal Total
(Heat Sink)
VFD022ED21S 13.7 - 13.7 23.3 - 23.3 60 36 96
VFD037ED21S 23.9 - 23.9 40.7 - 40.7 84 46 130
VFD040ED23S 23.9 - 23.9 40.7 - 40.7 133 49 182
VFD055ED23S 48.5 - 48.5 82.4 - 82.4 212 67 279
VFD075ED23S 48.5 - 48.5 82.4 - 82.4 292 86 379
VFD110ED23S 47.9 - 47.9 81.4 - 81.4 355 121 476
VFD150ED23S 64.6 - 64.6 109.8 - 109.8 490 161 651
VFD185ED23S 102.3 - 102.3 173.8 - 173.8 638 184 822
VFD220ED23S 102.8 - 102.8 174.7 - 174.7 723 217 939
VFD300ED23S 179 30 209 304 51 355 932 186 1118
VFD370ED23S 179 30 209 304 51 355 1112 222 1334
VFD040ED43S 13.7 - 13.7 23.3 - 23.3 123 42 165
VFD055ED43S 48.5 - 48.5 82.4 - 82.4 185 55 240
VFD075ED43S 48.5 - 48.5 82.4 - 82.4 249 71 320
VFD110ED43S 47.9 - 47.9 81.4 - 81.4 337 94 431
VFD150ED43S 46.1 - 46.1 78.4 - 78.4 302 123 425
VFD185ED43S 46.1 - 46.1 78.4 - 78.4 391 139 529
VFD220ED43S 102.8 - 102.8 174.7 - 174.7 642 141 783
VFD300ED43S 83.7 - 83.7 142.2 - 142.2 839 180 1019
VFD370ED43S 179 30 209 304 51 355 803 252 1055
VFD450ED43S 179 30 209 304 51 355 1014 270 1284
VFD550ED43S 179 30 209 304 51 355 1244 275 1519
VFD750ED43S 186 30 216 316 51 367 1541 338 1878

 The required airflow shown in Table 2-2 is for installing a  The heat dissipation shown in
single drive in a confined space. Table 2-2 is for installing a single
drive in a confined space.
 When installing multiple drives, the required air volume
 When installing multiple drives,
should be the required air volume for a single drive X the
volume of heat dissipation
number of the drives. should be the heat dissipated for
a single drive X the number of
the drives.
 Heat dissipation for each model
is calculated by rated voltage,
current and default carrier.
Table 2-2
2-3
[This page intentionally left blank]
2-4
Chapter 3 Wiring | VFD-ED
Chapter 3 Wiring
3-1 System Wiring Diagram

3-2 Wiring
3-1
After removing the front cover, verify if the power and control terminals are clearly noted. Read the
following precautions to avoid wiring mistakes.
 Turn off the AC motor drive power before installing any wiring. A hazardous charge
may still remain in the DC bus capacitors after the power has been turned off.
Measure the remaining voltage before wiring. For your safety, do not perform any
wiring before the voltage drops to a safe level < 25 VDC. Performing a wiring
installation while voltage remains may cause sparks and short circuits.
 Only qualified personnel familiar with AC motor drives are allowed to perform
installation, wiring and commissioning. Make sure the power is turned off before
wiring to prevent electric shock.
 Make sure that power is only applied to the R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3 terminals. Failure
to comply may result in damage to the equipment. The voltage and current should
be within the range indicated on the AC motor drive nameplate (see Section 1-1
Nameplate Information).
 All the units must be grounded directly to a common ground terminal to prevent
damage from a lightning strike or electric shock.
 Make sure you correctly tighten the main circuit terminal screws to prevent sparks
from screws that have been loosened due to vibration.
 When wiring, choose wires that comply with local regulations for your safety.
 Check the following items after finishing the wiring:
1. Are all connections correct?
2. Are there any loose wires?
3. Are there any short circuits between the terminals or to ground?
3-2
3-1 System Wiring Diagram
Supply power according to the rated power

Power input
specifications indicated in the user manual (see
terminal
Chapter 8 Specifications).
There may be a large inrush current during
NFB
power-on. See Section 6-2 NFB to select a
or
suitable NFB or Section 6-3 Fuse Specification
fuse
Chart for a fuse.
Switching the power ON/OFF on the primary
side of the magnetic contactor can turn the drive
ON/OFF, but frequent switching can cause
Magnetic machine failure. Do not switch ON/OFF more
contactor than once an hour.
Do not use the magnetic contactor as the power
switch for the drive; doing so shortens the life of
the drive.
When the main power supply capacity is greater
than 1000 kVA, or when it switches into the
phase capacitor, the instantaneous peak voltage
and current generated may destroy the internal
AC reactor
circuit of the drive. It is recommended that you
(Input
install an AC reactor at input side in the drive.
terminal)
This also improves the power factor and reduces
power harmonics. The wiring distance should be
within 10 m. See Section 6-4 AC/DC Reactor for
details.
Used to reduce radiated interference, especially
in environments with audio devices, and reduce
Zero phase
input and output side interference.
reactor
The effective range is AM band to 10 MHz.
Figure 3-1 See Section 6-5 Zero Phase Reactor for details.
NOTE: For details, see the wiring diagrams in Can be used to reduce electromagnetic
Section 3-2. EMC filter interference. See Section 6-6 EMC Filter for
details.
Brake
module Used to shorten the deceleration time of the
& motor. See Section 6-1 Brake Resistors and
Brake Brake Units Used in AC Motor Drives for details.
resistor (BR)
The motor cable length affects the size of the
reflected wave on the motor end. It is
AC reactor
recommended that you install an AC output
(output
reactor when the motor wiring length exceeds 20
terminal)
meters. See Section 6-4 AC/DC Reactor for
details.
Table 2-1
3-3
3-2 Wiring
3-2-1 Wiring Diagram
Figure 3-2
Figure 3-3
3-4
Figure 3-4
NOTE:
1. *1: See Section 6-1 Brake Resistors & Brake Units Used in AC Motor Drives for details
2. For details on EPS wiring, see Section 3-2-3 Emergency Power Supply (EPS) System Wiring Diagrams.
3-5
Figure 3-5
3-6
3-2-2 Switch between Two Modes: SINK (NPN) / SOURCE (PNP)
3-7
3-2-3 Emergency Power Supply (EPS) system wiring diagrams

Frames B, C, D & E
1. Single-phase UPS or battery can only be used on the main power supply side
Figure 3-10
Frames C & D
2. When the voltage of the main power supply is lower than 140 VDC (230V models) / 280 VDC (460V
models), connect the control power to single-phase UPS or battery.
Figure 3-11
3-8
Figure 3-12
NOTE:
When EPS is enabled (MI=43):
 Do NOT make the fan run in case voltage drops during EPS.
 Parameter settings cannot be saved and will be lost after cycling power.
 Set the running speed through Pr.06-44.
 Functions of low voltage and phase loss protection are unavailable.
 Set the DC bus voltage through Pr.06-29.
3-9
3-10
Chapter 4 Main Circuit Terminals | VFD-ED
Chapter 4 Main Circuit Terminals
4-1 Main Circuit Diagram

4-2 Main Circuit Terminal Specifications
4-1
 Tighten the screws in the main circuit terminal to prevent sparks caused by screws
loosened due to vibration.
 Ensure proper insulation of the main circuit wiring in accordance with the relevant
safety regulations.
Main input power terminals

 Do not connect a three-phase model to single-phase power. R/L1, S/L2 and T/L3 have
no phase-sequence requirement and can be connected in any sequence.
 You must install a NFB between the three-phase power input terminals and the main
circuit terminals (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3). Add a magnetic contactor (MC) to the power input
wiring to cut off power quickly and reduce malfunctions when the AC motor drive
protection function activates. Both ends of the MC should have an R-C surge absorber.
 Use voltage and current within the specifications in Chapter 8.
 When using a general ELB (Earth Leakage Breaker), select a current sensor with
sensitivity of 200 mA or above and not less than 0.1 second operation time to avoid
nuisance tripping. When choosing an ELB designed for the AC motor drive, choose a
current sensor with sensitivity of 30 mA or above.
 Use shielded wire or conduit for the power wiring and ground the two ends of the
shielding or conduit.
 Do NOT run and stop the AC motor drives by turning the power ON and OFF. Run
and stop the AC motor drives by sending the RUN and STOP commands through the
control terminals or the keypad. If you still need to run and stop the AC motor drives
by turning the power ON and OFF, do so no more often than ONCE per hour.
Output terminals of the main circuit

 When it is necessary to install a filter at the output side of the AC motor drive terminals
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, use an inductance filter. Do not use phase-compensation capacitors
or L-C (Inductance-Capacitance) or R-C (Resistance-Capacitance) capacitors.
 DO NOT connect phase-compensation capacitors or surge absorbers at the output
terminals of AC motor drives.
 Use well-insulated motors to prevent any electric leakage from the motors.
Use terminals [+1, +2] for connecting a DC reactor.

Use terminals [+1, +2/B1] for connecting a DC bus.
 Use these terminals to connect a DC reactor to improve the power factor and reduce
harmonics. A jumper is connected to these terminals at the factory. Remove that
jumper before connecting to a DC reactor.
Figure 4-1
 Models above 22 kW do not have a built-in brake resistor. To improve resistance
braking, connect an optional external brake resistor.
 When not in use, leave terminals +2/B1, [－] open.
 Short-circuiting [B2] or [－] to [+2/B1] damages the motor drive. Do NOT short-circuit
those terminals.
4-2
4-1 Main Circuit Diagram

Frame B
Figure 4-2
Frames C & D
Figure 4-3
Frame E
Figure 4-4
4-3
Terminals Descriptions
Backup power/ Emergency power connection terminal.
EPS (+, -) NOTE: EPS (Emergency Power Supply) input terminal supports only Frame
C and Frame D.
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 AC line input terminals (three-phase)
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 AC motor drive output terminals for connecting a three-phase induction motor.
Connections for DC reactor to improve the power factor. Remove the jumper
+1, +2/B1
before installing a DC reactor (Frame E has a built-in DC reactor).
+2/B1, B2 Connections for brake resistor (optional).
Ground connection; comply with local regulations.
Table 4-1
4-4
4-2 Main Circuit Terminal Specifications

Frame B
Figure 4-5
Main Circuit Terminals

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, Terminal
Model +(DC+), -(DC-), B1, B2
Screw Size & Screw Size &
Min. Wire Max. Wire Min. Wire Max. Wire
Tightening Torque Tightening Torque
Gauge Gauge Gauge Gauge
(±10%) (±10%)
VFD022ED21S 2.1 mm² 2.1 mm² M4
M4
VFD040ED43S (14 AWG) 5.3 mm² 18 kg-cm (14 AWG) 5.3 mm² 18 kg-cm
VFD037ED21S 3.3 mm² (10 AWG) (15.6 lb-in.) 3.3 mm² (10 AWG) (15.6 lb-in.)
VFD040ED23S (12 AWG) (1.7 N-m) (12 AWG) (1.7 N-m)
Table 4-2
NOTE:
 For UL installation compliance, select copper wires with voltage rating of 600V and temperature
resistance of 75°C.
 Choose terminal wire size as Figure 4-6 shows.
 Use insulated heat shrink tubing that is resistant to at least 600V to comply with UL and CSA
regulations (600 V, YDPU2), as Figure 4-7 shows.
 If you install at Ta 50°C environment, use copper wires with voltage rating of 600V and
temperature resistance of 75°C or 90°C.
 If you install at Ta 50°C above environment, use copper wires with voltage rating of 600V and
temperature resistance of 90°C or above.
 To be UL installation compliant, you must use copper wires when installing. The wire gauge is
based on temperature resistance of 75°C, in accordance with UL requirements and
recommendations. Do not reduce the wire gauge when using high-temperature resistant wire.
4-5
Frame C
Figure 4-8

+1, +2/B1, -, B2
Model
Tightening Torque Tightening
(±10%) Torque (±10%)
VFD055ED23S 3.3 mm² 3.3 mm²
VFD110ED43S (10 AWG) (10 AWG)
VFD055ED43S 3.3 mm² 3.3 mm²
(12 AWG) M5 (12 AWG) M5
VFD075ED43S
13.3 mm² 30 kg-cm 13.3 mm² 30 kg-cm
VFD075ED23S (6 AWG) (26 lb-in.) (6 AWG) (26 lb-in.)
8.4 mm² 8.4 mm²
VFD150ED43S (2.9 N-m) (2.9 N-m)
(8 AWG) (8 AWG)
VFD185ED43S
13.3 mm² 13.3 mm²
VFD110ED23S
(6 AWG) (6 AWG)
Table 4-3
NOTE:
4-6
Frame D
Figure 4-11

+1, +2/B1, -, B2
Model
Tightening Tightening
Torque (±10%) Torque (±10%)
VFD150ED23S 21.1 mm² 16 mm²
VFD300ED43S (4 AWG) (6 AWG)
26.7 mm² M6 16 mm² M6
VFD185ED23S 33.6 mm² 50 kg-cm 33.6 mm² 50 kg-cm
(3 AWG) (6 AWG)
13.3 mm² (2 AWG) (43.4 lb-in.) 13.3 mm² (2 AWG) (43.4 lb-in.)
VFD220ED43S (4.9 N-m) (4.9 N-m)
(6 AWG) (6 AWG)
33.6 mm² 16 mm²
VFD220ED23S
(2 AWG) (6 AWG)
Table 4-4
NOTE:
4-7
Frame E
Figure 4-14

+1(DC+), -(DC-)
Model
Tightening Tightening
Torque (±10%) Torque (±10%)
53.5 mm² 33.6 mm²
VFD370ED43S
(1/0 AWG) (2 AWG)
67.4 mm² 53.5 mm²
VFD450ED43S M8 M8
(2/0 AWG) (1/0 AWG)
152 mm² 200 kg-cm 152 mm² 200 kg-cm
VFD300ED23S 107 mm² (300 MCM) (173 lb-in.) 53.5 mm² (300 MCM) (173 lb-in.)
VFD550ED43S (4/0 AWG) (19.6 N-m) (1/0 AWG) (19.6 N-m)
VFD370ED23S 152 mm² 85.0 mm²
VFD750ED43S (300 MCM) (3/0 AWG)
Table 4-5
NOTE:
4-8
Chapter 5 Control Terminals | VFD-ED
Chapter 5 Control Terminals
5-1 Remove the Cover before Wiring

5-2 Control Terminal Specifications
5-3 Control Circuit Terminals
5-1
5-1 Remove the Cover before Wiring

Remove the top cover before wiring the multi-function input and output terminals
NOTE: The motor drives’ figures shown below are for reference only. The actual motor drives may look
different.
Frame B, C and D
Step 1: Loosen the four screws
Figure 5-1
Step 2: Remove the top cover
Figure 5-2
Step 3: Attach the top cover, and then

tighten the four screws using
torque force 15 kgf-cm.
Figure 5-3
5-2
Frame E
Step 1: Loosen the two screws in the

direction as the arrow shows
Figure 5-4
Figure 5-5

tighten the two screws using
Figure 5-6
5-3
5-2 Control Terminal Specifications
Figure 5-7
Terminal
Wire Gauge Torque Force (±10 %)
Socket
A
B 0.2–2.5 mm² (28–14 AWG) 2 kg-cm / (1.7 lb-in.) / (0.20 Nm)
D - 2 kg-cm / (1.7 lb-in.) / (0.20 Nm)
E 0.2–4.0 mm² (28–12 AWG) 5.2 kg-cm / (4.5 lb-in.) / (0.51 Nm)
NOTE: To comply with UL standards, use copper wires in the installation that Table 5-1
are able to withstand 600V, 75ºC environments.
5-4
5-3 Control Circuit Terminals

Terminals Terminal Function Default (NPN mode)
+24 V / Digital control signal common
+24V ± 5% 200 mA
E24 V terminal (Source)
Digital control signal common
COM Common terminal for multi-function input terminals
terminal (Sink)
FWD-DCM:
FWD Forward-Stop command ON = run in forward
OFF = decelerate to stop
REV-DCM:
REV Reverse-Stop command ON = run in reverse
OFF = decelerate to stop
Refer to parameters Pr.02-01–Pr.02-08 to program
the multi-function inputs MI1–MI8.
Source mode:
 Rated load: 24 VDC / 9.6 mA
MI1
 Source Mode (PNP)
– Multi-function input 1–8
N.O. (ON, 1): ≥ 17 VDC
MI8
N.C. (OFF, 0): ≤ 5 VDC
 Sink Mode (NPN)
N.O. (ON, 1): ≤ 7 VDC
N.C. (OFF, 0): ≥ 19 VDC
Digital frequency signal common
DCM
terminal
SCM1
The default is short-circuited (E24V/STO1/STO2).
SCM2 The default is short-circuited (SCM1/SCM2/DCM).
STO1 Power cutoff safety function for EN954-1 and IEC/EN61508.
When STO1–SCM1 and STO2–SCM2 are ON, the activation current is 3.3 mA ≥ 11 VDC.
STO2
Power supply for analog frequency setting: +10 VDC
+10 V Potentiometer power supply
20 mA
Power supply for analog frequency setting: -10 VDC
-10 V Potentiometer power supply
20 mA
Analog voltage frequency
AUI1 command
Impedance: 20 kΩ
Range: -10–10 VDC = 0–Maximum Output
Frequency (Pr.01-00)
AUI2
5-5

Analog signal common terminal
ACM Analog signal common terminal
control
RA Multi-function relay output A (N.O.)
RB Multi-function relay output A (N.C.)
Multi-function relay output B
RC User-defined function
(Default: error indication)
Resistive Load
MRA Multi-function output terminal (N.O.)
3 A (N.O.) / 3 A (N.C.) 250 VAC
MRB Multi-function output terminal (N.C.)
5 A (N.O.) / 3 A (N.C.) 30 VDC
Multi-function output terminal
MRC (minimum 5 VDC, 10 mA)
(Default: operating indication)
Multi-function output terminal A
R1A To output different kinds of monitoring signals
(N.O.)
such as motor drive in operation, frequency
Multi-function output terminal A
R2A reached, and overload indication.
(N.O.)
Multi-function output terminal
R12C
(Default: no function)
SG1+ Modbus RS-485
SG1+ switch: terminator 120 ohm (default) / open
SG1- Modbus RS-485
CAN_L CAN Bus

DIP switch: terminator 120 ohm (default) / open
CAN_H CAN Bus
The AC motor drive outputs

Multi-function output terminal 1
MO1 various monitoring signals,
(photo coupler)
such as drive in operation,
frequency reached, and
Multi-function output terminal 2
MO2 overload indication through
(photo coupler)
a transistor (open collector).
Multi-function output common

MCM Maximum 48VDC 50mA
terminal (photo coupler)
0-10 V, max. output current: 2 mA, max. load: 5 kΩ

AFM1 -10–10 V, max. output current: 2 mA, max. load: 5
kΩ
5-6

Maximum output current: 2 mA
Resolution: 0–10 V, corresponds to the maximum
AFM2 operating frequency.
Range: 0–10 V→ -10–10 V
PINS 1, 2, 6, 7: Reserved
PIN 3: SGND
RJ45 PIN 4: SG-
PIN 5: SG+
PIN 8: EV
DIP switch: NRM (default) /
PRG (use this side of the switch
to update firmware). Updating
SW2 Switching USB port firmware should be done by
qualified motor drive service
personnel only. Do NOT try to
update the firmware by yourself.
NOTE: NRM = Normal Table 5-2
5-7
5-8
Chapter 6 Optional Accessories | VFD-ED
Chapter 6 Optional Accessories
6-1 Brake Resistors and Brake Units Used in AC Motor Drives

6-2 Non-fuse Circuit Breaker
6-3 Fuse Specification Chart
6-4 AC / DC Reactor
6-5 Zero Phase Reactor
6-6 EMC Filter
6-7 Digital Keypad
6-8 USB / RS-485 Communication Interface IFD6530
6-1
The optional accessories listed in this chapter are available upon request. Installing additional
accessories to your drive can substantially improve the drive’s performance. Select accessories
according to your needs or contact your local distributor for suggestions.
6-1 Brake Resistors and Brake Units Used in AC Motor Drives

Recommended Model Selection
IM 10% ED*1 PM 30% ED*2
Delta’s
Voltage
Motor Drive Suggested Suggested Suggested Suggested

Min. Resistor Min. Resistor
Model Resistor Value*4 Braking Power Resistor Value Braking Power
Value*3 (Ω) Value (Ω)
(Ω) (kW) (Ω) (kW)
VFD022ED21S 38.0 70.0 0.3 38.0 50.0 1.0
VFD037ED21S 19.0 30.0 0.5 19.0 32.0 1.5
VFD040ED23S 19.0 30.0 0.5 19.0 32.0 1.5
VFD055ED23S 15.6 20.0 1.0 15.6 25.0 2.0
VFD075ED23S 11.5 20.0 1.0 11.5 16.7 3.0
230V VFD110ED23S 9.5 13.0 1.5 9.5 12.5 4.0
VFD150ED23S 8.3 10.0 2.0 8.3 10.0 5.0
VFD185ED23S 5.8 8.0 2.0 5.8 7.8 7.5
VFD220ED23S 5.8 6.6 3.0 5.8 6.5 9.0
VFD300ED23S 4.8 5.1 4.0 4.8 5.0 10.0
VFD370ED23S 3.2 3.9 4.8 3.2 3.6 14.0
VFD040ED43S 54.3 100.0 0.5 54.3 100.0 2.0
VFD055ED43S 48.4 75.0 1.0 48.4 100.0 2.0
VFD075ED43S 39.4 75.0 1.0 39.4 60.0 3.0
VFD110ED43S 30.8 43.0 1.5 30.8 50.0 4.0
VFD150ED43S 25.0 32.0 2.0 25 39.0 6.0
VFD185ED43S 20.8 32.0 2.0 20.8 26.0 7.2

460V
VFD220ED43S 19.0 26.0 3.0 19.0 26.0 9.0
VFD300ED43S 14.1 20.0 4.0 14.1 19.5 12.0
VFD370ED43S 12.7 14.3 4.5 13.8 15.6 15.0
VFD450ED43S 12.7 13.0 6.0 10.3 13.0 18.0
VFD550ED43S 9.5 10.2 8.0 6.9 9.8 19.2
VFD750ED43S 6.3 7.2 9.0 6.4 7.1 26.4
Table 6-1
* The brake resistor should be able to endure 10 times the overload capacity.
1
*2 The brake resistor should be able to endure 3.3 times the overload capacity.
*3 If you choose other brake resistors instead of Deltas, calculate the maximum power and average power of t he
selected braking power to ensure that they meet the requirements. Maximum power: Vb2/R; average power:
Vb2/R x ED%. (Vb stands for braking voltage; R stands for brake resistor value.)
*4 The calculation of the brake resistor value and braking power is based on Delta’s brake resistor.
6-2
IM Elevator System (Using Delta’s Brake Resistor)

Applicable Delta’s
125% Braking Torque/10% ED*1 Max. Braking Torque
Motor Drive
Voltage
Brake Unit Delta’s Brake Resistor*3 Max. Total

Braking Braking Min. Peak
Braking
HP Model Torque*2 Configurat Current Resistor Power
VFDB # Part No. # Current
(kg-m) ion (A)*4 Value (Ω) (kW)
(A)
3 VFD022ED21S 1.5 BR300W070 1 5.4 38.0 10.0 3.8
5 VFD037ED21S 2.5 BR500W030 1 12.7 19.0 20.0 7.6
5 VFD040ED23S 2.5 BR500W030 1 12.7 19.0 20.0 7.6
7.5 VFD055ED23S 3.7 BR1K0W020 1 19.0 15.6 24.4 9.3
10 VFD075ED23S 5.1 BR1K0W020 1 19.0 11.5 33.0 12.5
15 VFD110ED23S 7.5 BR1K5W013 1 29.2 9.5 40.0 15.2
230V 20 VFD150ED23S 10.2 BR1K0W020 2 2 parallel 38.0 8.3 46.0 17.5
25 VFD185ED23S 12.2 BR1K0W016 2 2 parallel 47.5 5.8 66.0 25.1
30 VFD220ED23S 14.9 BR1K5W3P3 2 2 in series 57.6 5.8 66.0 25.1
2 in series
40 VFD300ED23S 20.3 2015 2 BR1K0W5P1 4 74.5 4.8 80.0 30.4
2 parallel
2 in series
50 VFD370ED23S 25.1 2022 2 BR1K2W3P9 4 97.4 3.2 120.0 45.6
2 parallel
5 VFD040ED43S 2.7 BR500W100 1 7.6 54.3 14.0 10.6
7.5 VFD055ED43S 3.7 BR1K0W075 1 10.1 48.4 15.7 11.9
10 VFD075ED43S 5.1 BR1K0W075 1 10.1 39.4 19.3 14.7
15 VFD110ED43S 7.5 BR1K5W043 1 17.7 30.8 24.7 18.8
20 VFD150ED43S 10.1 BR1K0W016 2 2 in series 23.8 25.0 30.4 23.1
460V 2 in series
40 VFD300ED43S 20.3 BR1K0W020 4 38.0 14.1 54.0 41.0
2 parallel
50 VFD370ED43S 25.0 4045 1 BR1K5W043 3 3 parallel 53.0 12.7 60.0 45.6
2 in series
60 VFD450ED43S 30.4 4045 1 BR1K5W013 4 58.5 12.7 60.0 45.6
2 parallel
4 in series
75 VFD550ED43S 37.2 4030 2 BR1K0W5P1 8 74.5 9.5 80.0 60.8
2 parallel
Table 6-2
* Calculation of 125% braking torque: (kW)*125%*0.8; where 0.8 is the motor efficiency.
1
Since there is a resistor power consumption limit, the longest operation time for 10% ED is 10 seconds (ON: 10
seconds / OFF: 90 seconds).
*2 The calculation of the brake resistor is based on a four-pole motor (1800 rpm).
*3 To dissipate heat, mount a resistor of 400 W or lower to a frame to keep the surface temperature below 250°C
(482°F). Fix a resistor of 1000 W or higher to a surface to keep the surface temperature below 600°C (1112°F).
(If the resistor temperature is higher than 350°C, install extra cooling. If the resistor temperature is higher than
the temperature limit, increase the size of the resistor.)
*4 The calculation of the braking current is based on Delta’s brake resistor and default braking voltage (220VAC:
380VDC; 440VAC: 760VDC).
6-3
PM Elevator System (Using Delta’s Brake Resistor)

Applicable Delta’s
125% Braking Torque/30% ED*1 Max. Braking Torque
Motor Drive
Voltage
Brake Unit Delta’s Brake Resistor *3 Max. Total

Braking Braking Min. Peak
Braking
HP Model Torque*2 Configurat Current Resistor Power
VFDB # Part No. # Current
(kg-m) ion (A)*4 Value (Ω) (kW)
(A)
3 VFD022ED21S 1.5 BR1K0W050 1 7.6 38.0 10.0 3.8
7.5 VFD055ED23S 3.7 BR1K0W050 2 2 parallel 15.2 15.6 24.4 9.3
230V 15 VFD110ED23S 7.5 BR1K0W050 4 4 parallel 30.4 9.5 40.0 15.2
7.5 VFD055ED43S 3.7 BR1K0W050 2 2 in series 7.6 48.4 15.7 11.9
2 in series
15 VFD110ED43S 7.5 BR1K0W050 4 15.2 30.8 24.7 18.8
2 parallel
2 in series
20 VFD150ED43S 10.1 BR1K5W039 4 19.5 25.0 30.4 23.1
2 parallel
2 in series
25 VFD185ED43S 12.5 BR1k2W039 6 29.2 20.8 36.5 27.7
3 parallel
2 in series
460V 30 VFD220ED43S 14.9 BR1K5W039 6 29.2 19.0 40.0 30.4
3 parallel
2 in series
40 VFD300ED43S 20.3 BR1K5W039 8 39.0 14.1 54.0 41.0
4 parallel
2 in series
50 VFD370ED43S 25.0 4045 1 BR1K5W039 10 48.7 13.8 55.0 41.8
5 parallel
2 in series
60 VFD450ED43S 30.4 4030 2 BR1K5W039 12 58.5 10.3 74.0 56.2
6 parallel
2 in series
75 VFD550ED43S 37.2 4045 2 BR1k2W039 16 77.9 6.9 110.0 83.6
8 parallel
2 in series
100 VFD750ED43S 50.7 4110 1 BR1k2W039 22 107.2 6.4 118.0 89.7
11 parallel
Table 6-3
* Calculation of 125% braking torque: (kW)*125%*0.8; where 0.8 is the motor efficiency.
1
Since there is a resistor power consumption limit, the longest operation time for 30% ED is 30 seconds (ON: 30
seconds / OFF: 70 seconds).
*2 The calculation of the brake resistor is based on a four-pole motor (1800 rpm).
*3 To dissipate heat, mount a resistor of 400 W or lower to a frame to keep the surface temperature below 250°C
(482°F). Fix a resistor of 1000 W or higher to a surface to keep the surface temperature below 600°C (1112°F).
(If the resistor temperature is higher than 350°C, install extra cooling. If the resistor temperature is higher than
the temperature limit, increase the size of the resistor.)
*4
The calculation of the braking current is based on Delta’s brake resistor and default braking voltage (220VAC:
380VDC; 440VAC: 760VDC).
6-4
NOTE:
1. Select the resistance value, power and brake usage (ED %) according to Delta rules.
Definition for Brake Usage ED%
ED% = T1/T0 x 100 (%)
Explanation:
Brake usage ED (%) is the amount of time needed for
the brake unit and brake resistor to dissipate heat
generated by braking. When the brake resistor heats
up, the resistance increases with temperature, and
braking torque decreases accordingly.
Figure 6-1
For safety, install a thermal overload relay between the brake unit and the brake resistor in conjunction with the
magnetic contactor (MC) at the drive mains input for additional protection. The thermal overload relay protects
the brake resistor from overheat damage due to frequent or continuous braking. Under such circumstances,
turn off the power to prevent damage to the brake resistor and the drive. NOTE: Never use it to disconnect the
brake resistor.
Figure 6-2
2. Any damage to the drive or other equipment caused by using brake resistors and brake units that are not
provided by Delta voids the warranty.
3. Consider environmental safety factors when installing the brake resistors. If you use the minimum resistance
value, consult your local dealers for the power calculation.
4. When using more than two brake units, the equivalent resistor value of parallel brake unit cannot be less than
the value in the column “Min. Resistor Value (Ω)”. Read the wiring information in the brake unit instruction
sheet thoroughly prior to operation. Visit the following links to get the instruction sheets for the wiring in the
brake unit:
 VFDB2015 / 2022 / 4030 / 4045 / 5055 Braking Modules Instruction Sheet
http://www.deltaww.com/Products/PluginWebUserControl/downloadCenterCounter.aspx?DID=1574&DocPath=1&hl=zh-TW
 VFDB4110 / 4160 / 4185 Braking Modules Instruction Sheet

 VFDB6055 / 6110 / 6160 / 6200 Braking Modules Instruction Sheet

6-5
5. The selection tables are for normal use. If the AC motor drive requires frequent braking, increase the Watts by
two to three times.
6. Thermal Overload Relay (TOR):
Thermal overload relay selection is based on its overload capacity. A standard braking capacity of the VFD-ED
is 10%ED (Tripping time = 10s). As shown in the graph below, a 460V, 11 kw VFD-ED requires the thermal
relay to take 260% overload capacity for 10 seconds (hot starting) and the braking current is 17.7 A. In this
case, select a thermal overload relay larger than 17.7 / 2.6 = 6.8 (A). The specification of each thermal relay
may vary among different manufacturers. Carefully read the specification before using it.
Figure 6-3
6-6
6-2 Non-fuse Circuit Breaker

Comply with the UL standard: Per UL 508, paragraph 45.8.4, part a. The rated current of a breaker
shall be two to four times the maximum rated input current of the AC motor drive.
Single-phase/Three-phase Three-phase
Recommended non-fuse Recommended non-fuse
Model Model
breaker (A) breaker (A)
VFD022ED21S* 50 VFD040ED43S 30
VFD037ED21S* 75 VFD055ED43S 35
VFD040ED23S 40 VFD075ED43S 40
VFD150ED23S 125 VFD220ED43S 100
VFD185ED23S 150 VFD300ED43S 125
VFD220ED23S 175 VFD370ED43S 150
VFD300ED23S 250 VFD450ED43S 200
VFD370ED23S 300 VFD550ED43S 250
*: Single-phase models VFD750ED43S 350
Table 6-4 Table 6-5
6-3 Fuse Specification Chart

Fuse specifications lower than the table below are allowed.
Line Fuse
Model Input Current (A)
I (A) Bussmann P/N
VFD022ED21S 26 60 JJN-60
VFD037ED21S 37 90 JJN-90
VFD040ED23S 20 50 JJN-50
VFD055ED23S 23 60 JJN-60
VFD075ED23S 30 80 JJN-80
VFD110ED23S 47 125 JJN-125
VFD150ED23S 56 150 JJN-150
VFD185ED23S 73 175 JJN-175
VFD220ED23S 90 225 JJN-225
VFD300ED23S 132 300 JJN-300
VFD370ED23S 161 400 JJN-400
VFD040ED43S 11.5 35 JJS-35

VFD055ED43S 14 40 JJS-40
VFD075ED43S 17 45 JJS-45
VFD110ED43S 24 60 JJS-60
VFD150ED43S 30 80 JJS-80
VFD185ED43S 37 90 JJS-90
VFD220ED43S 47 110 JJS-110
VFD300ED43S 58 150 JJS-150
VFD370ED43S 80 200 JJS-200
VFD450ED43S 100 250 JJS-250
VFD550ED43S 128 300 JJS-300
VFD750ED43S 165 400 JJS-400
Table 6-6
6-7
6-4 AC / DC Reactor
AC Input Reactor
Installing an AC reactor on the input side of an AC motor drive can increase line impedance,
improve the power factor, reduce input current, increase system capacity, and reduce interference
generated from the motor drive. It also reduces momentary voltage surges or abnormal current spikes.
For example, when the main power capacity is higher than 500 kVA, or when using a switching capacitor
bank, momentary peak voltage and current spikes may damage the AC motor drive’s internal circuit. An
AC reactor on the input side of the AC motor drive protects it by suppressing surges.
Installation
Install an AC input reactor in series between the main power and the three input phases R S T, as shown
in the figure below:
Figure 6-4 Connecting an AC Input Reactor
DC Reactor
A DC reactor can also increase line impedance, improve the power factor, reduce input current,
increase system power, and reduce interference generated from the motor drive. A DC reactor stabilizes
the DC bus voltage. Compared with an AC input reactor, a DC reactor is in smaller size, lower price, and
lower voltage drop (lower power dissipation).
Installation
Install a DC reactor between terminals +1(DC+) and +2/B1(DC+). Remove the DC reactor jumper, as
shown in the figure below, before installing a DC reactor.
6-8
Figure 6-5 Installing a DC Reactor
THD (Total Harmonic Distortion)

The table below shows the THDi specification when using Deltas drives (three-phase power models) to
work with AC/DC reactors.
Models with Built-in DC
Motor Drive Spec. Models without Built-in DC Reactors
Models without Reactors
Reactors in AC/DC Reactors 3% Input AC 5% Input AC 4% DC 3% Input AC 5% Input AC
Series Spec. Reactor Reactor Reactor Reactor Reactor
5th 73.3% 38.5% 30.8% 25.5% 27.01% 25.5%
7th 52.74% 15.3% 9.4% 18.6% 9.54% 8.75%
11th 7.28% 7.1% 6.13% 7.14% 4.5% 4.2%
13th 0.4% 3.75% 3.15% 0.48% 0.22% 0.17%
THDi 91% 43.6% 34.33% 38.2% 30.5% 28.4%
NOTE: Table 6-7
1. THDi may vary due to different installation conditions and environment (wires, motors).
2. For three-phase power models, Delta provides 4% DC reactors and 3% AC reactors. Refer to the
following sections to select your applicable reactors.
6-9
AC Output Reactor
When using drives in long wiring output application, ground fault (GFF), over-current (OC) and
motor over-voltage (OV) often occur. GFF and OC cause errors due to the drives self -protective
mechanism; over-voltage damages motor insulation.
The excessive length of the output wires makes the grounded stray capacitance too large, increase
the three-phase output common mode current, and the reflected wave of the long wires makes the motor
dv / dt and the motor terminal voltage too high. Thus, installing a reactor on the drive’s output side can
increases the high-frequency impedance to reduce the dv / dt and terminal voltage to protect the motor.
Installation
Install an AC output reactor in series between the three output phases U V W and the motor, as shown
in the figure below:
Figure 6-6 Connecting an AC Output Reactor
Applicable Reactors
200V–230V / 50–60 Hz (Single-phase power)

Rated Saturation AC Input AC Output
AC Input Reactors AC Output Reactors
Model Current Current Reactors Reactors
(Delta Part#) (Delta Part #)
(Arms) (Arms) (mH) (mH)
VFD022ED21S 12 24 1.172 DR025D0117 2.02 DR012L0202
VFD037ED21S 17 34 0.574 DR049DP574 1.17 DR018L0117
Table 6-8
200V–230V / 50–60 Hz (Three-phase power)

Rated Saturation 3% AC Input / 3% AC Input / Output 4% DC
4% DC Reactors
Model Current Current Output Reactors Reactors Reactors
(Delta Part #)
(Arms) (Arms) (mH) (Delta Part #) (mH)
DR025AP507
VFD040ED23 20 40 0.507 NA* NA*
DR025LP507
DR025AP507
VFD055ED23 24 48 0.507 1.17 DR025D0117
DR025LP507
DR033AP320
VFD075ED23 30 60 0.32 0.851 DR033DP851
DR033LP320
DR049AP215
VFD110ED23 45 90 0.215 0.574 DR049DP574
DR049LP215
6-10

4% DC Reactors
(Delta Part #)
DR065AP162
VFD150ED23 58 116 0.162 0.432 DR065DP432
DR065LP162
DR090AP141
VFD185ED23 77 154 0.141 0.325 DR090DP325
DR090LP141
DR090AP141
VFD220ED23 87 174 0.141 0.325 DR090DP325
DR090LP141
DR146AP087
VFD300ED23 132 264 0.087 NA** NA**
DR146LP087
DR180AP070
VFD370ED23 161 322 0.07 NA** NA**
DR180LP070
NOTE: NA* stands for not being able to install this accessory; NA** stands for built-in accessory. Table 6-9
380V–460V / 50–60 Hz (Three-phase power)

4% DC Reactors
(Delta Part #)
DR010A0231
VFD040ED43S 11.5 23 2.31 NA* NA*
DR010L0231
DR012A0202
VFD055ED43S 13 26 2.02 4.67 DR012D0467
DR012L0202
DR018A0117
VFD075ED43S 17 34 1.17 3.11 DR018D0311
DR018L0117
DR024AP881
VFD110ED43S 23 46 0.881 2.33 DR024D0233
DR024LP881
DR032AP660
VFD150ED43S 30 60 0.66 1.75 DR032D0175
DR032LP660
DR038AP639
VFD185ED43S 38 76 0.639 1.47 DR038D0147
DR038LP639
DR045AP541
VFD220ED43S 45 90 0.541 1.24 DR045D0124
DR045LP541
DR060AP405
VFD300ED43S 58 116 0.405 0.935 DR060DP935
DR060LP405
DR091AP267
VFD370ED43S 80 160 0.267 NA** NA**
DR091LP267
DR110AP221
VFD450ED43S 100 200 0.221 NA** NA**
DR110LP221
DR150AP162
VFD550ED43S 128 256 0.162 NA** NA**
DR150LP162
DR180AP135
VFD750ED43S 165 330 0.135 NA** NA**
DR180LP135
NOTE: NA* stands for not being able to install this accessory; NA** stands for built-in accessory. Table 6-10
NOTE: Because Delta’s three-phase power drive models fulfill the requirement for EN12015:2014
Section 6.6.3 condition a), and in accordance with EN12015:2014 Section 6.7.2 Table 4, use THD
<48% to comply with EN12015:2014.
6-11
Reactor Dimension
AC input reactor dimension and specifications:
PE MD
Tightening torque：0.6–0.8 N Tightening torque: F Nm
m
Figure 6-7
Unit: mm
Input Reactors
A B C D1*D2 E G1 G2 PE D
Delta Part #
DR005A0254 100 115 65 6*9 45 60 40 M4
DR008A0159 100 115 65 6*9 45 60 40 M4
DR011A0115 130 135 95 6*12 60 80.5 60 M4
DR017AP746 130 135 100 6*12 65 80.5 60 M4

Table 6-11
6-12
Installing screw: M5
PE MD
Tightening torque: F Nm
Figure 6-8
Unit: mm
Input Reactors
A B C D1*D2 H G1 G2 PE D
Delta Part #
DR025AP215 130 195 100 6*12 65 80.5 60 M4
DR033AP163 130 195 100 6*12 65 80.5 60 M4
DR049AP163 160 200 125 6*12 90 107 75 M4
Table 6-12
6-13
PE M6
Tightening torque: 3±1.5 Nm
Figure 6-9
Unit: mm
Input Reactors
Delta Part #
DR065AP162 See above.
Table 6-13
6-14
Terminal gauge: 4 mm2

Tightening torque: 0.8–1.0 Nm
PE M8 x 23
Figure 6-10
Unit: mm
Input Reactors
Delta Part #
Table 6-14
6-15

PE M8 x 23
Tightening torque: 6±0.3Nm
Figure 6-11
Unit: mm
Input Reactors
Delta Part #
Table 6-15
6-16

PE M8 x 23
Figure 6-12
Unit: mm
Input Reactors
Delta Part #
Table 6-16
6-17

PE M8 x 23
Figure 6-13
Unit: mm
Input Reactors
Delta Part #
Table 6-17
6-18

PE M8 x 23
Figure 6-14
Unit: mm
Input Reactors
Delta Part #
Table 6-18
6-19
PE MD
Tightening torque: 0.6–0.8 Nm Tightening torque: F Nm
Figure 6-15
Unit: mm
Input Reactors
Delta Part #
DR003A0810 100 125 65 6*9 43 60 40 M4
DR004A0607 100 125 65 6*9 43 60 40 M4
DR006A0405 130 15 95 6*12 60 80.5 60 M4
DR009A0270 160 160 105 6*12 75 107 75 M4
DR010A0231 160 160 115 6*12 90 107 75 M4
DR012A0202 160 160 115 6*12 90 107 75 M4
DR018A0117 160 160 115 6*12 90 107 75 M4
Table 6-19
6-20
PE MD
Tightening torque: F Nm
Figure 6-16
Unit: mm
Input Reactors
Delta Part #
DR024AP881 160 175 115 6*12 90 107 75 M4
DR032AP660 195 200 145 6*12 115 122 85 M6
DR038AP639 190 200 145 6*12 115 122 85 M6
DR045AP541 190 200 145 6*12 115 122 85 M6
Table 6-20
6-21
PE M6
Figure 6-17
Unit: mm
Input Reactors
Delta Part #
Table 6-21
6-22
1:5 Terminal gauge: 4 mm2

PE M8 x 23
Figure 6-18
Unit: mm
Input Reactors
A A1 B B1 B2 C D D1*D2 E C1 G1 G2 H
Delta Part #
DR073AP334 228 240 215 40 170 133 8.5 7*13 152 75 176 200 97
DR091AP267 228 240 245 40 195 133 8.8 7*13 152 90 176 200 97
DR110AP221 228 240 245 40 195 138 8.5 7*13 152 75 176 200 102
Table 6-22
6-23
1:5 Terminal gauge: 4 mm2

PE M8 x 23
Figure 6-19
Unit: mm
Input Reactors
A A1 B B1 B2 C C1 D D1*D2 F G1 G2 H M*T
Delta Part #
DR150AP162 240 250 245 40 200 151 105 9 11*18 160 190 220 125 20*3
DR180AP135 240 250 245 40 200 151 105 9 11*18 160 190 220 125 20*3
DR220AP110 264 270 275 50 230 151 105 9 10*18 176 200 230 106 30*3
DR260AP098 264 270 285 50 240 151 105 9 10*18 176 200 230 106 30*3
DR310AP078 300 300 345 55 295 153 105 9 10*18 200 224 260 113 30*3
DR370AP066 300 300 345 55 295 158 120 9 10*18 200 224 260 118 50*4
Table 6-23
6-24
DC reactor dimension and specifications:
R
D
Figure 6-20
Unit: mm
DC Reactors
A B C D E R
Delta Part #
DR005D0585 79 78 112 64±2 56±2 9.5*5.5
DR008D0366 79 78 112 64±2 56±2 9.5*5.5
DR011D0266 79 92 112 64±2 69.5±2 9.5*5.5
DR017D0172 79 112 112 64±2 89.5±2 9.5*5.5
DR025D0117 99 105 128 79±2 82.5±2 9.5*5.5
DR033DP851 117 110 156 95±2 87±2 10*6.5
DR049DP574 117 120 157 95±2 97±2 10*6.5
DR065DP432 117 140 157 95±2 116.5±2 10*6.5
DR075DP391 136 135 178 111±2 112±2 10*6.5
DR090DP325 136 135 179 111±2 112±2 10*6.5
DR003D1870 79 78 112 64±2 56±2 9.5*5.5
DR004D1403 79 92 112 64±2 69.5±2 9.5*5.5
DR006D0935 79 92 112 64±2 69.5±2 9.5*5.5
DR009D0623 79 112 112 64±2 89.5±2 9.5*5.5
DR010D0534 99 93 128 79±2 70±2 9.5*5.5
DR012D0467 99 105 128 79±2 82.5±2 9.5*5.5
DR018D0311 117 110 144 95±2 87±2 10*6.5
DR024D0233 117 120 144 95±2 97±2 10*6.5
DR032D0175 117 140 157 95±2 116.5±2 10*6.5
DR038D0147 136 135 172 111±2 112±2 10*6.5
DR045D0124 136 135 173 111±2 112±2 10*6.5
DR060DP935 136 150 173 111±2 127±2 10*6.5
Table 6-24
6-25
AC output reactor dimension and specifications:

Screw length must
not interfere with the
mounting holes.
Figure 6-21
Unit: mm
Output Reactors
A B C D1*D2 E G1 G2 PE D
Delta Part #
DR005L0254 96 110 70 6*9 42 60 40 M4
DR008L0159 120 135 96 6*12 60 80.5 60 M4
DR011L0115 120 135 96 6*12 60 80.5 60 M4
DR017LP746 120 135 105 6*12 65 80.5 60 M4
DR025LP507 150 160 120 6*12 88 107 75 M4
DR033LP320 150 160 120 6*12 88 107 75 M4
Table 6-25
6-26

Screw length must
mounting holes.
Figure 6-22
Unit: mm
Output Reactors
A B C D1*D2 H G G1 Q M PE D
Delta Part #
DR049LP215 180 205 175 6*12 115 85 122 16 1.2-1.4 M4
DR065LP162 180 215 185 6*12 115 85 122 35 2.5-3.0 M4
Table 6-26
6-27
Figure 6-23
Unit: mm
Output Reactors
A A1 B B1 B2 C C1 D1*D2 E G1 H M*T
Delta Part #
DR075LP170 240 228 215 44 170 151 100 7*13 152 176 85 20*3
DR090LP141 240 228 215 44 170 151 100 7*13 152 176 85 20*3
DR105LP106 240 228 215 44 170 165 110 7*13 152 176 97 20*3
DR146LP087 240 228 240 45 202 165 110 7*13 152 176 97 30*3
DR180LP070 250 240 250 46 205 175 110 11*18 160 190 124 30*5
Table 6-27
6-28

Screw length must
not interfere with
the mounting holes.
Figure 6-24
Unit: mm
Output Reactors
Delta Part #
DR003L0810 96 115 65 6*9 42 60 40 M4

DR004L0607 120 135 95 6*12 60 80.5 60 M4
DR006L0405 120 135 95 6*12 60 80.5 60 M4
DR009L0270 150 160 100 6*12 74 107 75 M4
DR010L0231 150 160 115 6*12 88 107 75 M4
DR012L0202 150 160 115 6*12 88 107 75 M4
DR018L0117 150 160 115 6*12 88 107 75 M4
DR024LP881 150 160 115 6*12 88 107 75 M4
DR032LP660 180 190 145 6*12 114 122 85 M6
Table 6-28
6-29

Screw length must
mounting holes.
Figure 6-25
Unit: mm
Output Reactors
Delta Part #
DR038LP639 180 205 170 6*12 115 85 122 M4
DR045LP541 235 245 155 7*13 85 / 176 M6
Table 6-29
6-30
Figure 6-26
Unit: mm
Output Reactors
A A1 B B1 B2 C C1 D1*D2 E G1 H M*T
Delta Part #
DR060LP405 240 228 215 44 170 163 110 7*13 152 176 97 20*3
DR073LP334 250 235 235 44 186 174 115 11*18 160 190 124 20*3
DR091LP267 250 240 235 44 186 174 115 11*18 160 190 124 20*3
DR110LP221 270 260 245 50 192 175 115 10*18 176 200 106 20*3
Table 6-30
6-31
Figure 6-27
Unit: mm
Output
Reactors A A1 B B1 B2 C C1 D1*D2 E G1 G2 H M*T
Delta Part #
DR150LP162 270 264 265 51 208 192 125 10*18 176 200 / 118 30*3
DR180LP135 300 295 310 55 246 195 125 11*22 200 230 190 142 30*3
Table 6-31
6-32
6-5 Zero Phase Reactor

You can also suppress interference by installing a zero phase reactor at the main input or the motor
output of the drive, depending on the location of the interference. Due to the large current passed
through the main input/motor output side, pay attention to core saturation issue. Delta provides two types
of zero phase reactors to solve interference problems.
A. Casing with mechanical fixed part

The ideal material for withstanding large current loaded for the zero phase reactor at the main
input/motor output is composite core. Core has strong saturation, and its strong resistance are many
times of simple metal magnetic materials. Thus, it can be used for high frequencies and you can get
higher impedance by increasing the number of turns.
G
B
C
D F
A E
Figure 6-28
Unit: mm (inch)
Model A B C D E F G(Ø) Torque
98 73 36.5 29 56.5 86 5.5
RF008X00A 8–10 kgf/cm
[3.858) (2.874) (1.437) (1.142) (2.224) (3.386) (0.217)
110 87.5 43.5 36 53 96 5.5
(4.331) (3.445) (1.713) (1.417) (2.087) (3.780) (0.217)
Table 6-32
G
B
H
C
D E
Figure 6-29
Unit: mm (inch)
Model A B C D E F G(Ø) H Torque
200 172.5 90 78 55.5 184 5.5 22
(7.874) (6.791) (3.543) (3.071) (2.185) (7.244) (0.217) (0.866)
Table 6-33
6-33
Figure 6-30
Unit: mm (inch)
Model A B C D E F G(Ø) H I
241 217 114 155 42 220 6.5 7.0 20
RF300X00A
(9.488) (8.543) (4.488) (6.102) (1.654) (8.661) (0.256) (0.276) (0.787)
Torque:40–45 kgf/cm
Table 6-34
B. Casing without mechanical fixed part

Adopts nanocrystalline core developed by VAC○, and has high initial magnetic permeability, high
R
saturation induction density, low iron loss and perfect temperature characteristic. If the zero phase
reactor does not need to be fixed mechanically, use this solution.
Figure 6-31
Unit: mm
Model A B C Function
T60006L2040W453 22.5 43.1 18.5 Motor wire
T60006L2050W565 36.3 53.5 23.4 Motor wire
T60006L2160V066 123.9 166.9 30.5 Motor wire
T60004L2016W620 10.7 17.8 8.0 Signal line
T60004L2025W622 17.5 27.3 12.3 Signal line
Table 6-35
6-34
Wiring
Reactor Model *1 Recommended Wire Size Qty Applicable Motor Drives
Method
RF008X00A Fig. 6-32 VFD022ED21S VFD037ED21S

≤ 8 AWG ≤ 8.37 mm2 1
T60006L2040W453 Fig. 6-33 VFD040ED23S VFD040ED43S
VFD055ED23S VFD075ED23S
RF004X00A Fig. 6-32 VFD110ED23S VFD055ED43S
≤ 4 AWG ≤ 21.15 mm2 1
T60006L2050W565 Fig. 6-33 VFD075ED43S VFD110ED43S
RF002X00A Fig. 6-32
≤ 2 AWG ≤ 33.62 mm 2
1 VFD220ED23S VFD220ED43S
T60006L2160V066 Fig. 6-33
VFD300ED43S
RF300X00A Fig. 6-32
≤ 300 MCM ≤ 152 mm 2
1 VFD370ED43S VFD450ED43S
T60006L2160V066 Fig. 6-33
*1: 600V insulated cable wire Table 6-36
Installation
During installation, pass the cable through at least one zero phase reactor. Use a suitable cable type
(insulation class and wire section) so that the cable passes easily through the zero phase reactor. Do not
pass the grounding cable through the zero phase reactor; only pass the motor wire through the zero
phase reactor. With longer motor cables the zero-phase reactor can effectively reduce interference at the
motor output. Install the zero-phase reactor as close to the output of the drive as possible. Diagram A
shows the installation diagram for a single turn zero phase reactor. If the wire diameter allows several
turns, Diagram B shows the installation of a multi-turn zero phase reactor. The more turns, the better the
noise suppression effect.
Figure 6-32 Single turn wiring diagram for shielding wire with a zero phase reactor
Figure 6-33 Multi-turn zero phase reactor
6-35
Installation Precaution
Install the zero phase reactor at the drive’s output terminal (U/T1, V/T2, W/T3). After the zero phase
reactor is installed, it reduces the electromagnetic radiation and load stress emitted by the wiring of the
frequency converter. The number of zero phase reactors required for the drive depends on the wiring
length and the drive voltage.
The normal operating temperature of the zero phase reactor should be lower than 85°C (176°F).
However, when the zero phase reactor is saturated, its temperature may exceed 85°C (176°F). In this
case, increase the number of zero phase reactors to avoid saturation. The following are reasons that
might cause saturation of the zero phase reactors: the drive wiring is too long; the drive has several sets
of loads; the wiring is in parallel; or the drive uses high capacitance wiring. If the temperature of the zero
phase reactor exceeds 85°C (176°F) during the operation of the drive, increase the number of zero
phase reactors.
Recommended maximum wiring gauge when installing zero phase reactor:

Zero Phase Reactor Max. Wire Gauge or Max. Wire Gauge AWG (1 C*3) Max. Wire Gauge AWG (4 C*1)
Model No. LUG width 75°C 90°C 75°C 90°C
RF008X00A 13 MM 3 AWG 1 AWG 3 AWG 1 AWG
RF004X00A 16 MM 1 AWG 2/0 AWG 1 AWG 1/0 AWG
RF002X00A 36 MM 600 MCM 600 MCM 1 AWG 1/0 AWG
RF300X00A 73 MM 650 MCM 650 MCM 300 MCM 300 MCM
T60006L2040W453 11 MM 9 AWG 4 AWG 6 AWG 6 AWG
T60006L2050W565 16 MM 1 AWG 2/0 AWG 1 AWG 1/0 AWG
T60006L2160V066 57 MM 600 MCM 600 MCM 300 MCM 300 MCM
Table 6-37
6-36
6-6 EMC Filter

The table below shows external EMC filter models for each ED-S series motor drive. Choose
corresponding zero phase reactors and applicable shielding cables according to the required noise
emission and electromagnetic interference rating for the best configuration and anti-interference
performance. If radiation emission (RE) is not a concern on site and you only need conducted emission
(CE) to reach EN55011 Class A, you do not need to install a zero phase reactor on the input side to
reach the EMC standard.
220V Models
VFD-ED Zero Phase Reactor EN12015
EMC Filter Carrier Conducted Emission
Frame
Motor Drive Rated Input Model # Frequency Radiation

Input Side (R/S/T) Length of Output
Model # Current (A) Emission
Shielded Cable 50 m
B84142A0042R122 RF008X00A or
VFD022ED21S 24 CLASS A CLASS A
T60006L2040W453
B84142A0042R122 RF008X00A or
B VFD037ED21S 34 CLASSA CLASSA
T60006L2040W453
RF008X00A or
VFD040ED23S 20 EMF035A23A CLASS A CLASS A
T60006L2040W453
RF004X00A or
T60006L2050W565
RF004X00A or
C VFD075ED23S 30 EMF056A23A CLASS A CLASS A
T60006L2050W565
Carrier
RF004X00A or
VFD110ED23S 47 EMF056A23A frequency by CLASS A CLASS A
T60006L2050W565
default
RF002X00A or
VFD150ED23S 56 B84143D0150R127 CLASS A CLASS A
T60006L2160V066
RF002X00A or
D VFD185ED23S 73 B84143D0150R127 CLASS A CLASS A
T60006L2160V066
RF002X00A or
T60006L2160V066
RF002X00A or
T60006L2160V066
E
RF300X00A or
T60006L2160V066
Table 6-38
460V Models
VFD-ED Zero Phase Reactor EN12015
EMC Filter Carrier Conducted Emission
Frame
Motor Drive Rated Input Model # Frequency Radiation

Input Side (R/S/T) Length of Output
Model # Current (A) Emission
Shielded Cable 50 m
RF008X00A or
B VFD040ED43S 11.5 EMF018A43A CLASS A CLASS A
T60006L2040W453
RF004X00A or
VFD055ED43S 14 EMF018A43A CLASSA CLASS A
T60006L2050W565
RF004X00A or
T60006L2050W565
RF004X00A or
C VFD110ED43S 24 EMF033A43A CLASS A CLASS A
T60006L2050W565
RF004X00A or
T60006L2050W565
RF004X00A or
VFD185ED43S 37 B84143D0075R127 Carrier CLASS A CLASS A
T60006L2050W565
frequency by
RF002X00A or
VFD220ED43S 47 B84143D0090R127 default CLASS A CLASS A
T60006L2160V066
D
RF002X00A or
T60006L2160V066
RF300X00A or
T60006L2160V066
RF300X00A or
T60006L2160V066
E
RF300X00A or
T60006L2160V066
RF300X00A or
T60006L2160V066
Table 6-39
6-37
EMC Filter Dimension
EMC Filter Model #: EMF018A43A Unit: mm [inch]
109.0 [4.29]
70.0 [2.76]
37.0 [1.46] 76.0 [2.99]
5.5 [0.22] 5.5 [0.22]
275.0 [10.83]
263.0 [10.35]
263.0 [10.35]
5.5 [0.22] 5.5 [0.22]

25.0 [0.98] 28.0 [1.10] 76.0 [2.99]
Figure 6-34
6-38
EMC Filter Model #: EMF035A23A, EMF033A43A Unit: mm [inch]
80.0 [3.15] 130.0 [5.12]

33.0 [1.30] 28.0 [1.10] 90.0 [3.54]
5.5 [0.22] 5.5 [0.22]
310.0 [12.20]
298.0 [11.73]
298.0 [11.73]
5.5 [0.22] 5.5 [0.22]

33.0 [1.30] 28.0 [1.10] 90.0 [3.54]
Figure 6-35
6-39
EMC Filter Model #: EMF056A23A Unit: mm [inch]
80.0 [3.15] 155.0 [6.10]

33.0 [1.30] 28.0 [1.10] 110.0 [4.33]
5.5 [0.22] 5.5 [0.22]
390.0 [15.35]
375.0 [14.76]
375.0 [14.76]
5.5 [0.22] 5.5 [0.22]

33.0 [1.30] 28.0 [1.10] 110.0 [4.33]
Figure 6-36
6-40
EMC Filter Model #: B84143D0075R127, B84143D0090R127 Unit: mm [inch]
Figure 6-37
6-41
EMC Filter Model #: B84143D0150R127 Unit: mm [inch]
Figure 6-38
6-42
EMC Filter Model #: B84143D0200R127 Unit: mm [inch]
Figure 6-39
6-43
EMC Filter Model #: B84142A0042R122 Unit: mm [inch]
Figure 6-40
6-44
EMC Filter Installation
All electrical equipment in operation, including AC motor drives, generates high-frequency and low-
frequency noise that interfere with peripheral equipment by radiation or conduction. By correctly installing
an EMC filter, you can eliminate much of the interference. Use DELTA EMC filters for the best
interference elimination.
The following standards are met when the AC motor drive and EMC filter are installed and wired
according to the user manual:
 EN61000-6-4
 EN61800-3: 1996
 EN55011: (1991) Class A Group 1 (1st Environment, restricted distribution)
 European Standards: EN12015 & EN12016
6-45
General precaution
To ensure the best anti-interference performance for EMC filter, observe the following precautions in
addition to the installation and wiring in the user manual:
 Install the EMC filter and AC motor drive on the same metal plate. Install the AC motor drive on the
EMC filter footprint or install the EMC filter as close as possible to the AC motor drive.
 Use the shortest wire possible. Ground the metal plate. Fix the EMC filter cover and AC motor drive
or grounding to the metal plate and make the contact area as large as possible.
Choose suitable motor cable and precautions

Improper installation and choice of motor cable affect the performance of EMC filters. Be sure to observe
the following precautions when selecting motor cable.
 Use shielded cable (double shielding is best). Ground the shielding on both ends of the motor cable
with the minimum length and maximum contact area.
 Remove any paint on the metal saddle for good ground contact with the plate and shielding (see
Figure 6-41).
 The connections between the motor’s shielded cable and metal plate must be correct. Use a U-shape
metal saddle to fix both ends of the motor cable. See Figure 6-42 for correct connections.
Remove any paint on metal saddle for good ground contact with
the plate and shielding.
saddle the plate with grounding
Figure 6-41
Figure 6-42
6-46
The motor cable length
 Required cable length when the motor drive is at full load.

1. Non-shielded cable: For 5.5 kW (7.5 HP) and below models, the maximum cable length is 100 m
(328 ft). For 7.5 kW (10 HP) and above models, the maximum cable length is 200 m (656 ft)
2. Shielded cable: For 5.5 kW (7.5 HP) and below models, the maximum cable length is 50 m (165
ft). For 7.5 kW (10 HP) models, the maximum cable length is 100 m (328 ft).
3. To be compatible with the European Standards EN12015 & EN12016, follow one of the following
in addition to the precautions on page 6-45:
(1) Use shielded cables
(2) The motor cable must be shorter than 2 m (6 ft).
If the cable length is longer than the recommended lengths above, install an output reactor.
NOTE:
1. If the cable length is too long, the stray capacitance between cables increases and may cause
leakage current. In this case, It activates the over-current protection, increases leakage current,
or may affect the current display. The worst case is that it may damage the AC motor drive.
2. If more than one motor is connected to the AC motor drive, the total wiring length is the sum of
the wiring length from AC motor drive to each motor.
3. For the 460V series AC motor drive, when you install an overload thermal relay between the drive
and the motor to protect the motor from overheating, the connecting cable must be shorter than
50 m; however, an overload thermal relay malfunction may still occur. To prevent the malfunction,
install an output reactor (optional) to the drive or lower the carrier frequency setting (Pr.00-12).
 Consequence of the surge voltages on the motor

When a motor is driven by a PWM-type AC motor drive, the motor terminals experience surge
voltages due to component conversion of AC motor drive and cable capacitance. When the motor
cable is very long (especially for the 460V series), surge voltages may damage the insulation. To
prevent this, follow these rules:
1. Use a motor with enhanced insulation (refer to the tables below).

2. Reduce the cable length between the AC motor drive and motor to suggested values.
3. Connect an output reactor (optional) to the output terminals of the AC motor drive.
For 7.5 kW (10 HP) and higher models:

Insulation level of motor 1000V 1300V 1600V
460 VAC input voltage 20 m (66 ft) 100 m (328 ft) 400 m (1312 ft)
Table 6-40
For 5.5 kW (7.5 HP) and lower models:
Insulation level of motor 1000V 1300V 1600V
Table 6-41
6-47
6-7 Digital Keypad

KPC-CC01
Communication Interface
RJ45 (socket), RS-485 interface
Communication protocol:
RTU19200, 8, N, 2
Installation Method
1. Embedded type and can be put flat on the surface of the
control box. The front cover is water proof.
2. Buy a MKC-KPPK model to do wall mounting or embedded
mounting. Its protection level is IP66.
3. The maximum RJ45 extension lead is 5 m (16ft)
4. This keypad can only be used on Delta’s motor drive C2000,
CH2000, CP2000, and ED series.
Descriptions of Keypad Functions

Key Descriptions
Start Operation Key
1. Only valid when the source of operation command is the keypad.
2. Operates the AC motor drive by the function setting. The RUN LED will be ON.
3. Can be pressed repeatedly at the stop process.
Stop Command Key.
1. This key has the highest priority when the command is from the keypad.
2. When it receives the STOP command, regardless of whether the AC motor
drive is in operation or stop status, the AC motor drive needs to execute the
“STOP” command.
3. Use the RESET key to reset the drive after a fault occurs.
4. If you cannot reset after the fault:
(1) The condition which triggers the fault is not cleared. After you clear the
condition, you can then reset the fault.
(2) The drive is in the fault status when powered on. After you clear the
condition, restart and then you can reset the fault.
Operation Direction Key

1. Only controls the operation direction, NOT the drive activation. FWD: forward,
REV: reverse.
2. Refer to the Descriptions of LED Functions on p.9-6 for more details.
ENTER Key
Goes to the next menu level. If at the last level, press ENTER to execute the
command.
ESC Key
Leaves the current menu and returns to the previous menu; also functions as a
return key or cancel key in a sub-menu.
6-48
Key Descriptions
MENU key. Returns to the main menu. Menu items:

1. Parameter Setup 8. Time Setup 14. Main Page
5. Copy Parameter 9. Keypad Locked 15. PC Link
6. Fault Record 12. Display Setup
7. Language Setup 13. Start-up
NOTE: Menu items that are not listed above are not supported in VFD-ED.
Direction: Left / Right / Up / Down

1. In the numeric value setting mode, moves the cursor and changes the numeric
value.
2. In the menu / text selection mode, selects an item.
Function Key
The functions keys have defaults and can also be user-defined. The defaults for F1
and F4 work with the function list below. For example, F1 is the JOG function, and
F4 is a quick setting key for adding / deleting user-defined parameters.
Descriptions of LED Functions

LED Descriptions
Steady ON: STOP indicator for the AC motor drive.
Blinking: the drive is in standby.
Steady OFF: the drive does not execute the “STOP” command.
Operation Direction LED

1. Green light: the drive is running forward.
2. Red light: the drive is running backward.
3. Flashing light: the drive is changing direction.
RUN LED:
LED
Condition / State
status
CANopen at initial
OFF No LED
CANopen at pre-operation
Blinking
CANopen–
“RUN”
CANopen at stop
Single
flash
CANopen at operation status

ON
6-49
LED Descriptions
ERR LED:
LED
Condition / State
status
OFF No Error
One message fail
Single
flash
Node guarding failure or heartbeat message failure
CANopen– Double
flash
“ERR”
Synchronization failure
Triple
flash
Bus off
ON
6-50
Dimension Unit: mm [inch]
Figure 6-43
RJ45 Extension Cables for the Digital Keypad

Part # Description
CBC-K3FT 3 feet RJ45 extension lead (approximately 0.9 m)
CBC-K10FT 10 feet RJ45 extension lead (approximately 3 m)
NOTE: If communication cables are required, buy non-shielded, 24 AWG, four-wire Table 6-42
twisted pair, 100 ohms communication cables.
6-51
6-8 USB/RS-485 Communication Interface IFD6530

Warning
 Thoroughly read this instruction sheet before installation and putting it into use.
 The content of this instruction sheet and the driver file may be revised without prior notice. Consult our
distributors or download the most updated instruction/driver version.
Introduction
IFD6530 is a convenient RS-485-to-USB converter that does not require an external power supply and a
complex setting process. It supports baud rates from 75 to 115.2 kbps and auto-switching of the data
transmission direction. In addition, it adopts the RJ45 in RS-485 connector for convenient wiring. Its
small size, use of plug-and-play and hot-swappable provide more conveniences for connecting all DELTA
IABG products to your PC.
Applicable Models: All DELTA IABG products.
 Application & Dimension:
Figure 6-44
Figure 6-45
Specifications
Power supply No external power is required.
Power consumption 1.5 W
Isolated voltage 2,500 VDC
Baud rate 75, 150, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200 bps
RS-485 connector RJ45
USB connector A type (plug)
Compatibility Full compliance with USB V2.0 specification
Maximum cable length RS-485 communication port: 100 m
Supports RS-485 half-duplex transmission
Table 6-43
6-52
RJ45
PIN Description PIN Description
1 Reserved 5 SG+
2 Reserved 6 GND
3 GND 7 Reserved
4 SG- 8 +9V
⇒
Preparation before Installing Driver

Extract the driver file (IFD6530_Drivers.exe) by following steps. Download the driver file
(IFD6530_Drivers.exe) at Delta’s website.
NOTE: DO NOT connect the IFD6530 to PC before extracting the driver file.
STEP 1 STEP 2
STEP 3 STEP 4
STEP 5
At the end of this process, you should have a folder named SiLabs under drive c:\ SiLabs.
6-53
Installing the Driver
After connecting the IFD6530 to your PC, install the driver using the following steps.
6-54
LED Display
1. Steady green LED ON: power is ON.
2. Blinking orange LED: data is transmitting.
6-55
6-56
Chapter 7 Option Cards | VFD-ED
Chapter 7 Option Cards
7-1 Option Card Installation

7-2 EMED-PGABD-2
7-3 EMED-PGHSD-3
7-4 EMED-PGHSD-4
7-1
 Select the applicable option cards for your drive or contact your local distributor for suggestions.
 To prevent damage to the motor drive during installation, remove the digital keypad and the cover
before wiring. Refer to the following instructions.
 Note that the option cards do not support hot swapping. Turn off the drive power before installing or
removing the option cards.
7-1 Option Card Installation

7-1-1 Detach and Attach the Top Cover
Frame B, C and D
Step 1: Loosen the four screws
Figure 7-1
Figure 7-2
tighten the four screws using
Figure 7-3
7-2
Frame E
Step 1: Loosen the two screws in the
direction as the arrow shows
Figure 7-4
Figure 7-5
tighten the two screws using
Figure 7- 6
7-3
7-1-2 Vertical View of the Motor Drive & Screw Specifications
7-4
7-2 EMED-PGABD-2
7-2-1 Product Profile
Dimension unit: mm [inch]

Diagram 53.0 [2.09]
47.0 [1.85]<2X>
15.5 [0.61]<2X>
Ø4
.0 [Ø0
. 16
105.0 [4.13]<2X>
] <3
109.0 [4.29]
X>
Ø3
19.0 [0.75]
.5
[Ø
0 .14
]
30.0 [1.18]
21.9 [0.86]
NOTE:
1. Applicable encoder: A/B/Z and U/V/W Absolute Encoders
2. Screw specification
Wire
0.2–1.5 mm2 (30–16 AWG)
Gauge
Torque 1.6 kg-cm (1.4 Ib-in.)
7-5
7-2-2 Terminal Function

Voltage input, to adjust the amplitude of output voltage at terminal A/O and
Vin terminal B/O. It also provides a 5 V voltage to support line driver’s signal.
Vin voltage range: 8–24 V, Max: 24 V.
Output signal for the push-pull voltage frequency division.
Default: Output amplitude is about +24 V. Use SW3 to disable the internal
default power. Required input power through Vin-GND port (i.e. output
voltage’s amplitude)
A/O, B/O
TB2 Vin voltage range: 8–24 V, Max: 24 V.
Push-Pull Voltage Output
Max. output frequency: 100 kHz
Supports frequency division output, the frequency division range: 1–31.
GND Common ground terminal connecting to the host controller and the motor drive.
Output signal for the line driver frequency division.
AO, AO , Line Driver RS422
BO, BO Max. output frequency: 150 kHz
Supports frequency division output, the frequency division range: 1–31.
Power output for encoder
NOTE: Use SW1 to set output voltage amplitude
VP
Voltage: +5 ± 0.5 V or +12 ± 1 V
Current: 200 mA max.
0V Common power terminal for encoder
Incremental-type encoder signal input terminal
A, A , Types of input signal: line driver, voltage, push-pull, open collector
TB1 B, B , NOTE: Different input signals need different wiring methods. See the user
Z, Z manual for wiring diagrams.
Max. input frequency: 150 kHz
Absolute-type encoder signal input terminal
U, U , Types of input signal: line driver, voltage, push-pull, open collector
V, V , NOTE: Different input signals need different wiring methods. See the user
W, W manual for wiring diagrams.
Ground Terminal
JP1
Connect the motor drive power supply to ground. Supports PG shielding.
SW1 Switch between power for the encoder (5V / 12V).
Offline Detection Switch. Switch to the Line-D side to enable offline detection
SW2 for the Line-D input signal. Switch to OPEN-C side to disable offline detection
function for the OPEN-C input signal.
Power supply switch for frequency division. Switch to INP side to provide 24 V
SW3 power for internal use. Switch to EXP side to provide 24 V power for external
use (client).
7-6
7-2-3 Applicable encoders:
1. Open collector output encoder application: Use one pull-up resistor for each set of input current
5–15 mA. If open collector input voltage uses 5V or 12V external power, connect the encoder
power externally. See the PG wiring Figure 7-8 below.
5V Suggested pull-up resistor: above 150–520ohm, 1/2 W

12V Suggested pull-up resistor: above 600–2Kohm, 1/2 W
EMED-PGABD-x Open Collector Encoder
VP VCC
0V External pull-high
resistor
ABZ/UVW ABZ/UVW
4.7kohm
ABZ/UVW GND
Figure 7-7
VP VCC
External pull-high
0V resistor
External
ABZ/UVW ABZ/UVW power
(5V or 12V)
4.7kohm
ABZ/UVW GND
Figure 7-8
VP VCC
ABZ/UVW
4.7kohm ABZ/UVW
ABZ/UVW
0V GND
Figure 7-9
7-7
2. Voltage output encoder application: Each set of input current is 5–15 mA. If input voltage uses
5V or 12V external power, connect the encoder power externally. See the PG wiring Figure 7-11
below.
EMED-PGABD-x Voltage Output Encoder
VP VCC
0V Internal
pull-high
resistor
ABZ/UVW ABZ/UVW
4.7kohm
ABZ/UVW GND
Figure 7-10
VP VCC
0V Internal External
pull-high power
resistor
ABZ/UVW ABZ/UVW (5V or 12V )
4.7kohm
ABZ/UVW GND
Figure 7-11
VP VCC
ABZ/UVW
Internal
pull-high
4.7kohm ABZ/UVW
resistor
ABZ/UVW
0V GND
Figure 7-12
7-8
3. Push-pull output encoder application: Each set of input current is 5–15 mA. If input If input
voltage uses 5V or 12V external power, connect the encoder power externally. See the PG
wiring Figure 7-14 below.
EMED-PGABD-x Push-pull Encoder
VP VCC
0V
ABZ/UVW ABZ/UVW
4.7kohm
ABZ/UVW GND
Figure 7-13
VP VCC
0V
External
ABZ/UVW ABZ/UVW power
(5V or 12V)
4.7kohm
ABZ/UVW GND
Figure 7-14
VP VCC
ABZ/UVW
4.7kohm ABZ/UVW
ABZ/UVW
0V GND
Figure 7-15
7-9
4. Line driver output encoder application: Each set of input current is 5–15 mA. If input voltage
uses 5V or 12V external power, connect the encoder power externally. See the PG wiring
Figure 7-17 below.
EMED-PGABD-x Line Driver Encoder
VP VCC
ABZ/UVW ABZ/UVW
4.7kohm
ABZ/UVW ABZ/UVW
0V GND
Figure 7-16
EMED-PGABD-x Line Driver Encoder
VP VCC
ABZ/UVW ABZ/UVW
External
4.7kohm power
(5V or 12V)
ABZ/UVW ABZ/UVW
0V GND
Figure 7-17
NOTE:
 Verify that the SW1 is set to the correct output voltage before powering ON.
 Keep the motor drive wiring away from any high voltage lines to avoid interference.
 When using push-pull output and voltage output, short-circuit A , B , Z to 0V.
 When using open collector output, short-circuit A, B, Z to VP.
7-10
Figure 7-18
7-11
7-2-5 Frequency Division Signal Setting

1. After the encoder inputs a PULSE signal, there is an output signal by the division factor “n” Set
the value in Pr.10-29 (PG card’s frequency division output).
2. Set Pr.10-29 (PG card’s frequency division output): The decimal frequency division output
setting; range of the division factor “n”: 1–31.
3. Pr.10-30 (PG card’s frequency division output mode)
Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0
X X OUT/M IN/M
OUT/M: Pulse output mode for frequency division;

IN/M: Pulse input mode for frequency division;
“X” is for backup while “0” is a value to write.
The following table lists the Input Mode (IN/M) & Output Mode (OUT/M) setting and description:
Division Factor
OUT/M IN/M
A is ahead of B B is ahead of A
A-/A A-/A
B-/B B-/B
0 0
AO-AO
A/O-/A/O A/O-/A/O
AO-AO
BO-BO
B/O-/B/O BO-BO
B/O-/B/O
A-/A A-/A
B-/B B-/B
1 0
A/O-/A/O A/O-/A/O
AO-AO
A O -A O
B/O-/B/O
B O -B O B/O-/B/O
BO-BO
A-/A
A-/A
B-/B
X 1 B-/B
A/O-/A/O
AO-AO AO-AO
A/O-/A/O
B/O-/B/O
BO-BO BO-BO
B/O-/B/O
Table 7-1
NOTE:
 In the waveform, A-/A, B-/B are the PG card input signals; AO- AO , BO- BO are the differential
output frequency division signals. Use a differential probe to measure.
 Division factor “n”: Set 15 to divide the input signal by 15.
7-12
 When OUT/M, IN/M set to 0 and 0, the PG card input signal A-/A, B-/B are square waves
while AO- AO , BO- BO are frequency division output.
 When OUT/M, IN/M are set to 1 and 0, the PG card input signal A-/A, B-/B are square waves
while the BO- BO is the A and B phase indicator (for example, when BO- BO is LOW, it means
A is ahead of B: when BO- BO is HIGH, it means B is ahead of A). AO- AO is frequency
division output.
 When OUT/M, IN/M are set to X and 1, B-/B phase has to be the direction indication input
signal (for example, when B-/B is LOW, it means A is ahead of B; when B-/B is HIGH, it
means B is ahead of A). A-/A is a square wave input, BO- BO and B-/B phase are input into
synchronous action; AO- AO is frequency division output.
 Take Pr.10-29 and Pr.10-30 as examples: When the frequency division value is 15, OUT/M =1,
IN/M = 0. Set Pr.10-29 = 15 and Pr.10-30 = 0002h.
Set Pr.10-29 =15
Set Pr.10-30 =0002h
Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0
X X 1 0
7-13
7-2-6 Wiring of Frequency Division Output
Push-pull Frequency Division (internal power supply)
Figure 7-19
Push-pull Frequency Division (external power supply)
Figure 7-20
7-14
Line Driver Frequency Division (internal power supply)
Figure 7-21
Line Driver Frequency Division (external power supply)
Figure 7-22
7-15
7-3 EMED-PGHSD-3
50.0 [1.97]
46.0 [1.81]<2X>
14.5 [0.57]<2X>
105.0 [4.13]<2X>
109.0 [4.29]
19.0 [0.75]
30.0 [1.18]
NOTE:
1. Applicable encoder:
SIN/COS; Heidenhain ERN1387
EnDat2.1/01: Heidenhain ECN413、ECN1313
SICK HIPERFACE: SRS50/60
2. Screw specification:
Wire
0.2–1.5 mm2 (30–16 AWG)
Gauge
3. Supports Heidenhain ERN1387, EnDat2.1, HIPERFACE
7-16

Voltage input: (to adjust the output voltage amplitude of the push-
pull pulse)
Vin
Max. input voltage: 24 VDC
Max. input current: 30 mA
Push-pull pulse output signal
TB1 A/O, B/O
Max. output frequency: 50 kHz
GND Common power input/signal output terminal
AO, /AO, BO, /BO Line driver RS422
J3 (D-SUB female connector) Encoder signal input terminal
Frequency division output power terminal selection
SW1 INP: Power supplied by PG card
EXP: Power from an external source
Encoder’s voltage output terminal (Up)
NOTE: Modify the terminal output voltage by switching the
SW2 direction of the SW2 DIP switch on the PG card.
5V: 5 VDC
8V: 8 VDC
EMED-PGHSD-3 (Terminal J3) pin definitions depend on the encoder type

Terminal Applicable Encoder
Heidenhain Heidenhain
J3 No. HIPERFACE○R
ERN1387 ECN1313
○1 B- B- REFSIN
○2 - - -
○3 R+ DATA DATA+
○4 R- /DATA DATA-
○5 A+ A+ +COS
○6 A- A- REFCOS
5 4 3 2 1 ○7 0V 0V GND
10 9 8 7 6 ○8 B+ B+ +SIN
15 14 13 12 11
○9 Up Up Up
○
10 C- - -
○
11 C+ - -
○
12 D+ - -
○
13 D- - -
○
14 - /CLOCK -
○
15 - CLOCK -
7-17
Terminal Function
Terminals Descriptions Specifications
The output voltage for
the encoder. Use the
Voltage: +5.1 VDC ± 0.3 V; +8.4 VDC ± 1.5 V
Up (VP) SW2 DIP switch to
change the output
voltage to +5 V or +8 V.
Encoder common
0V power Reference level for the encoder’s power.
terminal
Input frequency: 40 kHz max.
Encoder sine wave

A+, A-, B+, B-,
differential signal input
R+, R-
(incremental signal)
J3 R

Encoder sine wave
+SIN, +COS,
differential signal input SIN 0.9...1.1V
REFSIN, REFCOS
(incremental signal) COS REFSIN/REFCOS
Encoder sine wave

C+, C-, D+, D- differential signal input
(absolute signal)
DATA+(DATA), RS-485 communication

Terminal resistance is about 130 Ω
DATA-(/DATA) interface
CLOCK differential
CLOCK+, CLOCK- Line Driver RS422 level output
output for ENDAT.
NOTE:
 Verify that the SW2 switch is set to the correct output voltage before powering on.
7-18
Figure 7-23
7-19

1. After the encoder inputs a PULSE signal, there is an output signal by the division factor “n.” Set
Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0
X X OUT/M IN/M

Division Factor
OUT/M IN/M
A-/A
A-/A
B-/B
B-/B
0 0
AO-AO
A/O-/A/O A/O-/A/O
AO-AO
BO-BO
B/O-/B/O BO-BO
B/O-/B/O
A-/A A-/A
B-/B B-/B
1 0
A/O-/A/O A/O-/A/O
AO-AO
A O -A O
B/O-/B/O
B O -B O B/O-/B/O
BO-BO
A-/A A-/A
B-/B B-/B
X 1
A/O-/A/O
AO-AO AO-AO
A/O-/A/O
B/O-/B/O
BO-BO BO-BO
B/O-/B/O
Table 7-2
NOTE:
7-20
 When OUT/M, IN/M set to 0 and 0, the PG card input signal A-/A, B-/B are square waves
while AO- AO , BO- BO are frequency division output.
 When OUT/M, IN/M are set to 1 and 0, the PG card input signal A-/A, B-/B are square waves
while the BO- BO is the A and B phase indicator (for example, when BO- BO is LOW, it means
A is ahead of B: when BO- BO is HIGH, it means B is ahead of A). AO- AO is frequency
division output.
 When OUT/M, IN/M are set to X and 1, B-/B phase has to be the direction indication input
signal (for example, when B-/B is LOW, it means A is ahead of B; when B-/B is HIGH, it
means B is ahead of A). A-/A is a square wave input, BO- BO and B-/B phase are input into
synchronous action; AO- AO is frequency division output.
 Take Pr.10-29 and Pr.10-30 as examples: When the frequency division value is 15, OUT/M
=1, IN/M = 0. Set Pr.10-29 = 15 and Pr.10-30 = 0002h.
Set Pr.10-29 =15
Set Pr.10-30 =0002h
Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0
X X 1 0
7-21
Figure 7-24
Figure 7-25
7-22
Figure 7-26
Figure 7-27
7-23
7-4 EMED-PGHSD-4
50.0 [1.97]
46.0 [1.81]<2X>
14.5 [0.57]<2X>
Ø4
105.0 [4.13]<2X>
.0
[Ø
109.0 [4.29]
0.1
6]<
3X
>
Ø3
19.0 [0.75]
.5
[Ø
0.1
4]
30.0 [1.18]
19.7 [0.78]
NOTE:
1. Applicable encoder:
SIN/COS: Heidenhain ERN1387
EnDat2.1/01: Heidenhain ECN413、ECN1313
SICK HIPERFACE: SRS50/60
2. Screw specification:
Wire
0.2–1.5 mm2 (30–16 AWG)
Gauge
3. Supports Heidenhain ERN1387, EnDat2.1, HIPERFACE
7-24

Voltage input: (to adjust the output voltage amplitude of the push-pull pulse)
Vin Max. input voltage: 24 VDC
Max. input current: 30 mA
Push-pull pulse output signal
A/O, B/O
TB1 Max. output frequency: 50 kHz
GND Common power input/signal output terminal
AO, /AO,
Line driver RS422
BO, /BO
TB2 Encoder signal input terminal
Ground Terminal
JP3
Connect the motor drive power supply to ground. Supports PG shielding.
Frequency division output power terminal selection
SW1 INP: Power supplied by PG card
EXP: Power from an external source
Encoder’s voltage output terminal (Up)
NOTE: Modify the terminal output voltage by switching the direction of the
SW2 SW2 DIP switch on the PG card.
5V: 5 VDC
8V: 8 VDC
EMED-PGHSD-4 (Terminal TB2) pin definitions depend on the encoder type
Terminals Heidenhain ERN1387 Heidenhain ECN1313 HIPERFACE®

A+ A+ A+ +COS
A- A- A- REFCOS
C+ C+ Must set - -
C- C- Pr.10-31=1 - -
R+/DATA+ R+ DATA DATA+
R-/DATA- R- /DATA DATA-
VP Up Up Up
B+ B+ B+ +SIN
B- B- B- REFSIN
D+ D+ - -
D- D- - -
CLK+ - CLOCK -
CLK- - /CLOCK -
0V 0V 0V GND
7-25
Terminal Function
Terminals Descriptions Specifications
The output voltage for
the encoder. Use the
Voltage: +5.1 VDC ± 0.3 V; +8.4 VDC ± 1.5 V
Up (VP) SW2 DIP switch to
change the output
voltage to +5 V or +8 V.
Encoder common
0V Reference level for the encoder’s power.
power terminal
Encoder sine wave

A+, A-, B+, B-,
differential signal input
R+, R-
(incremental signal)
R
TB2
Encoder sine wave
+SIN, +COS,
differential signal input SIN 0.9...1.1V
REFSIN, REFCOS
(incremental signal) COS REFSIN/REFCOS
Encoder sine wave

C+, C-, D+, D- differential signal input
(absolute signal)
DATA+(DATA), RS-485 communication

Terminal resistance is about 130 Ω.
DATA-(/DATA) interface
CLOCK differential
CLOCK+, CLOCK- Line driver RS422 level output
output for ENDAT
NOTE:
 Verify that the SW2 switch is set to the correct output voltage before powering on.
7-26
Figure 7-28
7-27

1. After the encoder inputs a PULSE signal, there is an output signal by the division factor “n.” Set
Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0
X X OUT/M IN/M

Division Factor
OUT/M IN/M
A-/A
A-/A
B-/B
B-/B
0 0
AO-AO
A/O-/A/O A/O-/A/O
AO-AO
BO-BO
B/O-/B/O BO-BO
B/O-/B/O
A-/A A-/A
B-/B B-/B
1 0
A/O-/A/O A/O-/A/O
AO-AO
A O -A O
B/O-/B/O
B O -B O B/O-/B/O
BO-BO
A-/A A-/A
B-/B B-/B
X 1
A/O-/A/O
AO-AO AO-AO
A/O-/A/O
B/O-/B/O
BO-BO BO-BO
B/O-/B/O
Table 7-3
NOTE:
 In the waveform, A-/A, B-/B are the PG card input signals; AO- AO , BO- BO are the differential output
frequency division signals. Use a differential probe to measure.
7-28
 When OUT/M, IN/M set to 0 and 0, the PG card input signal A-/A, B-/B are square waves while AO-
AO , BO- BO are frequency division output.
 When OUT/M, IN/M are set to 1 and 0, the PG card input signal A-/A, B-/B are square waves while the
BO- BO is the A and B phase indicator (for example, when BO- BO is LOW, it means A is ahead of B:
when BO- BO is HIGH, it means B is ahead of A). AO- AO is frequency division output.
 When OUT/M, IN/M are set to X and 1, B-/B phase has to be the direction indication input signal (for
example, when B-/B is LOW, it means A is ahead of B; when B-/B is HIGH, it means B is ahead of A).
A-/A is a square wave input, BO- BO and B-/B phase are input into synchronous action; AO- AO is
frequency division output.
 Take Pr.10-29 and Pr.10-30 as examples: When the frequency division value is 15, OUT/M =1, IN/M =
0. Set Pr.10-29 = 15 and Pr.10-30 = 0002h.
Set Pr.10-29 =15
Set Pr.10-30 =0002h
Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0
X X 1 0
7-29
Figure 7-29
Figure 7-30
7-30
Figure 7-31
Figure 7-32
7-31
7-32
Chapter 8 Specifications | VFD-ED
Chapter 8 Specifications
8-1 230V Models

8-2 460V Models
8-3 General Specifications
8-4 Operation, Storage and Transportation Environments
8-5 Derating Curve
8-1
8-1 230V Models

Frame Size B C D E
Model VFD-_ _ _ED23/21S 022* 037* 040 055 075 110 150 185 220 300 370
Applicable Motor Output (kW) 2.2 3.7 4 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37
Applicable Motor Output (HP) 3 5 5 7.5 10 15 20 25 30 40 50
Rated Output Capacity (kVA) 4.8 6.8 7.9 9.5 12.5 19 25 29 34 46 55
Rated Output Current (A) 12 17 20 24 30 45 58 77 87 132 161
Output Rating
Maximum Output Voltage (V) Proportional to input voltage

Output Frequency Range (Hz) 0.00–299
Carrier Frequency Range (kHz) 2–15 2–9
Rated Output Maximum Carrier
8 kHz 10 kHz 8 kHz 6 kHz
Frequency
Input Current (A) 24 34 20 23 30 47 56 73 90 132 161
Single-phase Three-phase
Input Rating
Rated Voltage (V)

200–240
Rated Frequency (Hz) 50/60
Voltage Tolerance (V) 180–264
Frequency Tolerance (Hz) 47–63
Cooling Method Fan cooling
Weight (kg) 6 6 6 8 10 10 13 13 13 36 36
NOTE: *VFD022ED21S & VFD037ED21S are single-phase input models. Table 8-1
8-2 460V Models

Frame Size B C D E
Model VFD-_ _ _ED43S 040 055 075 110 150 185 220 300 370 450 550 750
Applicable Motor Output (kW) 4 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75
Applicable Motor Output (HP) 5 7.5 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 100
Rated Output Capacity (kVA) 9.2 10.4 13.5 18.3 24 30.3 36 46.2 63.7 80 96.4 116.3
Rated Output Current (A) 11.5 13 17 23 30 38 45 58 80 100 128 165
Output Rating
Maximum Output Voltage (V) Proportional to input voltage

Output Frequency Range (Hz) 0.00–299
Carrier Frequency Range (kHz) 2–15 2–9 2–6
Rated Output Maximum Carrier

Frequency
Input Current (A) 11.5 14 17 24 30 37 47 58 80 100 128 165
Input Rating
Rated Voltage (V) Three-phase 380–480

Rated Frequency (Hz) 50/60
Voltage Tolerance (V) 342–528
Frequency Tolerance (Hz) 47–63
Cooling Method Fan cooling
Weight (kg) 6 8 10 10 10 10 13 14.5 36 36 50 50
NOTE: *Assumes operation at the rated output current. Input current rating varies depending on the Table 8- 2
input reactor, transformer, wiring connections and power supply impedance.
8-2
8-3 General Specifications

Item Specifications
Control Method V/F, VF+PG, SVC, FOC+PG, FOC+PM
In V/F mode: 150% at 0.5 Hz.
Starting Torque
In FOC+PG or FOC+PM mode: 150% at 0 Hz.
Speed Control Range 1:50 (up to 1:1000 when using PG card)
Speed Control Accuracy ±0.5% (up to ±0.02% when using PG card)
Speed Response Ability 5 Hz (Up to 30 Hz for vector control)
Max. Output Frequency 0.00–299.00 Hz
Control Characteristics
Output Frequency
Digital command 0.005%; analog command 0.5%.
Accuracy
Frequency Setting Digital command: 0.01 Hz; analog command: 1/4096 (12 bit) of the maximum
Resolution output frequency.
Torque Limit Max. is 200% of the torque current
Torque Accuracy ±5%
Accel. / Decel. Time 0.00–600.00 seconds
V/F Curve Adjustable V/F curve using four independent points.
Frequency Setting Signal ±10 V
About 125% while ED is 30% (use optional brake resistor)
Brake Torque
Note: ED is “Executive Duty”
Motor Protection Electronic thermal relay protection
The current is limited by 190% of the drive’s rated current and the limit for over-
Over-current Protection
current protection is 250% of the drive’s rated current.
Protection Characteristics
Ground Leakage Current

More than 50% of the drive’s rated current
Protection
Overload Ability Constant torque: 150% for 60 seconds; variable torque: 180% for 10 seconds.
Over-voltage level: Low-voltage level:
Voltage Protection [230V models] VDC > 400 V [230V models] VDC < 200 V
[460V models] VDC > 800 V [460V models] VDC < 400 V
Over-voltage Protection for
Varistor (MOV)
the Input Power
Overheating Protection Built-in temperature sensor
EMC Directive EN IEC 61800-3:2018
Certifications
Production Compliance EN 61800-5-1:2007 + A1:2017 + A11:2021
Production Certifications *1 CE, UL, EAC, RCM, KC, RoHS
Safety Certification *1 TUV (STO SIL2)
NOTE: Table 8-3

* : For information on Certifications and Declaration of Conformity (Doc), visit Delta | Download Center
1
(deltaww.com)
8-3
8-4 Operation, Storage and Transportation Environments

DO NOT expose the AC motor drive to a poor environment, such as one with dust, direct sunlight, corrosive or
inflammable gases, humidity, liquids or excessive vibration. The salt in the air must be less than 0.01 mg/cm2
every year.
Installation
IEC60364-1/IEC60664-1 pollution degree 2. Indoor use only.
Location
Between -10–40°C, up to 50°C with derating for the operation
temperature.
2.2–4 kW: for every 1°C increase in temperature,
Between decrease the drive’s rated current by 2.2%
Operation
40–50°C 5.5–30 kW: for every 1°C increase in temperature,
Surrounding
with decrease the drive’s rated current by 2.5%
Temperature
Derating 37–75 kW: for every 1°C increase in temperature,
decrease the drive’s rated current by 2.0%
Storage/
-20–60oC
Transportation
Environment Non-condensing, non-freezing.
Operation Max. 90%
Rated Storage/
Max. 90%
Humidity Transportation
No water condensation
If the AC motor drive is installed at an altitude of 0–1000 m, follow
normal operation restrictions. For altitudes of 1000–3000 m,
decrease the drive’s rated current by 1% or lower the temperature
Altitude Operation
by 0.5°C for every 100 m increase in altitude. The maximum
altitude for corner grounding is 3000 m. If installing at an altitude
higher than 3000 m is required, contact Delta for more information.
Power
TN system*1*2
System
Package Storage
ISTA procedure 1A (according to weight) IEC60068-2-31
Drop Transportation
 1.0 mm, peak to peak value range from 2–13.2 Hz;
 0.7–1.0 G range from 13.2–55 Hz;
Vibration
 1.0 G range from 55–512 Hz.
Compliance with IEC 60068-2-27.
Impact Compliance with IEC/EN 60068-2-27
Protection
NEMA 1/IP20
Level
EMC Level IEC 61800-3 and IEC 61000-4
NOTE: Table 8-4
*1: TN system: The neutral point of the power system connects directly to the ground. The exposed
metal components connect to the ground through the protective grounding conductor.
* : Single-phase models use a single-phase three-wire power system.
2
8-4
8-5 Derating Curve

 To choose the right model for your applications, consider derating factors such as ambient
temperature, altitude, carrier frequency, and so on.
Ambient Temperature Derating Curve
Derating for Ambient Temperature

105
Drive Output Current Rating (%)
100
95
90
85
80
75
70
30 35 40 45 50
Ambient Temperature (°C)
2.2~4 kW 5.5~30 kW 37~75 kW
Figure 8-1
The rated output current derating (%) for different ambient temperature:
Ambient Temp.(°C)
30 35 40 45 50
Model
2.2~4 kW 100 100 100 89 78
5.5~30 kW 100 100 100 87 75
37~75 kW 100 100 100 90 80
Table 8-5
8-5
Altitude Derating Curve
Condition Operating Environment

If the AC motor drive is installed at an altitude of 0–1000 m, follow normal
operation restrictions. For altitudes of 1000–3000 m, decrease the drive’s rated
High Altitude current by 1% or lower the temperature by 0.5°C for every 100 m increase in
altitude. The maximum altitude for corner grounding is 3000 m. If installing at an
altitude higher than 3000 m is required, contact Delta for more information.
Table 8-6
Derating for High Altitude

105
Drive's Output Current Rating (%)
100
95
90
85
80
75
70
0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000
Altitude (Meter)
Figure 8-2
The rated output current derating (%) for different altitudes above sea level:
Altitude above Sea Level (Meter) 0 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000
Output Current / Rated Current (%) 100 100 95 90 85 80
Table 8-7
8-6
Carrier Frequency Derating Curve
Carrier Frequency Derating Curve
100
Drive's Output Current Rating (%)
90
80
70
60
50
40
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Fc (kHz)
2.2~4 kW 5.5~11 kW 15~22 kW 30~45 kW 55~75 kW
Figure 8-3
The rated output current derating (%) for different carrier frequencies:
Fc (kHz)
2 4 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Frame/Model
B 2.2~4 kW 100 100 100 100 100 94.24 88.92 82.54 78.08 73.95 70.14 66.61
C 5.5~11 kW 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 95.35 91.02 86.98 84.14 80.67
D 15~22 kW 100 100 100 100 100 92.32 85.21 78.63 72.53 66.87 61.62 56.74
E 30~45 kW 100 100 100 90.73 82.20 74.31 - - - - - -
E 55~75 kW 100 100 100 - - - - - - - - -
Table 8-8
8-7
8-8
Chapter 9 Digital KeypadVFD-ED
Chapter 9 Digital Keypad
9-1 Description of Keyboard Panel

9-2 Keypad Operation Process
9-3 Description of the Digital Keypad KPC-CC01
9-4 Digital Keypad KPC-CC01 Functions
9-5 Digital Keypad KPC-CC01 Fault Codes and Descriptions
9-6 TPEditor Installation
9-1
9-1 Description of Keyboard Panel

Keyboard Panel KPED-LE01
Keypad Functions
Keys Description
Shift key
Moves the cursor so you can adjust the selected value.
RESET key
Resets the motor drive after a fault.
MODE key
Changes among the different display modes.
ENTER key
Allows you to read or modify the current parameter settings.
Up and Down keys

These buttons have two functions:
1. Press the Up or Down button to increase or decrease the selected value.
2. Press the Up or Down button to select items in a menu and languages.
LED Function Description

LED Description
Status Display
UP: Moving up.
DN: Moving down
D1: MI1 status
D2: MI2 status
D3: MI3 status
D4: MI4 status
Main Display Area
Displays frequency, current, voltage, rotation direction, user-defined units, errors and
warnings.
9-2
Description of Displayed Functions

Displayed Function Description
Displays the VFD-ED frequency setting.
Displays the actual frequency output from the VFD-ED to

the motor.
Displays the user-defined value in Pr.00-04.
Displays the current (amperes).
Displays the selected parameter.
Displays the value in a parameter.
Displays the external fault.
Displays “End” for approximately one second (as shown

in the left figure) if the data has been accepted and
automatically stored in the register.
Displays if the setting data is not accepted or data value
exceeds the allowed range.
9-3
9-2 Keypad Operation Process
9-4
9-3 Description of Digital Keypad KPC-CC01

KPC-CC01
Communication Interface
RJ45 (socket), RS-485 interface
Communication protocol:
RTU19200, 8, N, 2
Installation Method
1. Embedded type and can be put flat on the surface of the
control box. The front cover is water proof.
2. Buy a MKC-KPPK model to do wall mounting or embedded
mounting. Its protection level is IP66.
3. The maximum RJ45 extension lead is 5 m (16ft)
4. This keypad can only be used on Delta’s motor drive C2000,
CH2000, CP2000, and ED series.
Descriptions of Keypad Functions

Key Descriptions
Start Operation Key
1. Only valid when the source of operation command is the keypad.
2. Operates the AC motor drive by the function setting. The RUN LED will be ON.
3. Can be pressed repeatedly at the stop process.
Stop Command Key.
1. This key has the highest priority when the command is from the keypad.
2. When it receives the STOP command, regardless of whether the AC motor
drive is in operation or stop status, the AC motor drive needs to execute the
“STOP” command.
3. Use the RESET key to reset the drive after a fault occurs.
4. If you cannot reset after the fault:
(1) The condition which triggers the fault is not cleared. After you clear the
condition, you can then reset the fault.
(2) The drive is in the fault status when powered on. After you clear the
condition, restart and then you can reset the fault.
Operation Direction Key

1. Only controls the operation direction, NOT the drive activation. FWD: forward,
REV: reverse.
2. Refer to the Descriptions of LED Functions on p.9-6 for more details.
ENTER Key
Goes to the next menu level. If at the last level, press ENTER to execute the
command.
ESC Key
Leaves the current menu and returns to the previous menu; also functions as a
return key or cancel key in a sub-menu.
9-5
Key Descriptions
MENU key. Returns to the main menu. Menu items:

1. Parameter Setup 8. Time Setup 14. Main Page
5. Copy Parameter 9. Keypad Locked 15. PC Link
6. Fault Record 12. Display Setup
7. Language Setup 13. Start-up
NOTE: Menu items that are not listed above are not supported in VFD-ED.
Direction: Left / Right / Up / Down

1. In the numeric value setting mode, moves the cursor and changes the numeric
value.
2. In the menu / text selection mode, selects an item.
Function Key
The functions keys have defaults and can also be user-defined. The defaults for F1
and F4 work with the function list below. For example, F1 is the JOG function, and
F4 is a quick setting key for adding / deleting user-defined parameters.
Descriptions of LED Functions

LED Descriptions
Steady ON: STOP indicator for the AC motor drive.
Blinking: the drive is in standby.
Steady OFF: the drive does not execute the “STOP” command.
Operation Direction LED

1. Green light: the drive is running forward.
2. Red light: the drive is running backward.
3. Flashing light: the drive is changing direction.
RUN LED:
LED
Condition / State
status
CANopen at initial
OFF No LED
CANopen at pre-operation
Blinking
CANopen–
“RUN”
CANopen at stop
Single
flash
CANopen at operation status

ON
9-6
LED Descriptions
ERR LED:
LED
Condition / State
status
OFF No Error
One message fail
Single
flash
Node guarding failure or heartbeat message failure
CANopen– Double
flash
“ERR”
Synchronization failure
Triple
flash
Bus off
ON
9-7
9-4 Digital Keypad KPC-CC01 Functions
NOTE:
1. Start-up screen can only display pictures, not animation.
2. When powered ON, it displays the start-up screen then the main screen. The main screen displays Delta’s default setting
F/H/A/U. You can set the display order with Pr.00-03 (Start-up Display). When you selected the U screen, use the left /
right keys to switch between the items, and set the display order for the U screen with Pr.00-04 (Content of Multi-function
Display).
3. VFD-ED only supports the following menu items:
1. Parameter Setup 6. Fault Record 8. Time Setup 12. Display Setup 14. Main Page
5. Copy Parameter 7. Language Setup 9. Keypad Locked 13. Start-up 15. PC Link
Display Icon
Display item
9-8
1. Parameter Setup
For example: Setup source for the master frequency command.
In Parameter Group 00 Basic Parameters, use
Up/Down keys to select parameter 20: Auto Frequency
Command.
Press ENTER to go to this parameter’s setting menu.

Press to select.
Press to select the

Use Up/Down keys to choose a setting.
parameter group. For example: choose “2 Analog Input”, and then press
ENTER.
Once you select a parameter
group, press to go into After you press ENTER, END is displayed which
means the parameter setting is done.
that group.
NOTE: When parameter lock / password protection
function is enabled, it displays “Pr. lock” on the upper
right corner of the keypad. The parameter cannot be
written or is protected by the password under this
circumstance.
5. Copy Parameter
Four groups of parameters are available to copy.
The steps are shown in the example below.
Example: parameter saved in the motor drive.

1. Go to “Copy Parameter”
2. Select the parameter group to copy and press ENTER
Press ENTER to go to 001– key.
004: content storage
1. Select 1: keypad  VFD
2. Press ENTER key to go to “keypad  VFD” screen.
Begin copying parameters until it is done.
After copying parameters is done, the keypad

automatically returns to this screen.
Example: parameter saved in the keypad.
1. Go to Copy parameter
2. Select the parameter group to copy and press ENTER.
1. Select 2: VFD Keypad

2. Press ENTER to go to “Save in the keypad drive”
screen.
Press Up / Down keys to select a symbol.

Press Left / Right keys to move the cursor to select a file
name.
9-9
String & Symbol Table:

！＂＃＄％＆＇（）＊＋，－．／０１２３４５６７８９：；＜＝＞？＠ＡＢＣＤＥＦ
ＧＨＩＪＫＬＭＮＯＰＱＲＳＴＵＶＷＸＹＺ［＼］＾＿｀ａｂｃｄｆｇｈｉｊｋｌｍ
ｎｏｐｑｒｓｔｕｖｗｘｙｚ｛｜｝～
After you confirm the file name, press ENTER key.
To begin copying parameters until it is done.
After copying parameters is done, the keypad

automatically returns to this screen.
Press Right key to see the date of the parameters copied.
Press Right key to see the time of the parameters copied.
6. Fault Record
Able to store 6 fault codes (Keypad V1.02 and previous versions)
Able to store 30 fault codes (Keypad V1.20 and later version)
The most recent fault record shows as the first record. Choose a fault record
to see its details such as date, time, frequency, current, voltage, and
DC bus voltage)
Press Up / Down keys to select a fault record.

Press to see a fault After selecting a fault code, press ENTER to see that
fault record’s details.
record’s details.
Press Up / Down keys to scroll through a fault record’s

details such as date, time, frequency, current, voltage,
and DC bus voltage.
Press ESC key to go back to fault record page.

Press Up / Down keys to select the next fault code.
After selecting a fault code, press ENTER to see that
fault record’s details.
Press Up / Down keys to see a fault record’s detail such

as date, time, frequency, current, voltage, and DC bus
voltage.
NOTE:
The AC motor drive actions are recorded and saved to the KPC-CC01.
When you remove the KPC-CC01 and connect it to another AC motor
9-10
drive, the previous fault records are not deleted. The new fault records of
the new AC motor drive continue to be added to the KPC-CC01.
7. Language Setup
The language setting option is displayed in the language of your choice.
Language setting options:
1. English 3. Türkçe
2. 繁體中文 4. Русский
NOTE: VFD-ED only supports these four languages currently.
Use Up / Down keys to select
the language, and then press
ENTER.
8. Time Setup
Time setup
2009/01/01 Press Up / Down keys to set the Year
_ _ : _ _ :_ _
Use Left / Right keys to select

Press Up / Down keys to set the Month
Year, Month, Day, Hour, Minute
or Second to change.
Press Up / Down keys to set the Day
Press Up / Down keys to set the Hour
Press Up / Down keys to set the Minute
Press Up / Down keys to set the Second
Press ENTER to confirm the Time Setup.
NOTE:
Limitation: The charging process for the keypad super capacitor finishes in
about 6 minutes. When the digital keypad is removed, the time setting is
saved for 7 days. After 7 days, you must reset the time.
9-11
9. Keypad Locked
Lock the keypad
Use this function to lock the keypad. The main screen does not display
“keypad locked” when the keypad is locked; however, it displays the
message ”Press ESC 3 sec to UnLock Key” when you press any key.
When the keypad is locked, the main screen does not

Press to lock indicate the lock status.
Press any key on the keypad; a message displays as

shown on the left.
If you do not press ESC, the keypad automatically

returns to this screen.
Press any key on the keypad, a message displays as

shown on the left.
Press ESC for 3 seconds to unlock the keypad; the

keypad returns to this screen. All keys on the keypad
is functional.
All keys on the keypad is functional. Turning the power off and on does not
lock the keypad.
12. Display Setup

1. Contrast
Press Up / Down keys to adjust the setting

value.
Press to go to the For example, increase Contrast to +10.

setting screen.
After you set the value, press ENTER to see the

screen display after contrast is adjusted to +10.
Then press ENTER and decrease the Contrast

to -10.
Press ENTER to see screen display after

contrast is adjusted to -10.
2. Back-light
Press ENTER to go to the Back-Light Time

Setting screen.
9-12
Press Up / Down keys to adjust the setting

value.
When the setting value is 0 Min, the backlight

remains on.
When the setting value is 10 Min, the backlight

turns off in 10 minutes.
3. Text Color
Press ENTER to go to Text Color Setting screen.
The default value is White Text.
Press Up / Down keys to adjust the setting value,

and then press ENTER.
1:
2: The setting value changes to Blue Text.
3:
13. Start-up
1. Default 1 DELTA LOGO
Indus tr ia l Aut om at ion
2. Default 2 DELTA Text
C Series
Indu strial A uto mation
3. User Defined: an optional accessory is required (TPEditor & USB / RS-485

Communication Interface-IFD6530) to design your own start-up screen.
If the editor accessory is not installed, the User Define option displays a
blank screen.
9-13
USB/RS-485 Communication Interface-IFD6530

Refer to Chapter 6 Optional Accessories for more details.
TPEditor
Download TPEditor software at Delta website. Select TPEditor version 1.60
or above. Refer to the instructions for TPEditor in <15. PC Link> in this
section.
14. Main Page

1. Default page
F 60.00Hz
H 0.00Hz
u 540.0Vdc
Default screen and editable F 60.00Hz >>> H >>> A >>> U (options rotate)
2. User Define: an optional accessory is required (TPEditor & USB / RS-485
screen are available upon
Communication Interface-IFD6530) to design your own main screen.
selection. If the editor accessory is not installed, the User Define option displays a
blank screen.
Press to select.
USB/RS-485 Communication Interface-IFD6530

Refer to Chapter 6 Optional Accessories for more details.
TPEditor
Download TPEditor software at Delta website. Select TPEditor version
1.60 or above. Refer to the instructions for TPEditor in <15. PC Link> in
this section.
15. PC Link
1. TPEditor: This function enables you to connect the keypad to a computer
then to download and edit user-defined screens.
Click ENTER to go to <Waiting to connect to PC>
In TPEditor, from the Communication menu, then choose “Write to HMI”
In the Confirm message box, click YES.
9-14
The software starts downloading screens to

edit to the KPC-CC01.
Download completed
2. VFDSoft: this function enables you to link to the VFDSoft then upload
the parameters 1–4 you have saved in KPC-CC01.
NOTE:
If the Operation System (OS) of your computer is Windows 10, right-
click on the VFDSoft icon to enter the Property. Then, click the
Compatibility tab and select the Run this program as an
administrator checkbox. (as shown in the red frames in the figure
below)
Connecting KPC-CCO1 to a computer
9-15
Select 2: VFDSoft, and then press ENTER.
Press the Up / Down keys to select a

parameter group to upload to VFDSoft.
Press ENTER to go to Waiting to connect

to PC screen.
Open VFDSoft and click Parameter on the toolbar.
In Parameter Manager, from the Table menu, choose Read from KPC-
CC01.
Choose the correct communication port and click OK
9-16
Start to upload parameters to VFDSoft
Uploading parameter is completed
Before using the user-defined start-up screen and user-defined main

screen, you must preset the start-up screen and the main screen as user-
defined. If you do not download the user-defined screen to the KPC-CC01,
the start-up screen and the main screen are blank.
9-17
Other displays
When a fault occurs, the screen shows a fault or warning:
1. Press RESET key to reset the fault code. If there is no response, contact your local distributor or return the
unit to the factory. To view the fault DC bus voltage, output current and output voltage, press MENU and then
choose 6: Fault Record.
2. After resetting, if the screen returns to the main screen and shows no fault after you press ESC, the fault is
cleared.
3. When the fault or warning message appears, the LED backlight blinks until the fault or warning is cleared.
Optional accessory: RJ45 Extension Lead for Digital Keypad

Part No. Description
CBC-K3FT RJ45 extension lead, 3 feet (approximately 0.9 m)
CBC-K10FT RJ45 extension lead, 10 feet (approximately 3 m)
NOTE: If communication cables are required, buy non-shielded, 24 AWG, four-wire twisted pair, 100 ohms
communication cables.
9-18
9-5 Digital Keypad KPC-CC01 Fault Codes and Descriptions
Fault Codes
LCD Display Fault Name Description Corrective Actions
Error in the keypad’s flash memory.
1. Press RESET to clear the errors.
2. Check for any problem on Flash IC.
Flash memory Keypad flash
3. Shut down the system, wait for ten minutes,
read error (FrEr) memory read error
and then restart the system.
If none of the above solutions works, contact
your authorized local dealer for assistance.
Error in the keypad’s flash memory.

save error (FsEr) memory save error
Error in the default parameters.

It might be caused by a firmware update.
parameter error memory parameter
(FPEr) error
Keypad cannot read any data sent from the VFD.

1. Verify that the keypad is properly connected to
the motor drive by a communication cable
Reading AC motor Keypad error when such as RJ45.
drive data error reading AC motor 2. Press RESET to clear the errors.
(VFDr) drive data 3. Shut down the system, wait for ten minutes,
A serious error in the keypad’s CPU.
1. Check for any problem on CPU clock.
3. Check for any problem on RTC IC.
CPU error 4. Verify that the communication quality of the
Keypad CPU error
(CPUEr) RS-485 cable is good.
9-19
Warning Codes
LCD Display Warning Name Description Corrective Actions
Motor drive does not accept the
communication command sent from the
keypad.
1. Verify that the keypad is properly
connected to the motor drive by a
Communication error 1 RS-485 Modbus illegal
communication cable such as RJ45.
(CE1) function code
2. Press RESET on the keypad to clear
errors.
If none of the above solutions works,
contact your local authorized dealer for
assistance.
Keypad does not accept the motor

drive’s communication command.
1. Remove the keypad and reconnect it.
Keypad communication 2. Verify if the Baud rate = 19200 bps,
Communication data, illegal function and the Format = RTU8, N, 2
command error 1 code (Keypad auto- 3. Verify if the keypad is properly
(CK1) detect this error and connected to the motor drive on the
display it) communication contact by a
contact your local authorized dealer.

keypad’s communication address.
Communication error 2 RS-485 Modbus illegal
(CE2) data address
assistance.

data, illegal data and the Format = RTU8, N, 2
Communication
address (Keypad auto- 3. Verify if the keypad is properly
address error (CK2)
detect this error and connected to the motor drive on the
display it) communication contact by a

communication data sent from the
keypad.
Communication error 3 RS-485 Modbus illegal connected to the motor drive by a
(CE3) data value communication cable such as RJ45.
assistance.
9-20

2. Verify if the Baud rate = 19200 bps,
Keypad communication
and the Format = RTU8, N, 2
Communication data data, illegal data value
3. Verify if the keypad is properly
error (CK3) (Keypad auto-detect
this error and display it) connected to the motor drive on the
communication contact by a
Motor drive cannot process the
keypad.
RS-485 Modbus data is
Communication error 4 communication cable such as RJ45.
written to read-only
(CE4) 2. Press RESET to clear the errors.
address
3. Shut down the system, wait for ten
minutes, and then restart the system.
assistance.
data is written to read- and the Format = RTU8, N, 2
Communication slave
only address (Keypad 3. Verify if the keypad is properly
error (CK4)
auto-detect this error connected to the motor drive on the
and display it) communication contact by a
Motor drive does not respond to the
keypad.
Communication error Modbus transmission communication cable such as RJ45.
10 (CE10) time-Out 2. Press RESET to clear the errors.
3. Shut down the system, wait for ten
assistance.
Digital keypad 1. Remove the keypad and reconnect it.
2. Verify if the Baud rate = 19200 bps,
transmission time-out
Keypad and the Format = RTU8, N, 2
(The keypad
communication time 3. Verify if the keypad is properly
automatically detects
out (CK10) connected to the motor drive on the
and shown this communication contact by a
warning) communication cable such as RJ45.
9-21

Keypad’s TPEditor uses an unsupported
object.
1. Verify that the TPEditor is not using
an unsupported object or setting.
Delete unsupported objects and
unsupported settings.
2. Re-edit the object in the TPEditor,
TP object is not Object not supported
and then download it to the keypad.
defined (TPNO) by TPEditor
3. Verify that the motor drive supports
the TP functions. If the drive does not
support TP function, the main page
displays Default.
assistance.
NOTE: The warning code CExx only occurs when the communication problem is between the drive and the
keypad. It has nothing to do with the drive and other devices. Note the warning code description to find
the cause of the error if CExx appears.
9-22
File Copy Setting Fault Description
These faults occur when KPC-CC01 cannot perform the command after pressing the ENTER key in
the copy function.

The parameter / file is read-only and
cannot be written to.
Parameter and file are 1. Verify the specification in the user
Read only (ERR1)
read-only manual.
If this solution does not work, contact your
local authorized dealer for assistance.
An error occurred while writing to a
parameter / file.
1. Check for any problem on the Flash IC.
Write in error Fail to write parameter and 2. Shut down the system, wait for ten
(ERR2) file minutes, and then restart the system.
assistance.
A setting cannot be changed while the
motor drive is in operation.
Drive operating AC motor drive is in
1. Verify that the drive is not in operation.
(ERR3) operating status
A setting cannot be changed because a
parameter is locked.
1. Check if the parameter is locked. If it is
Parameter locked AC motor drive parameter
locked, unlock it and try to set the
(ERR4) is locked
parameter again.
A setting cannot be changed because a
parameter is being modified.
1. Check if the parameter is being
Parameter AC motor drive parameter
modified. If it is not being modified, try
changing (ERR5) is changing
to change that parameter again.
A setting cannot be changed because an
error has occurred in the motor drive.
1. Check if any error occurred in the motor
Fault code
Fault code is not cleared drive. If there is no error, try to change
(ERR6)
the setting again.
A setting cannot be changed because of a
warning message given to the motor drive.
Warning code Warning code is not 1. Check if there is a warning message
(ERR7) cleared given to the motor drive.
9-23

Data to be copied are not the correct type,
so the setting cannot be changed.
1. Check if the products’ serial numbers to
File type be copied are in the same category. If
File type mismatch
mismatch (ERR8) they are in the same category, try to
copy the setting again.
A setting cannot be changed because
some data are locked.
1. Check if the data are unlocked or able
to be unlocked. If the data are
unlocked, try to change the setting
Password locked File is locked with again.
(ERR9) password 2. Shut down the system, wait for ten
assistance.
A setting cannot be changed because the
password is incorrect.
1. Check if the password is correct. If the
password is correct, try to change the
Password fail setting again.
File password mismatch
(ERR10) 2. Shut down the system, wait for ten
assistance.
version of the data is incorrect.
1. Check if the version of the data matches
Version fail the motor drive. If it matches, try to
File version mismatch
(ERR11) change the setting again.
assistance.
data copying time-out expired.
1. Try copying the data again.
2. Check if copying data is authorized. If it
VFD Time out AC motor drive copy is authorized, try to copy the data again.
(ERR12) function time-out 3. Shut down the system, wait for ten
assistance.
NOTE: The content in this section only applies to KPC-CC01 keypad V1.01 and later versions.
9-24
9-6 TPEditor Installation

TPEditor can edit up to 256 HMI (Human-Machine Interface) pages with a total storage capacity of
256 KB. Each page can include 50 normal objects and 10 communication objects.
1. TPEditor: Setup & Basic Functions

(1) Run TPEditor version 1.60 or later by double-clicking the program icon.
(2) On the File menu, click New. In the New project dialog box, for Set Device Type, select DELTA VFD-C
Inverter. For TP Type, select VFD-C KeyPad. For File Name, enter TPE0 and then click OK.
(3) The editor displays the Design window. On the Edit menu, click Add a New Page. You can also right-click
on the TP page in the upper right corner of the Design window and click Add to add one more page(s) to
edit.
(4) Edit the start-up screen.
9-25
(5) Add static text. Open a blank page (step 3), then on the toolbar click . Double-click the blank page
to display the Static Text Setting dialog box, and then enter the static text.
(6) Add a static bitmap. Open a blank page (step 3), then on the toolbar, click . Double-click the blank
page to display the Static Bitmap Setting dialog box where you can choose the bitmap.
You can only use images in the BMP format. Click the image and then click Open to show the image in
the page.
(7) Add a geometric bitmap. There are 11 kinds of geometric bitmaps to choose. Open a new blank page (step
3), then on the toolbar click the geometric bitmap icon that you need .
In the page, drag the geometric bitmap and enlarge it to the size that you need.
9-26
(8) When you finish editing the start-up screen, on the Communication menu, click Input User Defined
Keypad Starting Screen.
(9) Download the new setting: On the Tool menu, click Communication. Set up the communication port and
speed for the IFD6530. There are three speeds available: 9600 bps, 19200 bps, and 38400 bps.
(10) On the Communication menu, click Input User Defined Keypad Starting Screen.
(11) The Editor displays a message asking you to confirm the new setting. Before you click OK, on the
keypad, go to MENU, select PC LINK, press ENTER and then wait for few seconds. Then click YES in
the confirmation dialog box to start downloading.
9-27
2. Edit the Main Page and Download to the Keypad

(1) In the Editor, add a page to edit. On the Edit menu, click Add a New Page. You can also right-click on the
TP page in the upper right corner of the Design window and click Add to add one more page to edit. This
keypad currently supports up to 256 pages.
(2) In the bottom right-hand corner of the Editor, click the page number to edit, or on the View menu, click HMI
Page to start editing the main page. As shown in the picture above, the following objects are available.
From left to right they are: Static Text, ASCII Display, Static Bitmap, Scale, Bar Graph, Button, Clock Display,
Multi-state bit map, Units, Numeric Input, the 11 geometric bitmaps, and lines of different widths. Use the
same steps to add Static Text, Static Bitmap, and geometric bitmaps as for the start-up page.
(3) Add a numeric/ASCII display. On the toolbar, click the Numeric/ASCII button. In the page, double-click
the object to specify the Refer Device, Frame Setting, Font Setting and Alignment.
Click […]. In the Refer Device dialog box, choose the VFD communication port that you need. If you want
to read the output frequency (H), set the Absolute Addr. to 2202. For other values, refer to Appendix B-4
ACMD Modbus Comm Address List in this user manual.
9-28
(4) Scale Setting. On the toolbar, click to add a scale. You can also edit the Scale Setting in the
Property Window on the right-hand side of your computer screen.
A. Scale Position: specifies where to place the scale.

B. Scale Side: specifies whether the scale is numbered from smaller numbers to larger numbers or
from larger to smaller.
C. Font Setting: specifies the font.
D. Value Length: specifies 16 bits or 32 bits.
E. Main Scale & Sub-Scale: divides the whole scale into equal parts; enter the numbers for the main
scale and sub-scale.
F. Max Value & Min Value: specifies the numbers on the two ends of the scale. They can be negative
numbers, but the maximum and minimum values are limited by the Value Length setting. For
example, when Value Length is hexadecimal (16 bits), the maximum and the minimum value
cannot be entered as -40000.
Clicking OK creates a scale as in the picture below.
(5) Bar Graph setting. On the toolbar, click to add a bar graph.
9-29
A. Refer Device: specifies the VFD communication port.

B. Direction Setting: specifies the direction: From Bottom to Top, From Top to Bottom, From Left
to Right or From Right to Left.
C. Value Length: determines the range of the maximum value and minimum value.
D. Max Value and Min Value: specifies the maximum value and minimum value. A value smaller than
or equal to the minimum value causes the bar graph to be blank (0). A value is bigger or equal to the
maximum value causes the bar graph is full (100%). A value between the minimum and maximum
values causes the bar graph to be filled proportionally.
(6) Button : on the toolbar, click . Currently this function only allows the keypad to switch pages; other
functions are not yet available (including text input and insert image). In the blank page, double-click
to open the Button Setting dialog box.
Button Type: specifies the button’s functions.

Page Jump and Constant Setting are the only functions currently supported.
A. Page Jump Setting
a. Page Jump Setting: in the Button Type list, choose Page Jump to show the Page Jump
Setting.
b. Function Key: specifies the functions for the following keys on the KPC-CC01 keypad: F1, F2, F3,
F4, Up, Down, Left and Right. Note that the Up and Down keys are locked by TPEditor. You
cannot program these two keys. If you want to program Up and Down keys, on the Tool menu,
click Function Key Setting, and then click Re-Define Up/Down Key.
c. Button Text: specifies the text that appears on a button. For example, when you enter Next Page
for the button text, that text appears on the button.
9-30
B. Constant Setting
This function specifies the memory address’ values for the VFD or PLC. When you press the Function
Key, it writes a value to the memory address specified by the value for Constant Setting. You can use
this function to initialize a variable.
(7) Clock Display Setting: on the toolbar, click . You can display the time, day, or date on the keypad.
Open a new page and click once in that window to add a clock display.
Choose to display Time, Day, or Date on the keypad. To adjust time, go to Time Setup on the keypad’s
menu. You can also specify the Frame Setting, Font Setting, and Alignment.
(8) Multi-state bitmap: on the toolbar, click . Open a new page and click once in that window to add a
Multi-state bitmap. This object reads a bit’s property value from the PLC. It defines the image or text that
appears when this bit is 0 or 1. Set the initial status (Current State) to be 0 or 1 to define the displayed
image or text.
9-31
(9) Unit Measurement: on the toolbar, click .
Open a new blank page, and double-click on that window to display the Units Setting dialog box.
Choose the Metrology Type and the Unit Name. For Metrology, the choices are Length, Square Measure,
Volume/Solid Measure, Weight, Speed, Time, and Temperature. The unit name changes automatically
when you change metrology type.
(10) Numeric Input Setting: on the toolbar, click

This object enables you to provide parameters or communication ports (0x22xx) and to input numbers.
Open a new file and double click on that window to display the Numeric Input Setting dialog box.
A. Refer Device: specifies the Write and the Read values. Enter the numbers to display and the
corresponding parameter and communication port numbers. For example, enter 012C to Read and
Write Parameter Pr.01-44.
B. OutLine Setting: specifies the Frame Setting, Font Setting, Hori. Alignment, and Vert.
Alignment for the outline.
C. Function Key: specifies the function key to program on the keypad in the Function Key box. The
corresponding key on the keypad starts to blink. Press ENTER to confirm the setting.
D. Value Type and Value Length: specify the range of the Min Value and Max Value for the Limit
Setting. Note that the corresponding supporting values for VFD-ED must be 16 bits. 32-bit values
are not supported.
E. Value Setting: automatically set by the keypad itself.
F. Limit Setting: specifies the range for the numeric input here.
For example, if you set Function Key to F1, Min Value to 0 and Max Value to 4, when you press F1 on
the keypad, then you can press Up/Down on the keypad to increase or decrease the value. Press
9-32
ENTER on the keypad to confirm your setting. You can also view the parameter table 01-44 to verify if
you correctly entered the value.
(11) Download TP Page: Press Up / Down on the keypad to select PC Link menu item.
Then press ENTER on the keypad. The screen displays “Waiting”. In TPEditor, choose a page that you
have created, and then on the Communication menu click Write to TP to start downloading the page to
the keypad. Then, the keypad displays “Receiving”. When you see “Completed” on the keypad screen,
the download is finished. You can then press ESC on the keypad to go back to the menu screen.
9-33
9-34
Chapter 10 Auto-tuning Process | VFD-ED
Chapter 10 Auto-tuning Process
10-1 Tuning in Easy Steps for IM

10-2 Tuning in Easy Steps for PM
10-3 Descriptions of Tuning Steps
10-4 Elevator Performance Fine-tuning
10-1
10-1 Tuning in Easy Steps for IM

1. Basic Parameter Settings
Pr.00-02 Parameter Reset
Pr.00-14 Master Frequency Command Source
Pr.00-15 Operation Command Source
Pr.02-01–Pr.02-08 Multi-function Input Settings
Pr.02-11–Pr.02-16 Multi-function Output Settings
2. Encoder Settings
Pr.10-00 Selection of Encoder
Pr.10-01 Encoder PPR
Pr.10-02 Encoder Input Type Setting
3. Motor Auto-tuning
(1) Motor Settings
Pr.00-09 Control Mode
Pr.01-00 Maximum Output Frequency
Pr.01-01 Motor’s Rated Frequency
Pr.01-02 Motor’s Rated Voltage
(2) Settings for Induction Motor (IM)
Pr.05-01 Motor Rated Current
Pr.05-02 Motor Rated Power
Pr.05-03 Motor Rated Speed
Pr.05-04 Number of Motor Poles
Pr.05-00 Motor Auto-tuning
4. Multi-step Speed Settings
Pr.04-00–Pr.04-15 Multi-step Speed Setting
Pr.01-12–Pr.01-19 Acceleration / Deceleration Time Setting
Pr.01-24–Pr.01-27. Pr.01-29, Pr.01-30 S-curve for Acceleration and Deceleration Time Settings
5. Elevator Related Parameters
Pr.11-01 Elevator Speed
Pr.11-02 Traction Sheave Diameter
Pr.11-03 Gear Ratio
Pr.11-04 Suspension Ratio
Pr.11-14 Motor Current at Acceleration
Pr.11-05 Mechanical Inertial Ratio
6. Trial Run
7. Elevator Performance Fine-tuning
10-2
10-2 Tuning in Easy Steps for PM

1. Basic Parameter Settings
2. Encoder Settings
3. Motor Auto-tuning
(1) Motor Settings
(2) Settings for Permanent Magnet Synchronous Motor (PM)
Pr.11-00 System Control
4. Multi-step Speed Settings
5. Elevator Related Parameters
Pr.11-03 Gear Ratio
6. Trial Run
7. Elevator Performance Fine-tuning
10-3
10-3 Descriptions of Tuning Steps

10-3-1 Basic Parameter Settings
Press
Press
 Set Pr.00-02=9 or 10: Reset all parameters to the default. If the keypad is locked by a
password, enter the password to reset to the default. The password is also erased.
Press
Press
 Setting values:
1: RS-485 serial communication or digital keypad (KPC-CC01)
2: External analog input (See Pr.03-00)
3: Digital terminal inputs
4: Direct docking mode only, contact Delta for more information.
 Determines the drive’s master frequency source.
Press
10-4
Press
 Setting values:
1: External terminals (work with controller)
2: RS-485 serial communication or digital keypad (KPC-CC01) (does not work with
controller)
Press
Press
 The default value of Pr.02-08 is 40 (Enable Drive). If you do not need this function (does
not work with controller), set the setting value to 0.
 Setting value:
0: No function
1: Multi-step speed command 1
5: Reset
6: JOG command
7: Acceleration/deceleration speed inhibit
8: First, second acceleration/deceleration time
9: Third, fourth acceleration/deceleration time
10: EF input (Pr.07-28)
11: Reserved
12: Stop output
13–14: Reserved
15: AUI1 operation speed command
16: Reserved
17: AUI2 operation speed command
18: Emergency Stop (Pr.07-28)
19–23: Reserved
24: FWD JOG Command
25: REV JOG Command
10-5
26: Reserved
27: ASR1/ASR2 selection
28: Emergency stop (EF1) (motor coasts to stop)
29–30: Reserved
31: High torque bias (according to Pr.07-21)
32: Middle torque bias (according to Pr.07-22)
33: Low torque bias (according to Pr.07-23)
34–37: Reserved
38: Disable writing to EEPROM
39: Torque command direction ( 0 is positive direction)
40: Enable drive function
41: Magnetic contactor detection
42: Mechanical brake 1
43: EPS function (Emergency Power System)
45–51: Direct docking mode only
53: Terminal leveling signal for direct docking
54: Power failure signal
55: Manual emergency deceleration
56: Automatic emergency deceleration
57: Brake torque test action signal
59: AFE fault
Press
Press
 Setting value:
0: No function
1: Indication during operation
2: Operation speed reached
3: Desired frequency 1 reached (Pr.02-25, Pr.02-26)
4: Desired frequency 2 reached (Pr.02-27, Pr.02-28)
5: Zero Speed (Frequency command)
6: Zero speed with stop (Frequency command)
7: Over-torque (OT1) (Pr.06-05–Pr.06-07)
8: Over-torque (OT2) (Pr.06-08–Pr.06-10)
9: Drive is ready
10-6
10: User-defined low-voltage detection (LV)

11: Malfunction indication
12: Mechanical brake release (Pr.02-29, Pr.02-30, Pr.02-37)
13: Overheat (Pr.06-14)
14: Brake transistor signal
15: Motor-controlled magnetic contactor output
16: Slip error (oSL)
17: Malfunction indication 1
18: Reserved
19: Brake transistor output error
20: Warning output
21: Over-voltage warning
22: Over-current stall prevention warning
23: Over-voltage stall prevention warning
24: Operation mode indication (Pr.00-15=1)
25: Forward command
26: Reverse command
27: Output when current ≥ Pr.02-33
28: Output when current < Pr.02-33
29: Output when frequency ≥ Pr.02-34
30: Output when frequency < Pr.02-34
31: Power generation direction and status verification
32: Power generation direction
33: Zero speed (actual output frequency)
34: Zero speed with Stop (actual output frequency)
35: Fault output option 1 (Pr.06-22)
39: Reserved
40: Speed reached (including zero speed)
41: Reserved
42: STO Output Error
43–44: Direct Docking Mode only
45: Reserved
46: Retrying after a fault has occurred indication
47: Direct Docking Mode only
48: Control output of MPSCC (Motor Phase Short Circuit Contactor)
49: Emergency power mode action
50: Speed reached Pr.02-34
51: Brake torque test finished
52: AFE reset
10-7
10-3-2 Encoder Settings
Speed feedback card selections: See Chapter 7 Speed Feedback Card Selection. Delta provides
three types of PG cards, including EMED-PGABD-2, EMED-PGHSD-3, and EMED-PGHSD-4.
Press
Press
 When you set Pr.10-02 to 3, 4 or 5, you can set Pr.10-00 only to 0, 1 or 2, and you cannot
use 3, 4, 5 and 6.
 When you set Pr.10-00 to 3, the encoder has one sine and one cosine signal for each
revolution. The signal must be: 0.75–1.2 Vpp for the amplitude with phase angle 90°±5 elec.
(E.g. ERN 1185 ERN 1387)
 When you set Pr.10-00 to 4 or 6, wait for two seconds after applying the power before
executing the RUN command.
 When you set Pr.10-00 to 5, you must set Pr.08-09 to 360.
 Detection of the magnetic pole:
(1) 1 or 5: The AC motor drive outputs a short circuit to detect the position of the magnetic
pole. At this moment, the motor generates a little noise.
(2) 2: The AC motor drive detects the position of the magnetic pole with the UVW encoder
signal.
(3) 3: The AC motor drive detects the position of the magnetic pole with the sine encoder
signal.
(4) 4 or 6: The AC motor drive detects the position of the magnetic pole with the
communication encoder signal.
 The table below shows the correspondence among encoder, PG card and auto-tuning
PG Signal Applicable PG Card
PG Signal Type Pr.08-00=1 Pr.08-00=3
Type Setting x=2, 3,…
Pr.10-00=1 A, B, Z EMED-PGAB/ABD-x N/A N/A
Rolling
Pr.10-00=2 A, B, Z+U, V, W EMED-PGABD- x Rolling test*1
test*1
Pr.11-00 Bit9=0:
SIN/COS + Sinusoidal
Rolling Rolling test*1
Pr.10-00=3 (e.g. ERN1185, EMED-PGHSD-x
test*1 Pr.11-00 Bit9=1:
ERN1387)
Static test*1
SIN/COS + Endat 2.1
Dynamic
Pr.10-00=4 (e.g. ECN1313, EMED-PGSD-x Static test*1
test*1
ECN413)
Pr.10-00=5 SIN/COS EMED-PGHSD-x N/A N/A
SIN/COS + Hiperface Dynamic
Pr.10-00=6 EMED-PGHSD-x Static test*1
(e.g. SRS50/60) test*1
*1 Static: Brake engaged, no motor running. Dynamic: Brake released, motor rotates less than one revolution.
Rolling: Brake released, motor rotates more than one revolution.
10-8
Press
Press
 Sets the encoder pulses per revolution (PPR).
Press
Press
 When you set Pr.10-00 to 3, 4, 5 or 6, you can set Pr.10-02 only to 0, 1 or 2, and you cannot
use 3, 4 and 5.
 You must enter the correct pulse type for stable control.
 It is suggested that you set Pr.10-02 to 1 first. When fault code PGF1 occurs or the motor
does not run, set it to 2.
10-9
10-3-3 Motor Auto-tuning

10-3-3-1 Motor Settings
Press
Press
 Mode selection:
Speed Motor
Control Applicable Speed Energy- Tuning Ride Basic Speed
Settings Control Parameter
Mode Motor Type Feedback savings Difficulty Comfort Control Control
Range Tuning
V/F Voltage
0 V/F IM Low Low Normal 1:50
control control
✓ ✓
Frequency Frequency
1 VFPG IM Medium Medium Normal 1:50
control control
✓
Voltage Voltage
2 SVC IM Medium Medium Normal 1:50
control control
✓ ✓
Vector Frequency
3 FOCPG IM High High Good 1:1000
control control
✓ ✓
Vector Frequency
8 FOCPM PM High High Good 1:1000
control control
 Determines the AC motor drive control method.
0: You can set the V/F ratio as required and control multiple motors simultaneously.
1: You can use a PG card with an Encoder for close-loop speed control.
2: Use auto-tuning for optimal settings of the control parameters.
3: To increase torque and the accuracy of the speed control (1:1000).
8: To increase torque and the accuracy of the speed control (1:1000). This setting is for use
only with permanent magnet motors. The other settings are for use with induction motors.
Press
Press
 Determines the AC motor drive maximum output frequency, ranging from 5–299 Hz.
10-10
Press
Press
 Set this parameter according to the rated frequency on the motor nameplate. If the motor is
60 Hz, set this parameter to 60. If the motor is 50 Hz, set it to 50.
Press
Press
 Set this parameter according to the rated voltage on the motor nameplate. If the motor is 220
V, set this parameter to 220.0. If the motor is 200 V, set this parameter to 200.0.
10-11
10-3-3-2 Settings for Induction Motor (IM)

Press
Press
 Set this value according to the rated motor frequency from the motor nameplate.
Press
Press
 Set the rated power of the motor. The default is the power of the drive.
Press
Press
 Sets the motor rated speed from the value on the motor nameplate.
10-12
Press
Press
 Sets the number of motor poles (must be an even number).
Press
Press
 Position the elevator near the middle floors before auto-tuning.

 Motor auto-tuning:
Set Pr.05-00 to 1 or 2, and then press the RUN key on the digital keypad KPC-CC01
(Pr.00-15=2) to start auto-tuning. Or when the drive is in manual mode (inspection), run the
upward operation or downward operation (Pr.00-15=1) to start auto-tuning immediately. In
the process of auto-tuning, an “Auto tuning” warning continuously displays on the digital
keypad until it is finished.
 Pay attention to the following notes when Pr.05-00=1 (dynamic test):
1. Make sure that all the drive parameters are set to defaults and the motor wiring is correct.
2. Make sure the motor is not loaded before auto-tuning, and that the shaft is not connected
to any belt or gear motor. Set this parameter to 2 if you cannot separate the motor from
the load.
3. Enter the correct values for Pr.01-01, Pr.01-02, Pr.05-01, Pr.05-02, Pr.05-03 and Pr.05-
04. Refer to motor capacity to set the acceleration/deceleration time.
4. After auto-tuning is finished, check if Pr.05-05–Pr.05-09 all have values.
5. Equivalent circuit diagram:
10-13
NOTE:
 In torque/vector control mode, do not run motors in parallel.
 Do not use torque/vector control mode if the motor rated power exceeds the rated
power for the AC motor drive.
 The no-load current is usually 20–50% of the rated current.
 The rated speed cannot be larger or equal to 120 f/p (f: output frequency Pr.01-01, p:
Number of Motor Poles Pr.05-04).
 After auto-tuning is finished, activate the drive again to make it operate when the auto-
tuning command source is the external terminal.
10-14
10-3-3-3 Settings for Permanent Magnet Synchronous Motor (PM)

Press
Press
 Sets according to the motor rated current as indicated on the motor nameplate.
Press
Press
 Sets the motor rated power. The default is the power of the drive.
Press
Press
 Sets the motor rated speed according to the motor nameplate.
10-15
Press
Press
Pr.11-00 System Control
Press
Press
 When Bit 9=1, PGHSD-x with load static PG origin auto-tuning function is enabled. This
function is valid only when the mechanical brake is in engaged status.
Press
Press

 Auto-tuning process: 2, and then 1 or 3.
Set Pr.08-00 to 1 to 3, and then press the RUN key on the digital keypad KPC-CC01 (Pr.00-
15=2) to start auto-tuning. Or when the drive is in manual mode (inspection), run the upward
operation or downward operation (Pr.00-15= 1) to start auto-tuning immediately. In the
10-16
process of auto-tuning, an “Auto tuning” warning continuously displays on the digital keypad
until it is finished.
 Pr.08-00=2: Motor auto-tuning is static test:
1. Make sure that all the drive parameters are set to defaults and the motor wiring is
correct.
2. Enter the correct values for Pr.01-01, Pr.01-02, Pr.08-01, Pr.08-02, Pr.08-03 and Pr.08-
04. Refer to motor capacity to set the acceleration/deceleration time.
3. Note that the motor will run! The shaft needs to be locked by an external force.
4. After auto-tuning is finished, check if Pr.08-05, Pr.08-07, and Pr.08-08 all have values.
 Pr.08-00=1: Auto-measures the angle between the magnetic pole and the PG origin. Pay
attention to the following notes when measuring: (dynamic test)
1. Unload before auto-tuning.
2. If the drive controls the brake, the drive can auto-tune according to the normal
sequence after you complete the wiring and set the brake control parameters.
3. If the host controller controls the brake, make sure that the brake is in release status
before auto-tuning.
 Pr.08-00=3: Auto-measures the angle between the magnetic pole and the PG origin. Pay
attention to the following notes when measuring: (static test)
1. The motor can be loaded or unloaded before auto-tuning.
2. See the reference table for auto-tuning for Pr.10-00 (PG Signal Type).
3. If the drive controls the brake, the drive can auto-tune according to the normal
sequence after you complete the wiring and set the brake control parameters.
4. If the host controller controls the brake, make sure that the brake is in release status
before auto-tuning.
5. Make sure the setting for Pr.10-02 is correct. Incorrectly setting Pr.10-02 causes
incorrect positioning of the magnetic pole and results in the wrong angle between the
magnetic pole and PG origin.
NOTE:
 The entered rated speed cannot be larger than or equal to 120 f/p.
 Note that if the contactor and brake are not controlled by the AC motor drive, release it
manually.
 Set Pr.08-00 to 1 (unloaded motor) for accurate calculation. If you need to execute this
function with a loaded motor, balance the carriage before execution.
 If you do not balance the carriage in a measured environment, you can execute this
function with a loaded motor by setting Pr.08-00= 3. It will have a difference of 15–30o
for different encoder types.
 “Auto Tuning Err” displays on the digital keypad when stopping due to an AC motor
drive fault or human error, which means the detection fails. Check the wiring
connections of the AC motor drive If “PG Fbk Error” displays on the digital keypad,
change the setting of Pr.10-02 (if set to 1, change it to 2). If “PG Fbk Loss” displays on
the digital keypad, check the feedback of Z-phase pulse.
10-17
10-3-4 Multi-step Speed Settings

Press
Press
 The multi-function input terminals (refer to Pr.02-01–Pr.02-08) select one of the AC motor
drive multi-step speeds (including the master frequency, in total 16 speeds). Pr.04-00–Pr.04-
15 determine the speeds (frequencies) as shown above.
 When Pr.00-14 = 1, the master frequency is Pr.01-00.
10-18
Press
Press
 The Acceleration Time determines the time required for the AC motor drive to ramp from 0.00
Hz to the Maximum Output Frequency (Pr.01-00). The Deceleration Time determines the
time required for the AC motor drive to decelerate from the Maximum Output Frequency
(Pr.01-00) down to 0.00 Hz.
 Select the Acceleration/Deceleration Time 1, 2, 3, 4 with the multi-function input terminal
settings. The defaults are Acceleration Time 1 and Deceleration Time 1.
 When there is a large opposing torque and inertial torque for the load, and the acceleration
and deceleration time settings are less than the necessary value, then they enable the torque
limit and stall prevention functions. When this happens, the actual acceleration and
deceleration time are longer than the settings.
10-19
Press
Press
 Using an S-curve gives the smoothest transition between speed changes. The acceleration
and deceleration curve adjusts the acceleration and deceleration S-curve. When enabled,
the motor drive produces a different acceleration and deceleration curve according to the
acceleration and deceleration time.
 The Actual Acceleration Time = selected acceleration Time + (Pr.01-24 + Pr.01-25) ÷ 2.
The Actual Deceleration Time = selected deceleration Time + (Pr.01-26 + Pr.01-27 + Pr.01-
30 x 2) ÷ 2.
 Use Pr.01-29 to set the switch frequency between S4 and S5 for smooth stopping.
 Set Pr.01-29 to the leveling speed of the elevator.
10-20
10-3-5 Elevator Related Parameters

Press
Press
 Elevator speed (m/sec. = m/min. / 60)
Press
Press
Pr.11-03 Gear Ratio
Press
Press
10-21
Press
Press
 Setting value:
0 = 1: 1
1 = 2: 1
2 = 4: 1
3 = 8: 1
Press
Press
 The maximum motor current measured when the elevator is tuning in automatic mode.
Press
Press
 You can calculate the load inertia according to the settings of motor parameters, Pr.11-01 to
Pr.11-04 and Pr.11-14 Motor Current at Acceleration and Pr.11-15 Carriage Acceleration. You
can use this parameter to adjust the mechanical inertia ratio.
10-22
 Mechanical inertia reference value (%):

Load / Motor IM PM
Without load 40 10
With load 80–120 40
10-3-6 Trial Run
Test method:
1. Position the elevator near the middle floors.
2. Enter the correct values for Pr.00-14 and Pr.00-15.
3. Use the upward / downward operation of the inspection mode to execute the trial run.
10-23
10-4 Elevator Performance Fine-tuning

Stage
Function Pr. Control Mode Description Settings Default
Slip Compensation
05-13 SVC 0.00–10.00 1.00
Gain
Slip Slip Compensation

Compen- 05-23 VF, SVC Gain % (Power 0.0–100.0% 0.0
sation Generation Mode)
Slip Compensation
05-24 VF, SVC Gain % (Electricity 0.0–100.0% 0.0
Mode)
All
Bit 0=1: ASR auto-tuning;

PDFF enabled
System (Pr.11-06–11-08, Pr.11-19)
11-00 FOCPG, FOCPM System Control 0000h
Control Bit 7=1: Zero speed
position control is enabled
(Pr.10-19, Pr.10-22–10-24)
Mechanical Inertial
Comfort 11-05 FOCPG, FOCPM 1–300% 40
Ratio
Magnetic
Contactor
VF, VFPG, SVC,
02-31 Contracting Delay 0.010–65.000 sec. 0.200
FOCPG, FOCPM
Time between
Delay Time
Drive and Motor
Starting
Brake Release
VF, VFPG, SVC,
02-29 Delay Time when 0.000–65.000 sec. 0.250
FOCPG, FOCPM
Elevator Starts
Start-up Fourth Output 230V models: 0.1–255.0 V 5.0

01-08 VF, VFPG, SVC
Adjustment Voltage Setting 460V models: 0.1–510.0 V 10.0
10-24
Stage
Zero Speed
Comfort 11-06 FOCPG, FOCPM 1–40 Hz 10
Bandwidth
External Terminal
VF, VFPG, SVC, 0–100%
02-33 Output Current 0
Torque FOCPG, FOCPM (motor drive rated current)
Level
Check
VF, VFPG, SVC, 0: Disable
02-37 Torque Check 0
FOCPG, FOCPM 1: Enable
DC Brake Current 0–100%
07-02 VF, VFPG, SVC 0
Level at Start-up (motor drive rated current)
VF, VFPG, SVC, DC Brake
07-03 0.0–60.0 sec. 0.7
FOCPG, FOCPM Activation Time
Zero Speed
10-19 FOCPM Position Control 0.00–655.00% 80.00
Gain (P)
Rollback Zero Speed
10-22 FOCPM Position Control 0.001–65.535 sec. 0.250
Holding Time
0: After the brake release
Zero Speed
set in Pr.02-29
Position Control
10-24 FOCPM 1: After the brake signal 0
Activation Mode
input (Pr.02-01–Pr.02-08 is
Selection
set to 42)
VF, VFPG, SVC,
01-12 Accel. Time 1 0.00–600.00 sec. 3.00
FOCPG, FOCPM
S-curve for
VF, VFPG, SVC,
Multi-step 01-24 Acceleration Begin 0.00–25.00 sec. 1.00
FOCPG, FOCPM
Speed Time S1
S-curve for
VF, VFPG, SVC,
01-25 Acceleration 0.00–25.00 sec. 1.00
Accelerating
FOCPG, FOCPM
Arrival Time S2
Second Output 230V models: 0.1–255.0 V 5.0
01-04 VF, VFPG
Voltage Setting 460V models: 0.1–510.0 V 10.0
Third Output 230V models: 0.1–255.0 V 5.0
01-06 VF, VFPG
Comfort
Low Speed
11-07 FOCPG, FOCPM 1–40 Hz 10
Bandwidth
High Speed
Bandwidth
High Speed
High Speed

Bandwidth
Comfort
11-09 FOCPG, FOCPM PDFF Gain Value 0–200% 30
10-25
Stage Function Pr. Control Mode Description Settings Default
VF, VFPG, SVC,

01-13 Decel. Time 1 0.00–600.00 sec. 2.00
FOCPG, FOCPM
S-curve for
VF, VFPG, SVC,
Multi-step 01-26 Deceleration 0.00–25.00 sec. 1.00
FOCPG, FOCPM
Speed Begin Time S3
S-curve for
VF, VFPG, SVC,
01-27 Deceleration 0.00–25.00 sec. 1.00
Decelerating
FOCPG, FOCPM
Arrival Time S4
Second Output 230V models: 0.1–255.0 V 5.0
01-04 VF, VFPG
Third Output 230V models: 0.1–255.0 V 5.0
01-06 VF, VFPG
Comfort
Low Speed
Bandwidth
High Speed
Bandwidth
Leveling
Low Speed
Comfort 11-07 FOCPG, FOCPM 1–40 Hz 10
Bandwidth
Brake Engage
VF, VFPG, SVC,
02-30 Delay Time when 0.000–65.000 sec. 0.250
FOCPG, FOCPM
Elevator Stops
Magnetic
Delay Time
Contactor Release
VF, VFPG, SVC,
02-32 Delay Time 0.010–65.000 sec. 0.200
FOCPG, FOCPM
between Drive and
Motor
Switch Frequency
VF, VFPG, SVC,
01-29 for S3/S4 0.00–299.00Hz 0.00
FOCPG, FOCPM
Changes to S5
S-curve for
VF, VFPG, SVC,
Stopping
Elevator 01-30 Deceleration 0.00–25.00 sec. 1.00

FOCPG, FOCPM
Parking Arrival Time S5
Deceleration Time
VF, VFPG, SVC, when Operating
01-31 0.00–600.00 sec. 2.00
FOCPG, FOCPM without RUN
Command
Time for
07-29 FOCPG, FOCPM Decreasing Torque 0.000–5.000 sec. 0.000
at Stop
Comfort
Zero Speed
Parking Bandwidth
External Terminal
Torque VF, VFPG, SVC, 0–100%
02-33 Output Current 0
Check FOCPG, FOCPM (motor drive rated current)
Level
10-26
Stage
VF, VFPG, SVC, 0: Disable

02-37 Torque Check 0
FOCPG, FOCPM 1: Enable
DC Brake Current 0–100%
07-30 VF, VFPG, SVC 0
Level at Stop (motor drive rated current)
DC Brake
VF, VFPG, SVC, DC Brake
07-04 0.0–60.0 sec. 0.7
FOCPG, FOCPM Stopping Time
10-27
10-28
Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter Settings | VFD-ED
Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter Settings
00 Drive Parameters
01 Basic Parameters
02 Digital Input / Output Parameters
03 Analog Input / Output Parameters
04 Multi-step Speed Parameters
05 IM Parameters
06 Protection Parameters
07 Special Parameters
08 PM Parameters
09 Communication Parameters
10 Feedback Control Parameters
11 Advanced Parameters
12 User-defined Parameters
13 View User-defined Parameters
11-1
This chapter provides a summary of parameter settings including the ranges and defaults that help
you set the parameters. You can set, change, and reset the parameters using the digital keypad.
NOTE:
1. : Indicates a parameter that you can set during operation.
2. For details on parameters, refer to Chapter 12 Descriptions of Parameter Settings.
3. ◆ indicates that the parameters or the setting values only apply on the Direct Docking Mode. The
actual functions of each elevator controller vary from one to another. For more information, please
contact Delta.
4. The parameters described in this user manual are designed for multi-step speed mode. The defaults
for direct docking mode are different from the defaults described in this user manual. If you need to
use the direct docking mode, contact Delta for more information.
5. The following are abbreviations of different types of motors:
 IM: Induction motor
 PM: Permanent magnet synchronous AC motor
00 Drive Parameters
FOCPM
FOCPG
VFPG
Pr. Parameter Name Setting Range Default
SVC
VF
108: 220 V, 2.2 kW, 3 HP (single-phase)
110: 220 V, 3.7 kW, 5 HP (single-phase)
10: 230V, 4.0 kW, 5 HP
11: 460V, 4.0 kW, 5 HP
12: 230V, 5.5 kW, 7.5 HP
13: 460V, 5.5 kW, 7.5 HP
14: 230V, 7.5 kW, 10 HP
15: 460V, 7.5 kW, 10 HP
16: 230V, 11 kW, 15 HP
17: 460V, 11 kW, 15 HP
18: 230V, 15 kW, 20 HP
AC Motor Drive Read
00-00 19: 460V, 15 kW, 20 HP ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Identity Code Only
20: 230V, 18.5 kW, 25 HP
21: 460V, 18.5 kW, 25 HP
22: 230V, 22 kW, 30 HP
23: 460V, 22 kW, 30 HP
24: 230V, 30 kW, 40 HP
25: 460V, 30 kW, 40 HP
26: 230V, 37 kW, 50 HP
27: 460V, 37 kW, 50 HP
29: 460V, 45 kW, 60 HP
31: 460V, 55 kW, 75 HP
33: 460V, 75 kW, 100 HP
AC Motor Drive
Read
00-01 Rated Current Display by model ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
only
Display
00-02 Parameter Reset 0: No function 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
11-2
FOCPM
FOCPG
VFPG
SVC
VF
1: Read only
5: Direct docking mode only ◆
8: Keypad locked
9: Reset all parameters to defaults (base
frequency is 50 Hz)
10: Reset all parameters to defaults (base
frequency is 60 Hz)
0: Frequency command value
1: The actual output frequency
2: DC bus voltage
 00-03 Start-up Display 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
3: Output current
4: Output voltage
5: User-defined (Pr.00-04)
 0: Display the output current supplied to the 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
motor from the drive (A) (Unit: Amp)
1: Reserved
2: Display the drive’s actual output frequency
(H) (Unit: Hz)
3: Display the drive’s DC bus voltage (v) (Unit:
VDC)
4: Display the terminals U, V, and W output
voltage of the drive (E) (Unit: VAC)
power factor angle to the motor (n) (Unit:
deg)
power to the motor (P) (Unit: kW)
7: Display the actual motor speed in rpm (r)
(Unit: rpm)
Content of Multi-
00-04 8: Display the drive’s estimated output torque
function Display
in %; the motor’s rated torque is 100% (t)
(Unit: %)
9: Display the PG feedback (G) (See Pr.10-00
and Pr.10-01)
10: Display the electrical angle of drive output
(d) (Unit: deg)
11: Display the AUI1 analog input terminal
signal (1.) (Unit: %)
12: Reserved
13: Display the AUI2 analog input terminal
signal (Unit: %)
14: Display the drive’s heat sink temperature
(t) (Unit: °C)
15: Display the IGBT temperature (T) (Unit: °C)
16: Display digital input status ON/OFF (i)
17: Display digital output status ON/OFF (o)
11-3
FOCPM
FOCPG
VFPG
SVC
VF
18: Display the step speed of multi-step speed
that is executing (S)
19: The corresponding CPU digital input pin
status (i.)
20: The corresponding CPU digital output pin
status (o.)
21–23: Reserved
24: Output AC voltage when malfunction
occurred (E) (Unit: VAC)
25: Output DC voltage when malfunction
occurred (v) (Unit: VDC)
26: Motor frequency when malfunction
occurred (H) (Unit: Hz)
27: Output current when malfunction occurred
(A) (Unit: Amp)
28: Output frequency when malfunction
occurred (F) (Unit: Hz)
29: Frequency command when malfunction
occurred (F) (Unit: Hz)
30: Output power when malfunction occurred
(P) (Unit: kW)
31: Output torque when malfunction occurred
(t) (Unit: %)
32: Input terminal status when malfunction
occurred (i)
33: Output terminal status when malfunction
occurred (o)
34: Drive status when malfunction occurred (s)
35: Display MI and MO status on digital keypad
36: CAN communication interference index (c)
(Unit: %)
37: Multi-function display selection (q) (Unit: %)
40: Elevator actual speed (Unit: m/s)
User-Defined Digit 4: number of decimal points (0–3)
 00-05 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Coefficient K Digit 3–0: 40–9999
00-06 Software Version READ ONLY ##.## ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
1–9998, 10000–65535
 00-07 Password Input 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
0–2: number of wrong password attempts
1–9998, 10000–65535
0: No password set or successful input in
 00-08 Password Set 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Pr.00-07
1: Password has been set
0: V/F control (V/F)
1: V/F control + Encoder (VFPG)
00-09 Control Method 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
2: Sensorless Vector Control (SVC)
3: FOC vector control + Encoder (FOCPG)
11-4
FOCPM
FOCPG
VFPG
SVC
VF
8: FOC Permanent Motor control (FOCPM)
0: Hz
1: m/s
 00-10 Speed Unit 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
2: ft/s
Output Direction 0: FWD: counterclockwise, REV: clockwise
00-11 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Selection 1: FWD: clockwise, REV: counterclockwise
 00-12 Carrier Frequency 2–15 kHz 12 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Automatic Voltage 0: Enable AVR
 00-13 Regulation (AVR) 1: Disable AVR 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Function 2: Disable AVR when deceleration stop
1: RS-485 serial communication or digital
keypad (KPC-CC01)
Master Frequency
 00-14 2: External analog input (Pr.03-00) 1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Command Source
3: Digital terminal inputs (Pr.04-00–Pr.04-15)
1: External terminals
Operation
 00-15 2: RS-485 serial communication or digital 1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Command Source
keypad (KPC-CC01)
11-5
01 Basic Parameters
FOCPM
FOCPG
VFPG
SVC
VF
Maximum Output 60.00/
01-00 5.00–299.00 Hz ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Frequency 50.00
First Output Frequency
60.00/
01-01 Setting (base frequency / 0.00–299.00 Hz ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
50.00
motor’s rated frequency)
First Output Voltage Setting
230V models: 0.1–255.0 V 220.0
01-02 (base voltage/ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
460V models: 0.1–510.0 V 440.0
motor’s rated voltage)
Second Output Frequency
01-03 0.00–299.00 Hz 0.50 ○ ○
Setting
Second Output Voltage 230V models: 0.1–255.0 V 5.0
 01-04 ○ ○
Setting 460V models: 0.1–510.0 V 10.0
Third Output Frequency
01-05 0.00–299.00 Hz 0.50 ○ ○
Setting
Third Output Voltage 230V models: 0.1–255.0 V 5.0
 01-06 ○ ○
Fourth Output Frequency
01-07 0.00–299.00 Hz 0.00 ○ ○ ○ ○
Setting
Fourth Output Voltage 230V models: 0.1–255.0 V 5.0
 01-08 ○ ○ ○
01-09 Starting Frequency 0.00–299.00 Hz 0.50 ○ ○ ○ ○
Output Frequency Upper
 01-10 0.00–299.00 Hz 299.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Limit
Output Frequency Lower
 01-11 0.00–299.00 Hz 0.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Limit
 01-12 Accel. Time 1 0.00–600.00 sec. 3.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
 01-13 Decel. Time 1 0.00–600.00 sec. 2.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
 01-14 Accel. Time 2 0.00–600.00 sec. 3.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
 01-15 Decel. Time 2 0.00–600.00 sec. 2.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
 01-16 Accel. Time 3 0.00–600.00 sec. 3.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
 01-17 Decel. Time 3 0.00–600.00 sec. 2.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
 01-18 Accel. Time 4 0.00–600.00 sec. 3.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
 01-19 Decel. Time 4 0.00–600.00 sec. 2.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
 01-20 JOG Acceleration Time 0.00–600.00 sec. 1.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
 01-21 JOG Deceleration Time 0.00–600.00 sec. 1.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
 01-22 JOG Frequency 0.00–299.00 Hz 6.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Switch Frequency between
 01-23 First and Fourth Accel./ 0.00–299.00 Hz 0.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Decel.
S-curve for Acceleration
 01-24 0.00–25.00 sec. 1.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Begin Time S1
S-curve for Acceleration
 01-25 0.00–25.00 sec. 1.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Arrival Time S2
 01-26 S-curve for Deceleration 0.00–25.00 sec. 1.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
11-6
FOCPM
FOCPG
VFPG
SVC
VF
Begin Time S3
S-curve for Deceleration
 01-27 0.00–25.00 sec. 1.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Arrival Time S4
0: Output waiting
Mode Selection when 1: Zero-speed operation
01-28 1 ○ ○ ○
Frequency < Fmin 2: Fmin (fourth output
frequency setting)
Switch Frequency for
 01-29 0.00–299.00 Hz 0.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
S3/S4 Changes to S5
S-curve for Deceleration
 01-30 0.00–25.00 sec. 1.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Arrival Time S5
Deceleration Time when
 01-31 Operating without RUN 0.00–600.00 sec. 2.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Command
01-32 Direct docking mode only ◆
High Speed Time for Short
01-33 0.00–60.00 sec. 3.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Floor
Leveling Time for Short
01-34 0.00–60.00 sec. 3.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Floor
Limit for Direct Docking
01-35 0.00–10.00 2.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Terminal
Deceleration Distance for
01-36 0.00–100.00 cm 30.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Direct Docking Terminal
Deceleration Distance
01-37 0.00–655.35 m Read only ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Reference for Short Floor
0000h: Disabled
0001h: Short floor enabled
Short Floor/Direct Docking 0002h: Direct docking terminal
01-38 0000h ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Terminal Enabled enabled
0003h: Short floor + direct
docking terminal enabled
Automatic Emergency
01-39 5.00–299.00 Hz 60.00 ○ ○ ○
Deceleration Level
Deceleration Time for
 01-40 0.00–600.00 sec. 2.00 ○ ○ ○
Emergency Deceleration
11-7
FOCPM
FOCPG
VFPG
SVC
VF
0: FWD/STOP, REV/STOP
1: FWD/STOP, REV/STOP
(Line Start Lockout)
Two-wire/three-wire 2: RUN/STOP, REV/FWD
02-00 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Operation Control 3: RUN/STOP, REV/FWD
(Line Start Lockout)
4: Three-wire
5: Three-wire (Line Start Lockout)
Multi-Function Input
02-01 0: no function ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Command 1 (MI1)
1
(The Stop terminal for
1: multi-step speed command 1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
three-wire operation)
02-02 2: multi-step speed command 2 2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Command 2 (MI2)
Command 3 (MI3)
Command 4 (MI4)
02-05 5: Reset 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Command 5 (MI5)
02-06 6: JOG command 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Command 6 (MI6)
Multi-Function Input 7: Acceleration/ deceleration speed
02-07 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Command 7 (MI7) inhibit
8: First, second
○ ○ ○ ○ ○
acceleration/deceleration time
9: Third, fourth acceleration/deceleration
○ ○ ○ ○ ○
time
10: EF input (Pr.07-28) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
11: Reserved
12: Stop output ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
13–14: Reserved
15: AUI1 operation speed command ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
16: Reserved
02-08 Command 8 (MI8) 40
(Enable Drive terminal)
18: Emergency Stop (Pr.07-28) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
19–23: Reserved
24: FWD JOG command ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
25: REV JOG command ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
26: Reserved
27: ASR1/ASR2 selection ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
28: Emergency stop (EF1) (Motor
○ ○ ○ ○ ○
coasts to stop)
29–30: Reserved
11-8
FOCPM
FOCPG
VFPG
SVC
VF
31: High torque bias (according to
○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Pr.07-21)
32: Middle torque bias (according to
○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Pr.07-22)
33: Low torque bias (according to Pr.07-
○ ○ ○ ○ ○
23)
34–37: Reserved
38: Disable writing to EEPROM function ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
39: Torque command direction (0 is
positive direction)
40: Enable drive function ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
41: Magnetic contactor detection ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
42: Mechanical brake 1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
43: EPS function (Emergency Power
○ ○ ○ ○ ○
System)
45–51: Direct docking mode only ◆
53: Terminal leveling signal for direct
○ ○ ○
docking
54: Power failure signal ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
55: Manual emergency deceleration ○ ○ ○
56: Automatic emergency deceleration ○ ○ ○
57: Brake torque test action signal ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
59: AFE fault ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Digital Input Response
 02-09 0.001–30.000 sec. 0.005 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Time
Digital Input Operation
 02-10 0–65535 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Direction
Multi-function Output 1: 0: No function 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
 02-11
RA, RB, RC (Relay1) 1: Operation indication ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Multi-function Output 2: 2: Operation speed reached 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
 02-12 MRA, MRB, MRC 3: Desired frequency reached 1 (Pr.02-
○ ○ ○ ○ ○
(Relay2) 25, Pr.02-26)
Multi-function Output 3: 4: Desired frequency reached 2 (Pr.02-
 02-13 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
R1A, R12C (Relay3) 27, Pr.02-28)
Multi-function Output 4:
 02-14 5: Zero speed (Frequency command) 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
R2A, R12C (Relay4)
Multi-function Output 5: 6: Zero speed with stop (Frequency
 02-15 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
(MO1) command)
 02-16 7: Over-torque (OT1) (Pr.06-05–06-07) 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
(MO2)
 02-17 8: Over-torque (OT2) (Pr.06-08–06-10) 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
(MO3)
 02-18 9: Drive ready 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
(MO4)
11-9
FOCPM
FOCPG
VFPG
SVC
VF
Multi-function Output 9: 10: User-defined low-voltage detection
 02-19 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
(MO5) (LV)
Multi-function Output
 02-20 11: Malfunction indication 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
10: (MO6)
12: Mechanical brake release (Pr.02-29,
0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Pr.02-30, Pr.02-37)
13: Overheat (Pr.06-14) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
14: Brake transistor signal ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
15: Motor-controlled magnetic contactor
○ ○ ○ ○ ○
output
16: Slip error (oSL) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
17: Malfunction indication 1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
18: Reserved
19: Brake transistor output error ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
20: Warning output ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
21: Over-voltage warning ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
22: Over-current stall prevention
○ ○ ○
warning
23: Over-voltage stall prevention
○ ○ ○ ○ ○
warning
24: Operation mode indication (Pr.00-
○ ○ ○ ○ ○
15=1)
25: Forward command ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
26: Reverse command ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
27: Output when current ≥ Pr.02-33 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
0
28: Output when current < Pr.02-33 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
29: Output when frequency ≥ Pr.02-34 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
30: Output when frequency < Pr.02-34 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
31: Power generation direction and
○ ○ ○ ○ ○
status verification
32: Power generation direction ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
33: Zero speed (actual output
○ ○ ○ ○ ○
frequency)
34: Zero speed with Stop (actual output
○ ○ ○ ○ ○
frequency)
35: Fault output option 1 (Pr.06-22) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
39: Reserved
40: Speed reached (including zero
○ ○ ○ ○ ○
speed)
41: Reserved
42: STO output error ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
43–44: Direct docking mode only ◆
11-10
FOCPM
FOCPG
VFPG
SVC
VF
45: Reserved
46: Retrying after a fault has occurred
○ ○ ○ ○ ○
indication
48: Control output of MPSCC (Motor
○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Phase Short Circuit Contactor)
49: Emergency power mode action ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
50: Speed reached Pr.02-34 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
51: Brake torque test finished ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
52: AFE reset ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
02-21–02-22 Reserved
 02-23 Multi-output Direction 0–65535 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
0: According to FWD/REV signal
Serial Start Signal
02-24 1: According to Enable drive function 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Selection
signal
Desired Frequency 60.00/
 02-25 0.00–299.00 Hz ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Reached 1 50.00
Desired Frequency
 02-26 0.00–299.00 Hz 2.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Reached Width 1
Desired Frequency 60.00/
 02-27 0.00–299.00 Hz ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Reached 2 50.00
Desired Frequency
 02-28 0.00–299.00 Hz 2.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Reached Width 2
Brake Release Delay
02-29 Time when Elevator 0.000–65.000 sec. 0.250 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Starts
Brake Engage Delay
02-30 Time when Elevator 0.000–65.000 sec. 0.250 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Stops
Magnetic Contactor
Contracting Delay Time
 02-31 0.010–65.000 sec. 0.200 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
between Drive and
Motor
Magnetic Contactor
Release Delay Time
 02-32 0.010–65.000 sec. 0.200 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
between Drive and
Motor
External Terminal
 02-33 0–100% (motor drive rated current) 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Output Current Level
0.00–299.00 Hz (this is motor speed
when using with PG)
External Terminal
 02-34 NOTE: The setting range and unit of 0.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Output Speed Limit
Pr.02-34 varies with Pr.00-10 settings.
See Chapter 12 for details.
Mechanical Brake
 02-35 0.00–10.00 sec. 0.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Detection Time
11-11
FOCPM
FOCPG
VFPG
SVC
VF
Magnetic Contactor
 02-36 0.00–10.00 sec. 0.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Detection Time
0: Disable
02-37 Torque Check 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
1: Enable
MPSCC (Motor Phase
Short Circuit Contactor)
 02-38 Release Delay Time 0.010~65.000 sec. 0.200 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
between Drive and
Motor
MPSCC (Motor Phase
Short Circuit Contactor)
 02-39 Contracting Delay Time 0.010~65.000 sec. 0.200 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
between Drive and
Motor
02-40
– Direct docking mode only  - ○ ○ ○
02-42
Speed Reached
 02-43 0.00–299.00 Hz 2.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Bandwidth
11-12
FOCPM
FOCPG
VFPG
SVC
VF
 03-00 Analog Input 1 (AUI1) 0: No function 1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
1: Frequency command (speed limit under
03-01 Reserved
torque control mode)
2: Torque command (torque limit under
speed mode)
3: Load compensation ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
4–5: Reserved
 03-02 Analog Input 2 (AUI2) 6: P.T.C. thermistor input value 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
7: Positive torque limit ○ ○
8: Negative torque limit ○ ○
9: Regenerative torque limit ○ ○
10: Positive/negative torque limit ○ ○
Analog Input Bias 1
 03-03 -100.0–100.0% 0.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
(AUI1)
03-04 Reserved
Analog Input Bias 1
 03-05 -100.0–100.0% 0.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
(AUI2)
AUI1
0: Zero bias
 03-06 Positive/negative Bias 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
1: Lower than or equal to bias
Mode
2: Higher than or equal to bias
03-07 Reserved
3: Using bias as the base to get the
AUI2
absolute value of bias voltage (unipolar)
 03-08 Positive/negative Bias 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
4: Using bias as the base (unipolar)
Mode
Analog Input Gain 1
 03-09 0.0–500.0% 100.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
(AUI1)
03-10 Reserved
Analog Input Gain 1
 03-11 0.0–500.0% 100.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
(AUI2)
Analog Input Filter
 03-12 0.00–2.00 sec. 0.01 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Time (AUI1)
03-13 Reserved
Analog Input Filter
 03-14 0.00–2.00 sec. 0.01 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Time (AUI2)
0: No function
Load Compensation
03-15 1: Auto-tunes with running without load 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Auto-tuning
2: Auto-tunes with running with load
03-15 Reserved
03-16 Reserved
0: Output frequency (Hz) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
1: Frequency command (Hz) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Analog Output
 03-17 2: Motor speed (RPM) 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Selection 1
3: Output current (rms) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
4: Output voltage ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
11-13
FOCPM
FOCPG
VFPG
SVC
VF
5: DC bus voltage ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
6: Power factor angle ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
7: Power factor ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
8: Output torque ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
9: AUI1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
10: Reserved
11: AUI2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
12: q-axis current ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
13: q-axis feedback value ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
14: d-axis current ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
15: d-axis feedback value ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
16: q-axis voltage ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
17: d-axis voltage ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
18: Torque command ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
19–20: Reserved
21: Power Output ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
 03-18 Analog Output Gain 1 0–200.0% 100.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
0: Absolute value in output voltage
Analog Output Value
 03-19 1: Output 0 V in REV direction 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
in REV Direction 1
2: Enable output voltage in REV direction
0: Output frequency (Hz) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
1: Frequency command (Hz) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
2: Motor speed (RPM) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
3: Output current (rms) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
4: Output voltage ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
5: DC bus voltage ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
6: Power factor angle ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
7: Power factor ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
8: Output torque ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
9: AUI1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Analog Output
 03-20 10: Reserved 0
Selection 2
11: AUI2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
12: q-axis current ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
13: q-axis feedback value ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
14: d-axis current ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
15: d-axis feedback value ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
16: q-axis voltage ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
17: d-axis voltage ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
18: Torque command ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
19–20: Reserved
21: Power Output ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
 03-21 Analog Output Gain 2 0–200.0% 100.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
0: Absolute value in output voltage
Analog Output Value
 03-22 1: Output 0 V in REV direction 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
in REV Direction 2
11-14
FOCPM
FOCPG
VFPG
SVC
VF
Analog Input Type 0: Bipolar (±10 V)
03-23 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
(AUI1) 1: Unipolar (0–10 V)
Analog Input Type 0: Bipolar (±10 V)
03-24 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
(AUI2) 1: Unipolar (0–10 V)
11-15
FOCPM
FOCPG
VFPG
SVC
VF
 04-00 Zero Step Speed Frequency 0.00–299.00 Hz 0.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
 04-01 1st Step Speed Frequency 0.00–299.00 Hz 0.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
 04-02 2nd Step Speed Frequency 0.00–299.00 Hz 0.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
 04-03 3rd Step Speed Frequency 0.00–299.00 Hz 0.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
 04-04 4th Step Speed Frequency 0.00–299.00 Hz 0.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
04-16
– Direct docking mode only 
04-99
11-16
05 IM Parameters
FOCPM
FOCPG
VFPG
SVC
VF
0: No function
1: Dynamic test (Rs, Rr, Lm, Lx,
05-00 Motor Auto-tuning no-load current) (Motor runs) 0 ○
2: Static test (Motor does not
run)
05-01 Motor Rated Current (40–120%) * Pr.00-01 Amps #.## ○ ○ ○ ○
05-02 Motor Rated Power 0.00–655.35 kW #.## ○ ○
05-03 Motor Rated Speed (rpm) 0–65535 1710 ○ ○ ○
05-04 Number of Motor Poles 2–48 4 ○ ○ ○ ○
05-05 Motor No-load Current 0–Pr.05-01 <default> #.## ○ ○ ○
05-06 Motor Rs 0.000–65.535 Ω 0.000 ○ ○
05-07 Motor Rr 0.000–65.535 Ω 0.000 ○ ○
05-08 Motor Lm 0.0–6553.5 mH 0.0 ○ ○
05-09 Motor Lx 0.0–6553.5 mH 0.0 ○ ○
Torque Compensation
 05-10 0.001–10.000 sec. 0.020 ○
Low Pass Filter Time
Slip Compensation Low
 05-11 0.001–10.000 sec. 0.100 ○
Pass Filter Time
Torque Compensation
 05-12 0–10 0 ○ ○
Gain
 05-13 Slip Compensation Gain 0.00–10.00 1.00 ○
 05-14 Slip Deviation Level 0–1000% (0: disable) 0 ○ ○ ○
Slip Deviation Detection
 05-15 0.0–10.0 sec. 1.0 ○ ○ ○
Time
0: Warn and keep operation
 05-16 Over-slip Action 1: Fault and ramp to stop 0 ○ ○ ○
2: Fault and coast to stop
 05-17 Hunting Gain 0–10000 (0: disable) 2000 ○ ○ ○
Accumulated Motor
05-18 0–1439 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Operation Time (Min.)
Accumulated Motor
05-19 0–65535 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Operation Time (day)
 05-20 Core Loss Compensation 0–250% 10 ○
Accumulated Motor
05-21 0–1439 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Power-on Time (Min.)
Accumulated Motor
05-22 0–65535 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Power-on Time (day)
Slip Compensation Gain
 05-23 % (Power Generation 0.0–100.0% 0.0 ○ ○
Mode)
Slip Compensation Gain
 05-24 0.0–100.0% 0.0 ○ ○
% (Electricity Mode)
11-17
FOCPM
FOCPG
VFPG
SVC
VF
230V models: 160.0–220.0 V 180.0
 06-00 Low Voltage Level ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
460V models: 320.0–440.0 V 360.0
Input Phase-loss 0: Warn and keep operation
 06-01 Protection during 1: Fault and ramp to stop 2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Operation 2: Fault and coast to stop
Over-current Stall 0: Disable
 06-02 Prevention during 0–250% (rated current of the motor 0 ○ ○ ○
Acceleration drive)
Over-current Stall 0: Disable
 06-03 Prevention during 0–250% (rated current of the motor 0 ○ ○ ○
Operation drive)
0: Use the current
1: Use the first acceleration/deceleration
time
2: Use the second
Acceleration/Deceleration
 06-04 Time for Stall Prevention 0 ○ ○ ○
3: Use the third acceleration/deceleration
at Constant Speed
time
4: Use the fourth
5: Use the auto-acceleration/
auto-deceleration time
0: Disable
1: Over-torque detection during constant
speed operation, continue to operate
after detection
speed operation, stop operating after
Over-torque Detection
 06-05 detection 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
(OT1)
3: Over-torque detection during
operation, continue to operate after
detection
operation, stop operating after
detection
Over-torque Detection 10–250% (rated current of the motor
 06-06 150 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Level (OT1) drive)
 06-07 0.1–60.0 sec. 0.1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Time (OT1)
0: Disable
Over-torque Detection 1: Over-torque detection during constant
 06-08 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
(OT2) speed operation, continue to operate
after detection
11-18
FOCPM
FOCPG
VFPG
SVC
VF
speed operation, stop operating after
detection
operation, continue to operate after
detection
operation, stop operating after
detection
Over-torque Detection 10–250% (rated current of the motor
 06-09 150 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Level (OT2) drive)
 06-10 0.1–60.0 sec. 0.1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Time (OT2)
0–250% (rated current of the motor
 06-11 Current Limit 200 ○ ○
drive)
0: Standard motor
06-12 Electronic Thermal Relay 1: Inverter motor 2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
2: Disabled
Electronic Thermal
 06-13 30.0–600.0 sec. 60.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Characteristic
IGBT Overheat Warning
 06-14 0.0–110.0°C 90.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
(oH1)
Stall Prevention Limit
 06-15 0–100% (refer to Pr.06-02, Pr.06-03) 50 ○ ○ ○
Level
06-16 Present Fault Record 0: No fault 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Second Most Recent
06-17 1: Over-current during acceleration (ocA) 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Fault Record
Third Most Recent Fault
06-18 2: Over-current during deceleration (ocd) 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Record
Fourth Most Recent Fault 3: Over-current during constant speed
06-19 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Record (ocn)
Fifth Most Recent Fault
06-20 4: Ground fault (GFF) 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Record
5: IGBT short-circuit (occ)
6: Over-current at stop (ocS)
7: Over-voltage during acceleration (ovA)
8: Over-voltage during deceleration (ovd)
9: Over-voltage during constant speed
(ovn)
Sixth Most Recent Fault
06-21 10: Over-voltage at stop (ovS) 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Record
11: Low voltage during acceleration
(LvA)
12: Low voltage during deceleration
(Lvd)
13: Low voltage during constant speed
(Lvn)
11-19
FOCPM
FOCPG
VFPG
SVC
VF
14: Low voltage at stop (LvS)
15: Input phase loss (PHL)
16: IGBT overheat (oH1)
17: Bulk capacitors overheat (oH2)
18: Abnormal IGBT temperature detected
(tH1o)
19: Abnormal bulk capacitor temperature
detected (tH2o)
20: Unusual cooling fan operation (FAn)
21: Overload (oL) (150%; 1 minute,
motor drive overloaded)
22: Motor overloaded (EoL1)
23: Reserved
24: Motor PTC overheat (oH3)
25: Reserved
26: Over-torque 1 (ot1)
28: Reserved
29: Reserved
30: Memory writing error (cF1)
31: Memory reading error (cF2)
32: Isum current detection error (cd0)
33: U-phase current detection error (cd1)
34: V-phase current detection error (cd2)
35: W-phase current detection error
(cd3)
36: CC current clamp hardware error
(Hd0)
37: OC (over-current) hardware error
(Hd1)
38: ov (over-voltage hardware error
(Hd2)
39: GFF (ground fault) hardware error
(Hd3)
40: Auto-tuning error on motor’s
parameter (AUE)
41: Reserved
42: PG feedback error (PGF1)
43: PG feedback loss (PGF2)
44: PG feedback stall (PGF3)
45: PG slip error (PGF4)
46: Reserved
47: Reserved
48: Reserved
49: External fault input (EF)
50: Emergency stop from external
11-20
FOCPM
FOCPG
VFPG
SVC
VF
terminals (EF1)
51: Reserved
52: Password error after three attempts
(Pcod)
53: Reserved
54: Illegal communication command
(cE01)
55: Illegal communication address
(cE02)
56: Communication data length error
(cE03)
57: Communication attempts to write to a
read-only address (cE04)
58: Modbus transmission time-out (cE10)
59: Keypad transmission time-out (cP10)
60: Brake transistor error (BF)
61–63: Reserved
64: Mechanical brake feedback error
(MBF)
65: PG hardware error (PG5)
66: Magnetic contactor error (MCF)
67: Output phase loss (MPHL)
68: CAN BUS disconnected (CANF)
69–71: Reserved
72: Safe torque loss (STL1)
73: PG cd hardware error (PGcd)
74: PG absolute signal error (PGHL)
75: PG Z phase signal loss (PGAF)
76: Safe torque output stops (STO)
77: Safe torque loss 2 (STL2)
82: U-phase output phase loss (OPHL)
83: V-phase output phase loss (OPHL)
84: W-phase output phase loss (OPHL)
86: Leveling switch short-circuited (LSS)
87: Leveling switch open-circuited (LSo)
94: BTTx Fail (btt)
95: BTTx Error (bttE)
0–65535 (refer to bit table for fault code
 06-22 Fault Output Option 1 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
in Chapter 12)
in Chapter 12)
in Chapter 12)
in Chapter 12)
11-21
FOCPM
FOCPG
VFPG
SVC
VF
PTC (Positive
 06-26 Temperature Coefficient) 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
1: Fault and ramp to stop
Detection Action
 06-27 PTC Level 0.0–100.0% 50.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
PTC Detection Filter
 06-28 0.00–10.00 sec. 0.20 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Time
Voltage of Emergency 24.0–375.0 VDC 24.0
06-29 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Power 48.0–750.0 VDC 48.0
0: According to Pr.06-22–Pr.06-25 (four
Fault Output Setting sets)
 06-30 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Method 1: According to the binary setting (fifteen
sets)
Phase Loss Detection of
0: Disable
06-31 Drive Output at 1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
1: Enable
Start-up (MPHL)
Accumulated Drive
Read
06-32 Power-on Time at the 0–65535 ○ ○ ○ ○
only
First Fault (min.)
Accumulated Drive
Read
only
First Fault (day)
Accumulated Drive
Read
only
Second Fault (min.)
Accumulated Drive
Read
only
Second Fault (day)
Accumulated Drive
Read
only
Third Fault (min.)
Accumulated Drive
Read
only
Third Fault (day)
Accumulated Drive
Read
only
Fourth Fault (min.)
Accumulated Drive
Read
only
Fourth Fault (day)
Accumulated Drive
Read
only
Fifth Fault (min.)
Accumulated Drive
Read
only
Fifth Fault (day)
06-42 Accumulated Drive 0–65535 Read ○ ○ ○ ○
11-22
FOCPM
FOCPG
VFPG
SVC
VF
Power-on Time at the only
Sixth Fault (min.)
Accumulated Drive
Read
only
Sixth Fault (day)
(EPS) Emergency Power Read
06-44 0.00–299.00 Hz ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Mode Operation Speed only
Bit0 = 0: Display Lv fault and coast to
stop
Bit0 = 1: Display Lv warn and coast to
stop
Bit1 = 0: Fan lock, fault and coast to stop
Fault and Warning
 06-45 Bit1 = 1: Fan lock, warn and continue 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Actions
operation
Bit2 = 0: software GFF protection
enabled
Bit2 = 1: software GFF protection
disabled
0: Run according to the current
command
1: Run according to the operation
direction of power generation mode,
and execute the power generation
direction detection when in power
generation mode.
2: After determining the power
generation direction, the host
controller sends a running direction
command. (When at STOP, the
direction of power generation mode
(MO = 32) confirms and the direction
(EPS) Emergency Power of power generation mode does not
 06-46 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
ON Operation Direction remain.) Execute the power generation
direction detection every time.
3. After determining the power
generation direction, the host
controller sends a running direction
command. (When at STOP, the
direction of power generation mode
(MO =32) confirms and the direction of
power generation mode remains.)
Execute the power generation
direction detection one time.
4. Run according to the operation
direction of power generation mode,
and execute the power generation
11-23
FOCPM
FOCPG
VFPG
SVC
VF
direction detection when in normal
mode.
Power Generation
 06-47 0.0–5.0 sec. 1.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Direction Search Time
Power Capacity of
06-48 0.0–100.0 kVA 0.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Emergency Power (EPS)
0000h: STO fault latched, resending
RUN command is required
0001h: STO warning latched, resending
 06-49 STO Latch Selection 0000h ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
RUN command is required
0002h: STO fault latched
0003h: STO warning unlatched
MO’s Action when 0: Output
 06-50 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Retrying after Fault 1: No output
Number of Times to Retry
 06-51 0–10 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
after Fault
Time Interval between
 06-52 0.5–600.0 sec. 10.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Retries
Frequency Command
Read
06-53 when the Most Recent 0.00–655.35 Hz ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
only
Fault Occurred
Output Frequency when
Read
06-54 the Most Recent Fault 0.00–655.35 Hz ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
only
Occurred
Output Current when the
Read
06-55 Most Recent Fault 0.00–655.35 Amps ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
only
Occurred
Motor Frequency when
Read
06-56 the Most Recent Fault 0.00–655.35 Hz ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
only
Occurred
Output Voltage when the
Read
06-57 Most Recent Fault 0.0–6553.5 V ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
only
Occurred
DC Bus Voltage when
Read
06-58 the Most Recent Fault 0.0–6553.5 V ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
only
Occurred
Output Power when the
Read
06-59 Most Recent Fault 0.0–6553.5 kW ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
only
Occurred
Output Torque when the
Read
06-60 Most Recent Fault 0.00–655.35% ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
only
Occurred
IGBT Temperature when
Read
06-61 the Most Recent Fault -3276.8–3276.7ºC ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
only
Occurred
06-62 Multi-input Terminals 0000h–FFFFh Read ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
11-24
FOCPM
FOCPG
VFPG
SVC
VF
Status when the Most only
Recent Fault Occurred
Multi-output Terminals
Read
06-63 status when the Most 0000h–FFFFh ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
only
Recent Fault Occurred
Motor Drive Status when
Read
06-64 the Most Recent Fault 0000h–FFFFh ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
only
Occurred
Power Factor Angle Level
 06-68 for Power Generation 0.0–150.0〫 70.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Direction
Reference Level for
Read
06-69 Power Factor Angle -200.0–200.0〫 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
only
during Operation
Power Generation 0: FWD Read
06-70 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Direction 1: REV only
 06-71 UPS Output Delay Time 0.0–10.0 sec. 1.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
UPS Stops Output Delay
06-72 0.0–60.0 sec. 3.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Time
Permanent Operation Read
06-73 0–60000 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Direction Count (H) only
Permanent Operation Read
06-74 0–9999 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Direction Count (L) only
Single Operation Read
06-75 0–20 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Direction Count (H) only
Single Operation Read
06-76 0–9999 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Direction Count (L) only
Number of Times for Read
06-77 0–100 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Single Operation Reset only
Number of Times for
06-78 0.00–200.00 k 2.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Operation Direction
Function Selection for
06-79 0–2 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Operation Times
Output Frequency when Read
06-80 0.00–655.35 Hz ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Fault 2 Occurred only
DC Bus Voltage when Read
06-81 0.0–6553.5 V ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Output Current when Read
06-82 0.00–655.35 Amps ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
IGBT Temperature when Read
06-83 -3276.8–3276.7ºC ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
06-84 0.00–655.35 Hz ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
06-85 0.0–6553.5 V ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
06-86 Output Current when 0.00–655.35 Amps Read ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
11-25
FOCPM
FOCPG
VFPG
SVC
VF
06-87 -3276.8–3276.7ºC ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
06-88 0.00–655.35 Hz ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
06-89 0.0–6553.5 V ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
06-90 0.00–655.35 Amps ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
06-91 -3276.8–3276.7ºC ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
06-92 0.00–655.35 Hz ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
06-93 0.0–6553.5 V ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
06-94 0.00–655.35 Amps ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
06-95 -3276.8–3276.7ºC ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
06-96 0.00–655.35 Hz ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
06-97 0.0–6553.5 V ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
06-98 0.00–655.35 Amps ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
06-99 -3276.8–3276.7ºC ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
11-26
FOCPM
FOCPG
VFPG
SVC
VF
230V models: 350.0–450.0 VDC 380.0
 07-00 Brake Transistor Level ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
460V models: 700.0–900.0 VDC 760.0
Brake Transistor Hysteresis
07-01 0.0–100.0 V 0.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Voltage
DC Brake Current Level at
 07-02 0–100% (motor drive rated current) 0 ○ ○ ○
Start-up
 07-03 DC Brake Activation Time 0.0–60.0 sec. 0.7 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
 07-04 DC Brake Stopping Time 0.0–60.0 sec. 0.7 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
 07-05 Start-point for DC Brake 0.00–299.00 Hz 0.00 ○ ○ ○ ○
 07-06 DC Brake Proportional Gain 1–500 50 ○ ○ ○
 07-07 Dwell Time at Acceleration 0.00–600.00 sec. 0.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Dwell Frequency at
 07-08 0.00–299.00 Hz 0.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Acceleration.
 07-09 Dwell Time at Deceleration. 0.00–600.00 sec. 0.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Dwell Frequency at
 07-10 0.00–299.00 Hz 0.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Deceleration.
0: Cooling fan always ON.
1: One minute after AC motor drive
stops, cooling fan is OFF.
2: AC motor drive runs and cooling
fan is ON; AC motor drive stops
 07-11 Cooling Fan Control 2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
and cooling fan is OFF.
3: Cooling fan is ON to run when
preliminary IGBT temperature (ºC)
reached.
4: Cooling fan is always OFF.
-150.0–150.0% (Pr.07-14 setting =
 07-12 Torque command 0.0
100%)
0: Digital keypad (KPC-CC01)
 07-13 Torque Command Source 1: RS-485 serial communication 2
2: Analog signal (Pr.03-00)
 07-14 Maximum Torque Command 0–300% (motor drive rated torque) 100 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Torque Command Filter
 07-15 0.000–1.000 sec. 0.000
Time
0: Settings in Pr.07-17 and Pr.07-18
07-16 Speed Limit 1: Frequency command source 0
(Pr.00-14)
 07-17 Torque Mode + Speed Limit 0–120% 10
 07-18 Torque Mode - Speed Limit 0–120% 10
0: Disable
1: Analog input (Pr.03-00)
 07-19 Torque Offset Source 2: Torque offset setting (Pr.07-20) 0 ○ ○ ○
3: Control through external
terminals (by Pr.07-21–Pr.07-23)
11-27
FOCPM
FOCPG
VFPG
SVC
VF
0.0–100.0% (motor drive rated
 07-20 Torque Offset Setting 0.0 ○ ○ ○
torque)
 07-21 High Torque Offset 30.0 ○ ○ ○
torque)
 07-22 Middle Torque Offset 20.0 ○ ○ ○
torque)
 07-23 Low Torque Offset 10.0 ○ ○ ○
torque)
 07-24 Forward Motor Torque Limit 0–300% (motor drive rated torque) 200 ○ ○
Forward Regenerative
 07-25 0–300% (motor drive rated torque) 200 ○ ○
Torque Limit
 07-26 Reverse Motor Torque Limit 0–300% (motor drive rated torque) 200 ○ ○
Reverse Regenerative
 07-27 0–300% (motor drive rated torque) 200 ○ ○
Torque Limit
0: Coast to stop
1: According to deceleration time 1
Emergency Stop (EF) & 2: According to deceleration time 2
 07-28 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Forced Stop 3: According to deceleration time 3
4: According to deceleration time 4
5: According to Pr.01-31
Time for Decreasing Torque
 07-29 0.000–5.000 sec. 0.000 ○ ○
at Stop
DC Brake Current Level at
 07-30 0–100% (motor drive rated current) 0 ○ ○ ○
Stop
 07-31 Drive Output Torque 0.0–300.0% 0.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
0: No function
07-32 Brake Torque Test Function 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
1: Brake torque test
07-33 Brake Torque Test Distance 0–65535 ppr 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
07-34 Brake Torque Test Time 0.0–5.0 sec. 5.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Most Recent Output Torque
Read
07-35 Ratio before Brake Torque 0.00–3.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
only
Test Failure
Minimum Output Torque
 07-36 Ratio Allowed during Brake 0.00–2.00 0.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Torque Test
Maximum Output Torque
 07-37 Ratio Allowed during Brake 0.00–2.00 0.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Torque Test
11-28
08 PM Parameters
FOCPM
FOCPG
VFPG
SVC
VF
0: No function
1: Only for an unloaded motor,
auto-measures the angle
between magnetic pole and PG
origin (Pr.08-09)
08-00 Motor Auto-tuning 0 ○
2: For PM parameters (suggested
to lock the brake)
3: Auto-measures the angle
between magnetic pole and PG
origin (Pr.08-09)
08-01 Motor Rated Current (40–120%) * Pr.00-01 Amps #.## ○
08-02 Motor Rated Power 0.00–655.35 kW #.## ○
08-03 Motor Rated Speed (rpm) 0–65535 rpm 1710 ○
08-04 Number of Motor Poles 2–96 4 ○
08-05 Motor Rs 0.000–65.535 Ω 0.000 ○
08-06 Motor Ld 0.0–6553.5 mH 0.0 ○
08-07 Motor Lq 0.0–6553.5 mH 0.0 ○
08-08 Back Electromotive Force 0.0–6553.5 V rms 0.0 ○
Angle between Magnetic ○
08-09 0.0–360.0° 360.0
Pole and PG Origin
Magnetic Pole 0: Disable ○
08-10 0
Reorientation 1: Enable
11-29
FOCPM
FOCPG
VFPG
VF
SVC
 09-00 Communication Address 1–254 1
 09-01 Transmission Speed 4.8–115.2 kbps 19.2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Transmission Fault 1: Fault and ramp to stop
 09-02 3 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Treatment 2: Reserved
3: No action and no display
0.0–100.0 sec.
 09-03 Time-out Detection 0.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
0.0: Disable
0: 7N1 (ASCII)
1: 7N2 (ASCII)
2: 7E1 (ASCII)
3: 7O1 (ASCII)
4: 7E2 (ASCII)
5: 7O2 (ASCII)
6: 8N1 (ASCII)
7: 8N2 (ASCII)
8: 8E1 (ASCII)
 09-04 Communication Protocol 13 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
9: 8O1 (ASCII)
10: 8E2 (ASCII)
11: 8O2 (ASCII)
12: 8N1 (RTU)
13: 8N2 (RTU)
14: 8E1 (RTU)
15: 8O1 (RTU)
16: 8E2 (RTU)
17: 8O2 (RTU)
 09-05 Response Delay Time 0.0–200.0 ms 2.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
09-06
– Direct docking mode only  - ○ ○ ○
09-13
09-14 PDO Transmission Interval 0–65535 ms 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
External
Terminal
11-30
FOCPM
FOCPG
VFPG
SVC
VF
0: Disable
1: ABZ
2: ABZ+Hall
10-00 Selection of Encoder 3: SIN/COS+Sinusoidal 0 ○ ○ ○
4: SIN/COS+Endat
5: SIN/COS
6: SIN/COS+Hiperface
10-01 Encoder PPR 1–25000 2048 ○ ○ ○
0: Disable
1: Phase A leads in a forward run
command and phase B leads in a
reverse run command
2: Phase B leads in a forward run
command and phase A leads in a
reverse run command
3: Phase A is a pulse input and
10-02 Encoder Input Type Setting 0 ○ ○ ○
phase B is a direction input (low
input = reverse direction, high
input = forward direction)
4: Phase A is a pulse input and
phase B is a direction input (low
input = forward direction, high
input = reverse direction)
5: Single-phase input
Encoder Feedback Signal
 10-03 1: Fault and ramp to stop 2 ○ ○ ○
Fault Action (PGF1, PGF2)
2: Fault and stop operation
Encoder Feedback Signal
 10-04 0.0–10.0 sec. 1.0 ○ ○ ○
Fault Detection Time
Encoder Stall Level
 10-05 0–120% (0: Disable) 115 ○ ○ ○ ○
(PGF3)
Encoder Stall Detection
 10-06 0.0–2.0 sec. 0.1 ○ ○ ○ ○
Time
Encoder Slip Range
 10-07 0–50% (0: Disable) 50 ○ ○ ○ ○
(PGF4)
Encoder Slip Detection
 10-08 0.0–10.0 sec. 0.5 ○ ○ ○ ○
Time
Encoder Stall and Slip
 10-09 1: Fault and ramp to stop 2 ○ ○ ○ ○
Error Action
0: Z signal is at the falling edge of U-
Mode Selection for UVW phase
10-10 0 ○ ○ ○
Input 1: Z signal is at the rising edge of U-
phase
11-31
FOCPM
FOCPG
VFPG
SVC
VF
ASR (Auto Speed
 10-11 Regulation) Control (P) of 0.0–1000.0% 100.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Zero Speed
ASR (Auto Speed
 10-12 Regulation) Control (I) of 0.000–10.000 sec. 0.100 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Zero Speed
ASR (Auto Speed
 10-13 0.0–1000.0% 100.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Regulation) Control (P) 1
ASR (Auto Speed
 10-14 0.000–10.000 sec. 0.100 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Regulation) Control (I) 1
ASR (Auto Speed
 10-15 0.0–1000.0% 100.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Regulation) Control (P) 2
ASR (Auto Speed
 10-16 0.000–10.000 sec. 0.100 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Regulation) Control (I) 2
ASR 1/ ASR2 Switch
 10-17 0.00–299.00 Hz (0: Disable) 7.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Frequency
ASR Primary Low Pass
 10-18 0.001–0.350 sec. 0.008 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Filter Gain
Zero Speed Position
 10-19 0.00–655.00% 80.00 ○
Control Gain (P)
Low Speed ASR Width
 10-20 0.00–299.00 Hz 5.00 ○ ○ ○
Adjustment
High Speed ASR Width
 10-21 0.00–299.00 Hz 5.00 ○ ○ ○
Adjustment
Zero Speed Position
 10-22 0.001–65.535 sec. 0.250 ○
Control Holding Time
Zero Speed Position
 10-23 Control Low Pass Filter 0.001–65.535 sec. 0.004 ○
Time
0: After the brake release set in
Zero Speed Position
Pr.02-29
 10-24 Control Activation Mode 0 ○
1: After the brake signal input (Pr.02-
Selection
01–Pr.02-08 is set to 42)
Elevator Leveling
 10-25 0.0–1000.0% 100.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
(Zero Speed Gain P)
Elevator Leveling
 10-26 0.000–10.000 sec. 0.100 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
(Zero Speed Integral I)
Elevator Starting
 10-27 0.0–1000.0% 100.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
(Zero Speed Gain P)
Elevator Starting
 10-28 0.000–10.000 sec. 0.100 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
(Zero Speed Integral I)
PG Card Frequency
 10-29 0–31 0 ○ ○ ○
Division Output
PG Card Frequency
 10-30 0000h–0008h 0000h ○ ○ ○
Division Output Type
10-31 PG Card C+/C- 0000h–0001h 0000h
11-32
FOCPM
FOCPG
VFPG
SVC
VF
 10-32 Over-acceleration Level 0.0–20.0 m/s² 0.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Over-acceleration
10-33 0.01–5.00 sec. 0.05 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Detection Time
Over-acceleration 0: Always detect
10-34 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Detection Selection 1: Detect during operation
11-33
FOCPM
FOCPG
VFPG
SVC
VF
Bit 0 = 0: No function
Bit 0 = 1: ASR auto-tuning; PDFF
enabled
Bit 7 = 1: Zero speed position
control is enabled
Bit 9 = 0: Dynamic PG origin auto-
tuning with load (support
by PGHSD-1)
11-00 System Control Bit 9 = 1: Static PG origin auto- 0 ○ ○
tuning with load by
enabling PGHSD-1
Bit 15 = 0: Detect the position of
magnetic pole again when
power is applied
Bit 15 = 1: Start from the magnetic
pole position of the
previous power failure
when power is applied
 11-01 Elevator Speed 0.10–4.00 m/s 1.00 ○ ○
 11-02 Traction Sheave Diameter 100–2000 mm 400 ○ ○
 11-03 Gear Ratio 1.00–100.00 1.00 ○ ○
0 = 1:1
1 = 2:1
 11-04 Suspension Ratio 1 ○ ○
2 = 4:1
3 = 8:1
 11-05 Mechanical Inertial Ratio 1–300% 40 ○ ○
 11-06 Zero speed Bandwidth 1–40 Hz 10 ○ ○
 11-07 Low speed Bandwidth 1–40 Hz 10 ○ ○
 11-08 High speed Bandwidth 1–40 Hz 10 ○ ○
 11-09 PDFF Gain Value 0–200% 30 ○ ○
 11-10 Speed Feed Forward Gain 0–500 0 ○ ○
 11-11 Notch Filter Depth 0–20 db 0 ○ ○
 11-12 Notch Filter Frequency 0.00–200.00 Hz 0.00 ○ ○
Keypad Display for Low
 11-13 0.001–65.535 sec. 0.500 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Pass Filter Time
Motor Current at
 11-14 50–200% 150 ○
Acceleration
 11-15 Carriage Acceleration 0.20–2.00 m/s2 0.75 ○
11-16 Reserved
11-17 Reserved
11-18 Reserved
Zero Speed Parking
 11-19 1–40 Hz 10 ○ ○
Bandwidth
11-34
FOCPM
FOCPG
VFPG
SVC
VF
0: DPWM mode (Digital Pulse-
Width Modulation Mode)
 11-20 PWM Mode 0
1: SVPWM mode (Space-Vector
Pulse Width Modulation Mode)
Filter Time Display on
 11-21 0.001–65.535 sec. 0.500 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
KPED-LE01
11-35
User-defined Parameters include parameters from Group 00–11.
FOCPM
FOCPG
VFPG
SVC
VF
 12-00 User-defined Parameter 1 0–9999 0616 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
11-36
FOCPM
FOCPG
Parameter Name Display Address
VFPG
Pr. Default
SVC
Parameter Group 12 Setting Values Pr.00-00–Pr.11-20
VF
13-00 Present Fault Record 0616 - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Motor Operation at Present Fault
13-01 0632 - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Time (min.)
Motor Operation at Present Fault
13-02 0633 - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Time (day)
Frequency Command at Present
13-03 0653 - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Fault
13-04 Output Frequency at Preset Fault 0654 - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
13-05 Output Current at Present Fault 0655 - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
13-06 Motor Frequency at Present Fault 0656 - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
13-07 Output Voltage at Present Fault 0657 - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
13-08 DC Bus Voltage at Present Fault 0658 - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
13-09 Output Power at Present Fault 0659 - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
13-10 Output Torque at Present Fault 0660 - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Power Module IGBT Temperature at
13-11 0661 - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Present Fault
Multi-function Terminal Input Status
13-12 0662 - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
at Present Fault
Multi-function Terminal Output
13-13 0663 - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Status at Present Fault
13-14 Drive Status at Present Fault 0664 - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
13-15 Second Most Recent Fault Record 0617 - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Motor Operation at Second Most
13-16 0634 - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Recent Fault Time (min.)
Motor Operation at Second Most
13-17 0635 - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Recent Fault Time (day)
13-18 Third Most Recent Fault Record 0618 - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Motor Operation at Third Most
13-19 0636 - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Motor Operation at Third Most
13-20 0637 - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
13-21 Fourth Most Recent Fault Record 0619 - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Motor Operation at Fourth Most
13-22 0638 - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Motor Operation at Fourth Most
13-23 0639 - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
13-24 Fifth Most Recent Fault Record 0620 - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Motor Operation at Fifth Most
13-25 0640 - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Motor Operation at Fifth Most
13-26 0641 - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
13-27 Sixth Most Recent Fault Record 0621 - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Motor Operation at Sixth Most
13-28 0642 - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
11-37
FOCPM
FOCPG
Parameter Name Display Address
VFPG
Pr. Default
SVC
Parameter Group 12 Setting Values Pr.00-00–Pr.11-20
VF
Motor Operation at Sixth Most
13-29 0643 - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
13-30 AC Motor Drive Identity Code 0 - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
13-31 Date Code Y.WKD 1561 Read only ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
11-38
Chapter 12 Descriptions of Parameter Settings | VFD-ED
Chapter 12 Descriptions of Parameter Settings
00 Drive Parameters
01 Basic Parameters
05 IM Parameters
08 PM Parameters
10 Speed Feedback Parameters
12-00-1
00 Drive Parameters
: You can set this parameter during operation
AC Motor Drive Identity Code
Control Mode VF VFPG SVC FOCPG FOCPM Default: ##
Settings Read Only
AC Motor Drive Rated Current Display
Control Mode VF VFPG SVC FOCPG FOCPM Default: ##
Settings Read Only (Display by model)
 Pr.00-00 displays the AC motor drive identity code. The capacity, rated current, rated voltage and the
maximum carrier frequency relate to the identity code. Use the following table to check how the AC motor
drive rated current, rated voltage, and maximum carrier frequency correspond to the identity code.
 Pr.00-01 displays the AC motor drive rated current. By reading this parameter, you can check if the AC
motor drive is correct.
230V models
Power (kW) 2.2* 3.7* 4.0 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37
Horsepower (HP) 3 5 5 7.5 10 15 20 25 30 40 50
Motor Drive ID Code
108 110 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26
(Pr.00-00)
Rated Output
Current for
12.0 17.0 20 24 30 45 58 77 87 132 161
General
Purposes (A)
Range of the
2–15 kHz 2–9 kHz
Carrier Frequency
Rated Max. Output
Carrier Frequency
*VFD022ED21S and VFD037ED21S are single-phase models.
460V models
Power (kW) 4.0 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75
Horsepower (HP) 5 7.5 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 100
Motor Drive ID Code
11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33
(Pr.00-00)
Rated Output
Current for
11.5 13 17 23 30 38 45 58 80 100 128 165
General
Purposes (A)
Range of the
2–15 kHz 2–9 kHz 2–6 kHz
Carrier Frequency
Rated Max. Output
Carrier Frequency
12-00-2
Parameter Reset
Control Mode VF VFPG SVC FOCPG FOCPM Default: 0
Settings 0: No Function
1: Read Only
8: Keypad Locked
9: Reset all parameters to defaults (50 Hz)
10: Reset all parameters to defaults (60 Hz)
 1: Set all parameters to read-only except Pr.00-00–Pr.00-07, and you can use this setting with the
password setting for password protection.
 9 or 10: Reset all parameters to the default. If the keypad is locked by a password, enter the password to
reset to the default. The password is also erased.
 8: Lock the keypad and only Pr.00-02 and Pr.00-07 can be changed.
 Start-up Display
Settings 0: Display the Frequency command value (LED F)
1: Display the actual output frequency (LED H)
2: DC bus voltage (V)
3: Display the output current (A)
4: Output voltage (E)
5: User-defined (see Pr.00-04)
 Determines the start-up display page after power is applied to the drive.
 Content of Multi-function Display

Settings 0: Display the output current supplied to the motor from the drive (A)
(Unit: Amp)
1: Reserved
2: Display the drive’s actual output frequency (H) (Unit: Hz)
3: Display the drive’s DC bus voltage (v) (Unit: VDC)
4: Display the terminals U, V, and W output voltage of the drive (E)
(Unit: VAC)
5: Display the terminals U, V, and W output power factor angle to the
motor (n) (Unit: deg)
6: Display the terminals U, V, and W output power to the motor (P)
(Unit: kW)
7: Display the actual motor speed in rpm (r) (Unit: rpm)
8: Display the drive’s estimated output torque in %; the motor’s rated
torque is 100% (t) (Unit: %)
9: Display the PG feedback (G) (See Pr.10-00 and Pr.10-01)
10: Display the electrical angle of drive output (d) (Unit: deg)
11: Display the AUI1 analog input terminal signal (1.) (Unit: %)
12: Reserved
12-00-3
13: Display the AUI2 analog input terminal signal (Unit: %)

14: Display the drive’s heat sink temperature (t) (Unit: °C)
15: Display the IGBT temperature (T) (Unit: °C)
16: Display digital input status ON/OFF (i)
17: Display digital output status ON/OFF (o)
18: Display the step speed of multi-step speed that is executing (S)
19: The corresponding CPU digital input pin status (i.)
20: The corresponding CPU digital output pin status (o.)
21–23: Reserved
24: Output AC voltage when malfunction occurred (E) (Unit: VAC)
25: Output DC voltage when malfunction occurred (v) (Unit: VDC)
26: Motor frequency when malfunction occurred (H) (Unit: Hz)
27: Output current when malfunction occurred (A) (Unit: Amp)
28: Output frequency when malfunction occurred (F) (Unit: Hz)
29: Frequency command when malfunction occurred (F) (Unit: Hz)
30: Output power when malfunction occurred (P) (Unit: kW)
31: Output torque when malfunction occurred (t) (Unit: %)
32: Input terminal status when malfunction occurred (i)
33: Output terminal status when malfunction occurred (o)
34: Drive status when malfunction occurred (s)
35: Display MI and MO status on digital keypad
36: CAN communication interference index (c) (Unit: %)
37: Multi-function display selection (q) (Unit: %)
40: Elevator actual speed (Unit: m/s)
 This parameter displays the content on the digital keypad KPC-CC01 on page U. Use this parameter to
get the AC motor drive’s status.
Example 01
Terminal MI8 MI7 MI6 MI5 MI4 MI3 MI2 MI1 REV FWD
Status 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0
0: OFF, 1: ON
MI1: Set Pr.02-01 to 1 (multi-step speed command 1).
MI8: Set Pr.02-08 to 8 (the 1st, 2nd acceleration/deceleration time selection).
If REV, MI1 and MI8 are ON, the value is 0000 0000 1000 01102 in binary and 0086H in HEX. Meanwhile, if
you set Pr.00-04 to 16 or 19, the keypad KPC-CC01 displays “0086” and LED U is ON. Pr.00-04=16 is the
status of the digital input and Pr.00-04=19 is the corresponding CPU digital input pin status. Set the parameter
to 16 to monitor the digital input status and then set to 19 to check if the wire is normal.
Example 02
Terminal MO8 MO7 MO6 MO5 MO4 MO3 MO2 MO1 R2A R1A MRA RA
Status 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0
RA: Set Pr.02-11 to 9 (Drive ready)
12-00-4
After applying the power to the AC motor drive, if there is no other error, the contact is ON. If you set Pr.00-04
to 17 or 20, the keypad displays 0001 and LED U is ON. Pr.00-04=17 is the status of digital output and Pr.00-
04=20 is the corresponding CPU digital output pin status. Set the parameter to 17 to monitor the digital output
status and then set to 20 to check if the wire is normal.
 Setting value 40 (elevator actual speed) displays as below on keyboard panel KPED-LE01:
Direction: Upward (UP) / Downward (DN) Elevator speed (m/s)

Elevator
Elevator
runs
runs
downward:
upward:
 User-defined Coefficient K
Settings Digit 4: number of decimal points (0–3)
Digit 0–3: 40–9999
 Digital setting method
 Digital 4: number of decimal points (0: no decimal points, 1: one decimal point and so on.)
Digit 0–3: 40–9999 (the corresponding value for the maximum frequency).
Meaning of numerical order

00000
Corresponding Value
Decimal Point Number
 For example, if you use rpm to display the motor speed, and the corresponding value for the four-pole
motor, 60 Hz is 1800. You can set this parameter to 1800 to indicate that the corresponding value for 60
Hz is 1800 rpm. If the unit is rps, set to 10300 to indicate that the corresponding value for 60 Hz is 30.0
(one decimal point).
 The frequency setting only displays as the rpm value. For example, 60 Hz is displayed as 1800 rpm.
 After you set Pr.00-05, the keypad does not display the frequency unit “Hz” after returning to the Main
menu.
Software Version
Control Mode VF VFPG SVC FOCPG FOCPM Default: ##.##
Settings Read Only
 Password Input
Settings 1–9998, 10000–65535
Display 0–2 (number of wrong password attempts)
12-00-5
 Inputs the password that is set in Pr.00-08. Enter the correct password here to enable changing
parameters. You are limited to a maximum of three attempts. After three consecutive failed attempts,
“Password Error” is displayed, and you must restart the AC motor drive before you can try again to enter
the correct password.
 If you forget the password, you can decode by setting this parameter to 9999 and press the PROG/DATA
button ( ) twice. Note that this resets the settings to the default.
PROG
DATA
 Password Set
Settings 1–9998, 10000–65535
Display 0: No password set or successful input in Pr. 00-07
1: Password has been set
 This parameter is for setting the password protection. Password can be set directly the first time. After
you set the password, the value of Pr.00-08 is 01, which means password protection is activated.
However, if the value of Pr.00-08 is 00, the password protection is deactivated, which means you can
change any of the parameter settings (including resetting the parameter protection password for Pr.00-
08). When Pr.00-08 is 01 and if you want to change any of the parameter settings, you must enter the
correct password in Pr.00-07 to deactivate the password, and this would make Pr.00-08 become 00. Note
that if you set this parameter to 00 again, the password protection function is permanently deactivated.
Otherwise, password protection is always reactivated after you reboot the motor drive. If you want to
change any of the parameter settings after rebooting the motor drive, enter the correct password in Pr.00-
07 to deactivate the password.
 How to make the password valid again after decoding by Pr.00-07:
Method 1: Re-enter the original password into Pr.00-08 (or you can enter a new password if you want to
use a changed or new one).
Method 2: After rebooting, the password function is restored.
Method 3: Entering a non-password value into Pr.00-07.
Password Decode Flow Chart
12-00-6
Control Mode
Settings 0: V/F control (V/F)
1: V/F control + Encoder (VFPG)
2: Sensorless Vector Control (SVC)
3: FOC vector control + Encoder (FOCPG)
8: FOC Permanent Motor control (FOCPM)
 Mode selection:
Applicable Speed Motor
Control Speed Energy- Tuning Ride Basic Speed
Settings Motor Control Parameter
Mode Feedback savings Difficulty Comfort Control Control
Type Range Tuning
V/F Voltage
0 V/F IM Low Low Normal 1:50
control control
1 VFPG IM ✓ Medium Medium Normal 1:50 ✓ Frequency Frequency
control control
2 SVC IM Medium Medium Normal 1:50 ✓ Voltage Voltage
control control
3 FOCPG IM ✓ High High Good 1:1000 ✓ Vector Frequency
control control
8 FOCPM PM ✓ High High Good 1:1000 ✓ Vector Frequency
control control
 Determines the AC motor drive control method.
0: You can set the V/F ratio as required and control multiple motors simultaneously.
1: You can use a PG card with an encoder for closed-loop speed control.
2: Use auto-tuning for optimal settings of the control parameters.
3: To increase torque and the accuracy of the speed control (1:1000).
8: To increase torque and the accuracy of the speed control (1:1000). This setting is for use only with
permanent magnet motors. The other settings are for use with induction motors.
12-00-7
DC Bus DC Bus
Voltage Voltage
Detection Protection
Ua Ub Uc
Fcmd
Pr.00-14 + +
V/F Table IGBT
AVR IM
PWM
Accel. / Decel. Time + Pr.01-00–Pr.01-08 + Pr.00-13
12-00-8
Pr.01-01–Pr.01-02
Pr.01-12–Pr.01-30
Ua Ub Uc Ia Ib Ic Pr.05-01–Pr.05-09
Torque Current
LPF
 When Pr.00-09=0, V/F control (V/F) control diagram is as follows:
Compensation Detection
Pr.05-10 Pr.05-12
Slip
LPF
Compensation
Pr.05-11
Pr.05-13, Pr.05-20
DC Bus DC Bus Voltage DC Bus
Voltage Voltage
Ua Ub Uc
Fcmd +
Pr.00-14 PI IGBT
V/F Tabe AVR IM
Controller PWM
12-00-9
- Pr.10-11–Pr.10-16 Pr.01-00–Pr.01-08 +
Acc/Dec Time Pr.00-13
Pr.01-01–Pr.01-02
Pr.01-12–Pr.01-30 Pr.05-01–Pr.05-09
Ua Ub Uc
Torque Current Encoder

LPF
Pr.05-10 Pr.05-12 Pr.10-00–Pr.10-02
Speed Feedback
 When Pr.00-09=1, V/F control + Encoder (VFPG) control diagram is as follows:
DC Bus DC Bus
Voltage Voltage
Ua Ub Uc
Fcmd
Pr.00-14 + +
V/F Table IGBT
AVR
PWM IM
Accel. / Decel. Time + Pr.01-01–Pr.01-08 + Pr.00-13

Pr.01-01–Pr.01-02
12-00-10
Pr.01-12–Pr.01-30 Ua Ub Uc Pr.05-01–Pr.05-09
Ia Ib Ic
Torque Current
LPF
Pr.05-10
Slip
LPF
Compensation
 When Pr.00-09=2, Sensorless Vector Control (SVC) control diagram is as follows:
Pr.05-11 Pr.05-13, Pr.05-20

DC Bus DC Bus
Feed Forward Voltage Voltage
Control Flux Id*
Weakening Detection Protection
d-axis ACR
Pr.11-10 Regulator
Ua Ub Uc
Fcmd +
+ ASR + q-axis Iq*
Pr.00-14 ASR dq IGBT
Speed Current q-axis ACR AVR IM
LPF abc PWM
Control Calculator
Torque Limit
- Pr.10-18 Pr.00-13 Pr.01-01–Pr.01-02
Accel. / Decel. Time Pr.10-11–Pr.10-16 Pr.07-24–Pr.07-27
Pr.11-06–Pr.11-08, Pr.05-01–Pr.05-09
Pr.01-12–Pr.01-30 Pr.11-19
12-00-11
Ia
Slip Calculator abc Ib
dq Ic
Encoder
ωsl +
θe
ʃ Pr.10-00–Pr.10-02
+
ωr Speed
Feedback
 When Pr.00-09=3, FOC vector control + Encoder (FOCPG) control diagram is as follows:
Iq* Maximum Torque
Feed Forward
Control Per Ampere DC Bus DC Bus
+
Pr.11-10 Voltage Voltage
Flux Weakening + Id* Detection Protection
Regulator d-axis ACR
Ua Ub Uc
+
Fcmd
ASR q-axis Iq*
Pr.00-14 + + ASR dq IGBT
Speed Current q-axis ACR AVR PM
Control LPF abc PWM
Calculator
- Torque Limit Pr.10-18 Pr.00-13 Pr.01-01–Pr.01-02
Accel. / Decel. Time
12-00-12
Pr.10-11–Pr.10-16 Pr.08-01–Pr.08-09
Pr.07-24–Pr.07-27
Pr.01-12–Pr.01-30 Pr.11-06–Pr.11-08,
Pr.11-19
Ia
abc Ib
dq Ic Encoder
θe
Pr.10-00–Pr.10-02
ωr Speed
Feedback
 When Pr.00-09=8, FOC Permanent Motor control (FOCPM) control diagram is as follows:
 Speed Unit
Settings 0: Hz
1: m/s
2: ft/s
Output Direction Selection

Settings 0: FWD: counterclockwise, REV: clockwise
1: FWD: clockwise, REV: counterclockwise
 Carrier Frequency
Control Mode VF VFPG SVC FOCPG FOCPM Default:12
Settings 2–15 kHz
 Determines the PWM carrier frequency for the AC motor drive.
Models 3–5 HP 7.5–15 HP 20–30 HP 40–60 HP 75–100 HP
Settings 2–15 kHz 2–15 kHz 2–15 kHz 2–9 kHz 2–6 kHz
Default 8 kHz 10 kHz 8 kHz 6 kHz 6 kHz
 From the table, you see that the PWM carrier frequency has significant influences on the motor’s
electromagnetic noise, the AC motor drive heat dissipation, and the motor acoustic noise. Therefore, if the
surrounding noise is greater than the motor noise, lower the carrier frequency to reduce the temperature
rise. Although the motor has quiet operation in the higher carrier frequency, consider the entire wiring and
interference.
 If you set the carrier frequency higher than the defaults in the table above, the motor drive derates the
capacity. See Carrier Frequency Derating Capacity (Fc) in Chapter 08.
 Automatic Voltage Regulation (AVR) Function

Settings 0: Enable AVR
1: Disable AVR
2: Disable AVR when decelerating to stop
 The AVR function automatically regulates the AC motor drive output voltage to the motor’s rated voltage
when the input power is larger than the motor’s rated voltages. For instance, if you set V/F curve to 200
VAC/50 Hz and the input voltage is between 200–264 VAC, then the output voltage to the motor is
12-00-13
automatically regulated to 200 VAC/50 Hz. If the input voltage is from 180 to 200 VAC, the output voltage to
the motor and the input voltage is in direct proportion to the input voltage.
 When the motor stops with deceleration, it shortens the deceleration time with AVR disabled. Setting this
parameter to 1 with auto-acceleration/auto-deceleration results in quicker deceleration.
 Master Frequency Command Source

Settings 1: RS-485 serial communication or digital keypad (KPC-CC01)
2: External analog input (Pr.03-00)
3: Digital terminal inputs
 Determines the drive’s master frequency source.
 Operation Command Source

Settings 1: External terminals
2: RS-485 serial communication or digital keypad (KPC-CC01)
 The ED series motor drives are shipped without a digital keypad, but you can use the external terminals or
RS-485 to control the operation command.
 When the LED PU is ON, you can control the operation command with the optional digital keypad. (Refer
to Chapter 09 for more information about the digital keypad KPC-CC01).
12-00-14
12 Descriptions of Parameter Settings | VFD-ED
01 Basic Parameters
Maximum Output Frequency
Control Mode VF VFPG SVC FOCPG FOCPM Default: 60.00/50.00
Settings 5.00–299.00 Hz
 Determines the AC motor drive’s Maximum Output Frequency. All the AC motor drive frequency command
sources (analog inputs -10–10 V) are scaled to correspond to the output frequency range.
1st Output Frequency Setting (base frequency/ motor’s rated frequency)

 Set this parameter according to the rated frequency on the motor nameplate. If the motor is 60 Hz, set this
parameter to 60. If the motor is 50 Hz, set it to 50.
1st Output Voltage Setting (base voltage/ motor’s rated voltage)

Settings 230V models 0.1–255.0 V
460V models 0.1–510.0 V
 Set this parameter according to the rated voltage on the motor nameplate. If the motor is 220 V, set this
parameter to 220.0. If the motor is 200 V, set this parameter to 200.0.
 There are many motor types in the market and the power system for each country is also different. The
economical and convenient solution is to install an AC motor drive. Then there is no problem using the
motor with different voltage and frequency inputs, and the motor drive can improve the original motor
characteristics and useful life.
Second Output Frequency Setting

Control Mode VF VFPG Default: 0.50
 Second Output Voltage Setting
Control Mode VF VFPG Default: 5.0/10.0
460V models 0.1–510.0 V
Third Output Frequency Setting
Control Mode VF VFPG Default: 0.50
 Third Output Voltage Setting
Control Mode VF VFPG Default: 5.0/10.0
460V models 0.1–510.0 V
Fourth Output Frequency Setting
Control Mode VF VFPG SVC FOCPG Default: 0.00
12-01-1
 Fourth Output Voltage Setting

Control Mode VF VFPG SVC Default: 5.0/10.0
460V models 0.1–510.0 V
 You usually set the V/F curve according to the motor’s allowable loading characteristics. Pay special
attention to the motor’s heat dissipation, dynamic balance, and bearing lubrication when the loading
characteristics exceed the loading limit of the motor.
 The frequency setting of V/F curve must be set according to this rule: Pr.01-01 ≥ Pr.01-03 ≥ Pr.01-05 ≥
Pr.01-07. There is no limit for the voltage setting, but a high voltage at low frequency may cause motor
burnout, overheating, and trigger stall prevention or over-current protection. Use l
 ow voltages at low frequencies to prevent motor damage or drive malfunction.
Voltage Output Frequency

1st Output Output Frequency Upper Limit
Voltage Setting 1 01-11 Lower Limit 01-10
01-02 Frequency output
2nd Output ranges limitation
Voltage Setting 1
01-04 Regular V/f Curve
3rd Output Special V/f Curve
Voltage Setting 1
01-06
4th Output
Voltage Setting 1
Frequency
01-08 01-07 01-09 01-05 01-03 01-01 01-00
4th Freq. 3rd Freq. 1st Freq. Maximum Output
Start Freq. 2nd Freq. Frequency
V/f Curve
Starting Frequency
 Determines the starting frequency. When the starting frequency (Pr.01-09) is larger than the output
frequency (Pr.01-11), the frequency output starts when the starting frequency (Pr.01-09) reaches the F
command.
When min. output frequency > start frequency When start frequency > min. output frequency
min. output
frequency start frequency
start frequency min. output
frequency
12-01-2
 Output Frequency Upper Limit

Control Mode VF VFPG SVC FOCPG FOCPM Default: 299.00
 Output Frequency Lower Limit
 Use the upper/lower output frequency settings to limit the actual output frequency. If the frequency setting
is lower than the start-up frequency, it runs with zero speed. If the frequency setting is higher than the
upper limit, it runs with the upper limit frequency. If the output frequency lower limit is larger than output
frequency upper limit, this function is invalid.
 Accel. Time 1
Settings 0.00–600.00 sec.
 Decel. Time 1
 Accel. Time 2
 Decel. Time 2
 Accel. Time 3
 Decel. Time 3
 Accel. Time 4
 Decel. Time 4
 The Acceleration Time determines the time required for the AC motor drive to ramp from 0.00 Hz to the
Maximum Output Frequency (Pr.01-00). The Deceleration Time determines the time required for the AC
motor drive to decelerate from the Maximum Output Frequency (Pr.01-00) down to 0.00 Hz.
12-01-3
 Select the Acceleration/Deceleration Time 1, 2, 3, 4 with the multi-function input terminal settings. The
defaults are Acceleration Time 1 and Deceleration Time 1.
 When there is a large opposing torque and inertial torque for the load, and the acceleration and
deceleration time settings are less than the necessary value, then they enable the torque limit and stall
prevention functions. When this happens, the actual acceleration and deceleration time are longer than
the settings.
 JOG Acceleration Time

 JOG Deceleration Time
 You can use both the external terminal JOG and the JOG key on the keypad. When the JOG command is
ON, the AC motor drive accelerates from the fourth output voltage setting (Pr.01-07) to the JOG frequency
(Pr.01-22). When the JOG command is OFF, the AC motor drive decelerates from the JOG frequency to
zero. The Acceleration and Deceleration time are set by these parameters (Pr.01-20, Pr.01-21).
 You cannot execute the JOG command when the AC motor drive is running. When the JOG command is
running, other operation commands are invalid except the Forward and Reverse commands.
F requenc y
01-22
JO G fr equency
01-07
4th output
frequency 01-20 01-21
setting Time
JO G ac celeration time JO G dec el er ation time
JO G ac cel./dec el . time
12-01-4
 JOG Frequency
 You can use both the external terminal JOG and the JOG key on PU. When the JOG terminal is disabled,
the AC motor drive accelerates from 0 Hz to the JOG frequency (Pr.01-22). When the JOG terminal is
enabled, the AC motor drive decelerates from the JOG frequency to zero. The Acceleration and
Deceleration time are set by these parameters (Pr.01-20, Pr.01-21). You cannot execute the JOG
command when the AC motor drive is running. When the JOG command is running, other operation
commands are invalid except the Forward and Reverse commands and the STOP key on the digital
keypad.
 Switch Frequency between First and Fourth Accel./Decel.

 Determines the frequency for the transition from acceleration and deceleration time 1 to acceleration and
deceleration time 4. You can also enable the transition from acceleration or deceleration time 1 to
acceleration and deceleration time 4 with the external terminals (Pr.02-01–Pr.02-08). The external
terminal has priority over Pr.01-23.
Frequency
1st Acceleration
Time 1st Deceleration
Time
01-23
1st/4th
Acceleration
/Deceleration 4th Deceleration
Freq. 4th Acceleration Time Time
1st/4th Acceleration/Deceleration Switching
 S-curve for Acceleration Begin Time S1

 S-curve for Acceleration Arrival Time S2
 S-curve for Deceleration Begin Time S3
 S-curve for Deceleration Arrival Time S4
 S-curve for Deceleration Arrival Time S5
 Switch Frequency for S3/S4 Changes to S5
 Using an S-curve gives the smoothest transition between speed changes. The acceleration and
deceleration curve adjusts the acceleration and deceleration S-curve. When enabled, the motor drive
produces a different acceleration and deceleration curve according to the acceleration and deceleration
time.
12-01-5
 The Actual Acceleration Time = selected acceleration Time + (Pr.01-24 + Pr.01-25) ÷ 2.

The Actual Deceleration Time = selected deceleration Time + (Pr.01-26 + Pr.01-27 + Pr.01-30 x 2) ÷ 2.
 Use Pr.01-29 to set the switch frequency between S4 and S5 for smooth stopping.
 Set Pr.01-29 to the leveling speed of the elevator.
Mode Selection when Frequency < Fmin

Control Mode VF VFPG SVC Default: 1
Settings 0: Output Waiting
1: Zero-speed operation
2: Fmin (Fourth output frequency setting)
 The AC motor drive uses this parameter when it is at 0 Hz.
 1 or 2: The voltage outputs according to the output voltage command corresponding to Fmin (Pr.01-08).
 Deceleration Time when Operating without RUN Command

 The AC motor drive stops according to this parameter when cancelling the RUN command. Refer to the
figure in the description for Pr.01-29 for details.
 Direct docking mode only

Control Mode Default: -
Settings Contact Delta for more information
High Speed Time for Short Floor

 Sets the high speed duration during short floor operation.
Leveling Speed Time for Short Floor

 Sets the leveling speed duration during short floor operation.
12-01-6
Limit for Direct Docking Terminal

Settings 0.00–10.00
 Sets the limit for changing from leveling speed to acceleration when using terminals for direct docking.
Deceleration Distance for Direct Docking Terminal

Settings 0.00–10.00 cm
 Sets the distance between deceleration points.
Deceleration Distance Reference for Short Floor

Control Mode VF VFPG SVC FOCPG FOCPM Default: Read only
Settings 0.00–655.35 m
 Sets the distance between deceleration points according to short floors (write inhibit).
Short Floor/Direct Docking Terminal Enabled

Control Mode VF VFPG SVC FOCPG FOCPM Default: 0000h
Settings 0000h: Disabled
0001h: Short floor enabled
0002h: Direct docking terminal enabled
0003h: Short floor + direct docking terminal enabled
 Related parameters: Pr.02-01–02-08 multi-function input terminal (53: terminal leveling signal for direct
docking).
 Direct docking terminal function:
When the elevator runs to the leveling area, controller sends a leveling signal to the drive to make the
drive stop within effective distance (Pr.01-36). If deceleration distance is too short, the drive adjusts the
speed according to the limit for acceleration change (Pr.01-35). Deceleration of direct docking terminal
function is calculated through Pr.11-01.
12-01-7
There are two methods for sending leveling signals:

1. Using multi-function input terminals (MI=53)
2. Deactivate MI1 and MI2 (Multi-step speed command 1 and 2)
Method 1: Direct docking terminal function (using MI terminal to input leveling signals)
RUN
Elevator
command
starts
Elevator runs in high speed
Disable all speed commands

(zero-step speed = 0 Hz)
During deceleration, when

the host controller receives
signals of LU, LD or docking,
it sends an MI (=53) signal
to VFD-ED.
Executes direct docking

according to Pr.01-36
deceleration distance
Elevator stops
The steps to execute direct docking terminal function using multi-function input terminal (MI=53) are as
follows:
1. The control mode should be in closed-loop. Set Pr.00-01 = 2 (FOCPG) or 3 (FOCPM).
2. Set Pr.00-14 = 3 (External digital input).
3. Set Pr.00-15 = 1 (External terminals).
4. Set Pr.04-00 = 0 (Zero-step speed frequency must be set to 0 Hz).
5. Increase Pr.01-13 appropriately in case the elevator stops while having not reached the leveling plate.
6. Set Pr.01-35 (Limit for Direct Docking Terminal Function). In normal condition, there is no need to
adjust this parameter.
7. Set Pr.01-36 (Deceleration Distance for Direct Docking Terminal Function). Enter the length of leveling
plate.
8. Set Pr.01-38 = 2 (Direct docking terminal function enabled).
9. Set multi-function input (MI) terminal to 53.
10. Set Pr.11-01 (Elevator speed). Deceleration speed for terminal function direct docking is calculated
according to this parameter
NOTE: Before the terminal function direct docking is activated, all speed commands must be disabled
(zero-step speed = 0 Hz).
12-01-8
Method 2: Direct docking terminal function (using multi-step speed change)
RUN
Elevator
command
starts
Elevator runs in high speed:

the third-step speed
command is given (MI1 and
MI2 enabled)
Elevator runs in low speed:

the first-step speed
command is given (MI1
enabled and MI2 disabled)
During deceleration, when

the host controller receives
signals of LU, LD or docking,
it sends an zero-step speed
(MI1 disabled) command to
VFD-ED.
Executes direct docking

according to Pr.01-36
deceleration distance
Elevator stops
The steps to execute direct docking terminal function using deactivating multi-step speed command 1 and
2 (MI1 and MI2) are as follows:
1. The control mode should be in closed-loop. Set Pr.00-09 = 3 (FOCPG) or 8 (FOCPM).
2. Set Pr.00-14 = 3 (External digital input).
3. Set Pr.00-15 = 1 (External terminals).
4. Set Pr.04-00 = 0 (Zero-step speed frequency must be set to 0 Hz).
5. Set Pr.04-01 (First-step Speed Frequency).
6. Set Pr.04-03 (Third-step Speed Frequency).
7. Increase Pr.01-13 appropriately in case the elevator stops while having not reached the leveling plate.
8. Set Pr.01-35 (Limit for Direct Docking Terminal Function). In normal condition, there is no need to
adjust this parameter.
9. Set Pr.01-36 (Deceleration Distance for Direct Docking Terminal Function). Enter the length of leveling
plate.
10. Set Pr.01-38 = 2 (Direct docking terminal function enabled).
11. Set Pr.11-01 (Elevator speed). Deceleration speed for terminal function direct docking is calculated
according to this parameter.
NOTE: Do NOT set multi-function (MI) terminal to 53.
12-01-9
Automatic Emergency Deceleration Level

Control Mode VFPG FOCPG FOCPM Default: 60.00
 When MI is set to 56, the system monitors the current speed. If the speed is higher than Pr.01-39, the
drive decelerates to Pr.01-29 speed according to Pr.01-40 deceleration time.
 Deceleration Time for Emergency Deceleration

 When MI=55 function is triggered, the drive decelerates to Pr.01-29 speed according to Pr.01-40
deceleration time, as shown in the figure below.
12-01-10

Two-wire//three-wire Operation Control
Settings 0: FWD/STOP, REV/STOP
1: FWD/STOP, REV/STOP (Line Start Lockout)
2: RUN/STOP, REV/FWD
3: RUN/STOP, REV/FWD (Line Start Lockout)
4: Three-wire
5: Three-wire (Line Start Lockout)
 Three of the six modes include a “Line Start Lockout” feature. When line start lockout is enabled, the
motor drive does not run when you apply power. The Line Start Lockout feature does not guarantee that
the motor never starts under this condition. It is possible the motor may be set in motion by a mechanical
vibration or malfunctioning switch.
This parameter controls operation from external terminals. There are three different control modes.
Pr.02-00 External Terminal Control Circuits
FWD/STOP FWD:("OPEN":STOP)
0, 1
("CLOSE":FWD)
Two-wire operation control (1)
FWD/STOP REV/STOP REV:("OPEN": STOP)
("CLOSE": REV)
REV/STOP
DCM
VFD-ED
FWD:("OPEN":STOP)
2, 3 RUN/STOP ("CLOSE":RUN)
Two-wire operation control (2)
RUN/STOP FWD/REV REV:("OPEN": FWD)
("CLOSE": REV)
REV/FWD
DCM
VFD-EDL
FWD "CLOSE":RUN
STOP RUN
MI1 "OPEN":STOP
4, 5
Three-wire operation control REV/FWD "OPEN": FWD
REV/FWD "CLOSE": REV
DCM
VFD-ED
Multi-function Input Command 1 (MI1) (It is the Stop terminal for three-wire
operation)
Default: 1
Multi-function Input Command 2 (MI2)
Default: 2
Default: 3
Default: 4
12-02-1

Default: 0
Default: 0
Default: 0
Multi-function Input Command 8 (MI8) (Enable Drive terminal)
Default:40
Settings Control Mode VF VFPG SVC FOCPG FOCPM
0: No function ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
1: Multi-step speed command 1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
5: Reset ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
6: JOG command ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
7: Acceleration/deceleration speed inhibit ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
8: First, second acceleration/deceleration time ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
9: Third, fourth acceleration/deceleration time ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
10: EF input (Pr.07-28) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
11: Reserved
12: Stop output ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
13–14: Reserved
16: Reserved ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
18: Emergency Stop (Pr.07-28) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
19–23: Reserved
24: FWD JOG Command ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
25: REV JOG Command ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
26: Reserved
27: ASR1/ASR2 selection ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
28: Emergency stop (EF1) (motor coasts to stop) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
29–30: Reserved
31: High torque bias (according to Pr.07-21) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
32: Middle torque bias (according to Pr.07-22) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
33: Low torque bias (according to Pr.07-23) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
34–37: Reserved
38: Disable writing to EEPROM ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
39: Torque command direction (0 is positive

direction)
40: Enable drive function ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
12-02-2
41: Magnetic contactor detection ○ ○ ○ ○
43: EPS function (Emergency Power System) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
45–51: Direct docking mode only

53: Terminal leveling signal for direct docking ○ ○ ○
54: Power failure signal ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
55: Manual emergency deceleration ○ ○ ○
56: Automatic emergency deceleration ○ ○ ○
57: Brake torque test action signal ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
59: AFE fault ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
 Selects the functions for each multi-function input terminal.

 If you set Pr.02-00 to three-wire operation control, terminal MI1 is for STOP terminal, and MI1 is not
available for any other operation.
Settings Functions Descriptions
0 No Function
1 Multi-step speed command 1 15-step speeds controlled through the four terminals, and 17 in
total including the master speed and JOG (refer to Pr. 04-00–
2 Multi-step speed command 2
Pr.04-14).
3 Multi-step speed command 3
When using communication to control the multi-step speed,
4 Multi-step speed command 4 settings 1–4 are invalid.
After you eliminate the drive error, use this terminal to reset the
5 Reset
drive.
6 JOG Command JOG operation
When enabled, acceleration and deceleration are stopped and
Acceleration/deceleration
7 the AC motor drive starts to accelerate and decelerate from
Speed Inhibit
the inhibit point.
You can select the motor drive’s acceleration and deceleration
time through the terminals; there are four acceleration and
deceleration speeds in total.
The first, second acceleration
8 Bit 0 Bit 1 Descriptions
or deceleration time
0 0 First accel./decel. time
When output frequency is less than
Pr.01-23 (Switch Frequency between
First/Fourth Accel./Decel.), it outputs
the fourth accel./decel. time.
0 1 Second accel./decel. time
The third, fourth acceleration or 1 0 Third accel./decel. time
9 1 1 Fourth accel./decel. time
deceleration time
If the drive receives STOP command, it decelerates to stop with
Pr.01-31.
External fault input terminal, and decelerates according to
10 EF Input
Pr.07-28 (records EF fault).
11: Reserved
12-02-3

When enabled, the motor drive output stops immediately and
12 Stop output the motor coasts. When disabled, the motor drive accelerates
to the frequency setting.
13–14: Reserved
When the operation speed command source is AUI1 and AUI2,

AUI1 operation speed
15 and two or more terminals are ON, the priority is AUI1 > AUI2.
command
When enabled, the frequency source is AUI1.
16: Reserved
AUI2 operation speed
17 When enabled, it forces the frequency source to AUI2.
command
When enabled, the motor drive ramps to stop according to
18 Emergency Stop
Pr.07-28.
19–23: Reserved
When enabled, the motor drive executes the forward Jog
24 FWD JOG command
command.
When enabled, the motor drive executes the reverse Jog
25 REV JOG command
command.
26: Reserved
ON: Speed is adjusted according to ASR 2.
27 ASR1/ASR2 selection
OFF: Speed is adjusted according to ASR 1.
Emergency stop (EF1) (Motor ON: The motor drive executes emergency stop and records the
28
coasts to stop) fault code.
29–30: Reserved
When Pr.07-19 is set to 3:
31 High torque bias Set the high torque bias in Pr.07-21.
Set the middle torque bias in Pr.07-22.
Set the low torque bias in Pr.07-23.
32 Middle torque bias 31 32 33 Torque Bias

OFF OFF OFF N/A
OFF OFF ON Pr.07-23
OFF ON OFF Pr.07-22
OFF ON ON Pr.07-23+ Pr.07-22
ON OFF OFF Pr.07-21
33 Low torque bias ON OFF ON Pr.07-21+ Pr.07-23
ON ON OFF Pr.07-21+ Pr.07-22
Pr.07-21+ Pr.07-22+
ON ON ON
Pr.07-23
34–37: Reserved
38 Disable writing to EEPROM When enabled, you cannot write to EEPROM.
When the torque command is AUI, set this function to change
39 Torque command direction the torque command direction. To work with Pr.07-13 = 2, set
Pr.03-00 to 2.
12-02-4

When enabled, it executes the motor drive function. This function
40 Enable drive function can be used with multi-function output (setting Pr.02-11–Pr.02-
14 to 15) and (Pr.02-31 and Pr.02-32).
This terminal is for the magnetic contactor feedback signal

ON/OFF.
When the motor drive receives a RUN command, it enables the

41 Magnetic contactor detection corresponding output terminal (setting 15) after Pr.02-31 time. It
checks if this function is enabled in the detection time (Pr.02-36).
If NOT, the magnetic contactor error occurs and error code
“MCF” displays.

corresponding output terminal (setting 12) after Pr.02-29 time. It
42 Mechanical brake 1 checks if this function is enabled in the detection time (Pr.02-35).
If NOT, the mechanical brake error occurs and error code “MBF”
displays.
If power is cut during running, the drive stops when the DC bus
EPS function (Emergency voltage is less than the low voltage level. After power is cut, the
43
Power System) drive runs according to the EPS frequency when EPS is
applied and this function is ON.

corresponding output terminal (setting 12) after Pr.02-29 time. It
44 Mechanical brake 2 checks if this function is enabled in the detection time (Pr.02-35).
If NOT, the mechanical brake error occurs and error code “MBF”
displays.
45–51 Direct docking mode only Contact Delta for more information.
When the elevator runs to the leveling area, controller sends a

Terminal leveling signal for
53 signal to the drive to make the drive stop within effective
direct docking
distance (Pr.01-36).
When power failure occurs, the host controller inputs this signal
54 Power failure signal to inform the drive. When the motor drive receives this signal,
MO = 49 is disabled after Pr.06-71 time
Manual emergency When the motor drive receives this signal, it decelerates to
55
deceleration Pr.01-29 speed according to Pr.01-40 deceleration time.
After setting this MI function, the system monitors the current

Automatic emergency speed. If the speed is higher than Pr.01-39, the drive
56
deceleration decelerates to Pr.01-29 speed according to Pr.01-40
deceleration time.
12-02-5
57 Brake torque test action signal Executes brake torque test when receiving signals.
59 AFE fault Use with AFE series product
Frequency
Frequency 07-03 07-04

Output Time
Operation
Command
(FWD/REV) 02-31 02-32
Multi-function
Output Terminal
D=15
Multi-function
Input Terminal
D=41
T1<02-36 T2<02-35
Ze ro spe ed
O utp ut
fr eq ue ncy
O pe ra tio n
co mman d
Ma gn eti c
co nta ctor
De tecti on time for con tacto r ( 02 -3 6 )
Mu lti -fu ncti on S tatu s 1

i np ut te rmi na l
MI4 1

i np ut te rmi na l
MI4 1

i np ut te rmi na l
MI4 1
 Digital Input Response Time

 Defines the digital input terminal signal delay and confirmation. The delay time prevents interference that
can cause errors (except for the counter input) in the digital terminal input (FWD, REV and MI1–8).
Increasing the setting for this parameter can reduce the errors, but it delays the response time.
 Digital Input Operation Direction

Settings 0–65535
 Sets the input signal level and it is not affected by the SINK/SOURCE status.
 Bit 0 is for FWD terminal, bit 1 is for REV terminal and bits 2–9 are for MI1 to MI8.
12-02-6
 You can change the terminal status between ON and OFF through communications.
For example, set MI1=1 (multi-step speed command 1) and MI2=2 (multi-step speed command 2). Then
the reverse + second step speed command = 1010 (binary) = A (hexadecimal). You only need to set
Pr.02-10=A through communications and it can move reverse at the second step speed. In this case, you
do not need to wire any multi-function terminals.
bit9 bit8 bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0
MI8 MI7 MI6 MI5 MI4 MI3 MI2 MI1 REV FWD
 Multi-function Output 1: RA, RB, RC (Relay 1)

Default: 0
 Multi-function Output 2: MRA, MRB, MRC (Relay 2)
Default: 0
 Multi-function Output 3: R1A, R12C (Relay 3)
 Multi-function Output 4: R2A, R12C (Relay 4)
 Multi-function Output 5: MO1
Reserved
Reserved
Default: 0
1: Indication during operation ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
2: Operation speed reached ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
3: Desired frequency 1 reached (Pr.02-25, Pr.02-

○ ○ ○ ○ ○
26)
4: Desired frequency 2 reached (Pr.02-27, Pr.02-
○ ○ ○ ○ ○
28)
5: Zero Speed (Frequency command) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
6: Zero speed with stop (Frequency command) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
7: Over-torque (OT1) (Pr.06-05–06-07) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
8: Over-torque (OT2) (Pr.06-08–06-10) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
9: Drive is ready ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
10: User-defined low-voltage detection (LV) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
11: Malfunction indication ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
12: Mechanical brake release (Pr.02-29, Pr.02-30,

○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Pr.02-37)
13: Overheat (Pr.06-14) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
12-02-7
14: Brake transistor signal ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
15: Motor-controlled magnetic contactor output ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
16: Slip error (oSL) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
17: Malfunction indication 1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
18: Reserved
19: Brake transistor output error ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
20: Warning output ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
21: Over-voltage warning ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
22: Over-current stall prevention warning ○ ○ ○
23: Over-voltage stall prevention warning ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
24: Operation mode indication (Pr.00-15=1) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
25: Forward command ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
26: Reverse command ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
27: Output when current ≥ Pr.02-33 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
28: Output when current < Pr.02-33 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
29: Output when frequency ≥ Pr.02-34 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
30: Output when frequency < Pr.02-34 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
31: Power generation direction and status

○ ○ ○ ○ ○
verification
32: Power generation direction ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
33: Zero speed (actual output frequency) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
34: Zero speed with Stop (actual output

○ ○ ○ ○ ○
frequency)
39: Reserved
40: Speed reached (including zero speed) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
41: Reserved
42: STO Output Error ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
43–44: Direct Docking Mode only
45: Reserved
46: Retrying after a fault has occurred indication ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
47: Direct Docking Mode only

48: Control output of MPSCC (Motor Phase Short
○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Circuit Contactor)
49: Emergency power mode action ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
50: Speed reached Pr.02-34 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
51: Brake torque test finished ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
52: AFE reset ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
12-02-8

0 No function MO has no function
Active when there is an output from the drive or RUN command is
1 Indication during operation
ON.
2 Operation speed reached Active when the AC motor drive reaches the output frequency setting.
Desired frequency 1 reached
3 Active when the desired frequency (Pr.02-25, 02-26) reached.
(Pr.02-25, 02-26)
Desired frequency 2 reached

4 Active when the desired frequency (Pr.02-27, 02-28) reached.
(Pr.02-27, 02-28)
Zero Speed Active when the Frequency command = 0. (the drive should be at
5
(Frequency command) RUN mode)
Zero Speed with stop
6 Active when Frequency command = 0 or Stop.
(Frequency command)
Active when detecting over-torque. Refer to Pr.06-05 (over-torque
Over-torque (OT1)
7 detection-OT1), Pr.06-06 (over-torque detection level-OT1) and Pr.06-
(Pr.06-05–06-07)
07 (over-torque detection time-OT1).
Active when detecting over-torque. Refer to Pr.06-08 (over-torque

Over-torque (OT2)
8 detection-OT2), Pr.06-09 (over-torque detection level-OT2) and Pr.06-
(Pr.06-08–06-10)
10 (over-torque detection time-OT2).
9 Drive is ready Active when the drive is ON and no error detected.

User-defined low-voltage Active when the DC bus voltage is too low (see Pr.06-00 Low voltage
10
detection level).
11 Malfunction indication Active when a fault occurs (except Lv stop).
When the drive runs according to Pr.02-29, it is ON. Use this function
with the DC brake. It is recommended to use contact “b” (N.C).
Mechanical brake release

12
(Pr.02-29, Pr.02-30, Pr.02-37)
Active when IGBT or heat sink overheats. To prevent OH, turn off the
13 Overheat (Pr.06-14)
drive (refer to Pr.06-14).
Activated when the drive needs help braking the load. This function
14 Brake transistor signal
helps achieve a smooth deceleration (refer to Pr.07-00).
Motor-controlled magnetic
15 Active when you set MI function to #40 (Enable drive function).
contactor output
16 Slip error (oSL) Active when the slip error is detected (according to Pr.05-14).
17 Malfunction indication 1 Activate after 10 ms when a fault occurs (except Lv stop).
12-02-9
18 Reserved
19 Brake transistor output error Active when a brake transistor error is detected
20 Warning output Active when a warning is detected.
21 Over-voltage warning Active when an over-voltage is detected.
Over-current stall prevention
22 Active when an over-current stall prevention is detected.
warning
Over-voltage stall prevention
23 Active when an over-voltage stall prevention is detected.
warning
Active when the operation command is controlled by an external
24 Operation mode indication
terminal (Pr.00-15=1).
25 Forward command Active when the operation direction is forward.
26 Reverse command Active when the operation direction is reverse.
Output when current ≥ Pr.02-
27 Active when current is ≥ Pr.02-33.
33
Output when current < Pr.02-
28 Active when current is < Pr.02-33.
33
Output when frequency ≥
29 Active when frequency is ≥ Pr.02-34.
Pr.02-34
Output when frequency <
30 Active when frequency is < Pr.02-34.
Pr.02-34
Power generation direction
31 Activate when the power generation direction is verified.
and status verification
32 Power generation direction Activate when the power generation direction runs forward.
Zero speed (actual output Active when the actual output frequency is 0. The drive should be in
33
frequency) RUN mode.
Zero speed with stop (actual Active when the actual output frequency is 0 or Stop. The drive should
34
output frequency) be in RUN mode.
Fault output option 1 (Pr.06-
35 Active when Pr.06-22 is ON.
22)
23)
24)
25)
39 Reserved
Speed reached (including Active when the output frequency reaches the frequency setting. Can
40
zero speed) be used to work with Pr.02-43.
41 Reserved
12-02-10
Status of safety output

Status of drive
Status A (MO=42)
42 STO Output Error Normal Broken circuit (open) *See Table 16-3 for
STO Short circuit (closed) settings of logic
STL1–STL3 Short circuit (closed) output B
43–44 Direct Docking Mode only Contact Delta for more information
45 Reserved
Retrying after a fault has Retry multiple outputs after an error has occurred. When the retry
46
occurred indication period has finished, MO stops.
47 Direct Docking Mode only Contact Delta for more information
Control output of MPSCC
48 (Motor Phase Short Circuit Active when the drive receives a STOP command.
Contactor)
Emergency power mode Active when the drive receives a signal from the host controller (Pr.02-
49
action 01–02-08=54) after Pr.06-71 time.
Active when drive’s output frequency is > Pr.02-34, and PGF3 error
50 Speed reached Pr.02-34
will be triggered.
51 Brake torque test finished Active when brake torque test is finished.
52 AFE reset Use with AFE series product
 Multi-function Output Terminal Direction

Settings 0–65535
 This parameter uses bit setting. If the bit is 1, the multi-function output terminal acts in the opposite
direction. For example, if you set Pr.02-11 to 1 and the forward bit is 0, Relay 1 is ON when the drive is
running and OFF when the drive is stopped.
Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
- - MO6 MO5 MO4 MO3 MO2 MO1 R2A R1A MRA RA
Serial Start Signal Selection

Settings 0: According to FWD/REV signal
1: According to Enable drive function signal
 Selects the contactor serial start method.
 0: According to FWD/REV signal, the motor starts to run after the Enable signal MI = 40 is ON.
 1: According to Enable signal, the contactor, mechanical brake and DC brake all follow parameters’ setting
to run after FWD/REV and Enable are ON.
12-02-11
Enable Drive
Pr.02-24=0
0 1
Multi-function 0 False False
output
MO= 15 1 True True
No matter if the Enable Drive function signal outputs or not,
the drive starts to count Pr.02-31 after MO15 outputs.
Enable Drive
Pr.02-24=1
0 1
Multi-function 0 False False
output
MO= 15 1 False True
After both Enable Drive function signal and MO15 output, the drive starts to count Pr.02-31.
12-02-12
 Desired Frequency Reached 1

 Desired Frequency Reached Width 1
 Desired Frequency Reached 2
 Desired Frequency Reached Width 2
 Once the output frequency reaches the desired frequency and the corresponding multi-function output
terminal is set to 3 or 4 (Pr.02-11–Pr.02-22), this multi-function output terminal is ON.
Brake Release Delay Time when Elevator Starts

Brake Engage Delay Time when Elevator Stops
 When the AC motor drive runs and after the delay time in Pr.02-29, the corresponding multi-function
output terminal (12: mechanical brake release) is ON.
 When the AC motor drive stops and after the delay time in Pr.02-30, the corresponding multi-function
output terminal (12: mechanical brake release) is OFF.
 Use this function with the DC brake function.
0 7- 03 0 7- 04
D C b ra ke D C b ra ke
ti me du ri n g ti me du ri n g
sta rt-u p sto pp i ng
Mo tor sp e ed / D C b ra ke D C b ra ke
Ou tpu t fre qu e nc y
RUN/ STOP RUN STOP
02-30 Brake engage
delay time when
02-29 Brake release delay time
Mu l ti -fu n ctio n o utp ut elevator stops
when elevator starts
(m ech a ni ca l br ak e r el e as e)
Pr.0 2- 11 to 02 -2 2= 1 2
bo un ce ti me o f me ch an i cal b ra ke
br ake br ake
e ng ag e Mechan ical brake release e ng ag e
Me ch an i ca l b ra ke
 Magnetic Contactor Contracting Delay Time between Drive and Motor

 Magnetic Contactor Release Delay Time between Drive and Motor
12-02-13
 After running, use these parameters with multifunction input terminal setting 40 (Enable drive function),
and multifunction output terminal setting 15 (motor-controlled magnetic contactor output). When the
multifunction output terminals are ON, the drive starts outputting after the delay time in Pr.02-31. When
the drive stops outputting, multifunction output terminals release after the delay time in Pr.02-32.
 MPSCC (Motor Phase Short Circuit Contactor) Release Delay Time between
Drive and Motor
Settings 0.010~65.000 sec.
 MPSCC (Motor Phase Short Circuit Contactor) Contracting Delay Time

between Drive and Motor
Settings 0.010~65.000 sec.
12-02-14
Elevator Timing Diagram
12-02-15
 External Terminal Output Current Level

Settings 0–100%
 When output current is ≥ Pr.02-33, it activates the multi-function output terminal (Pr.02-11–Pr.02-22 are
set to 27).
 When output current is < Pr.02-33, it activates the multi-function output terminal (Pr.02-11–Pr.02-22 are
set to 28).
 External Terminal Output Speed Limit

Settings 0.00–299.00 Hz (this is motor speed when using with PG)
 When drive’s output frequency is ≥ Pr.02-34, multi-function terminal 29 (Pr.02-11–Pr.02-22) will be activated.
 When drive’s output frequency is < Pr.02-34, multi-function terminal 30 (Pr.02-11–Pr.02-22) will be activated.
 When drive’s output frequency is > Pr.02-34, multi-function terminal 50 (Pr.02-11–Pr.02-22) will be activated,
and PGF3 error will be triggered.
 The setting range and unit of Pr.02-34 varies with Pr.00-10 settings:
When Pr.00-10=0, the setting range and unit of Pr.02-34 is 0.00–299.0 Hz.
When Pr.00-10=1, the setting range and unit of Pr.02-34 is 0.00–93.93 m/s.
When Pr.00-10=2, the setting range and unit of Pr.02-34 is 0.00–308.09 ft/s.
 Mechanical Brake Detection Time

 When the mechanical brake function (Pr.02-01–Pr.02-08 are set to 42) is not enabled within this setting
time, the drive displays error code 64 (MBF) mechanical brake error.
 Magnetic Contactor Detection Time

Control Mode VF VFPG SVC FOCPG FOCPM Default:0.00
 When the magnetic contactor function (Pr.02-01–02-08 are set to 41) is not enabled within this setting
time, the drive displays error code 66 (MCF) magnetic contactor error.
Torque Check
Settings 0: Disable
1: Enable
 When the drive receives the operation signal, the drive checks if there is a torque output. When enabled,
the drive releases the mechanical brake after confirming that there is a torque output.
12-02-16
02-40
– Direct Docking Mode Only
02-42
Control Mode VFPG FOCPG FOCPM Default: -
 02-43 Speed Reached Bandwidth

 When drive’s output frequency and target frequency is smaller than or equal to this bandwidth, multi-
function output terminal MO=2 and MO=40 will be activated (ON). When drive’s output frequency and
target frequency is larger than this bandwidth, MO=2 and MO=40 will be deactivated (OFF).
12-02-17
12-02-18

 Analog Input 1 (AUI1)
Default:1
Reserved
 Analog Input 2 (AUI2)

Default: 0
1: Frequency command (speed limit under torque ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
control mode)
2: Torque command (torque limit under speed
mode)
3: Load compensation ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
4–5: Reserved
6: P.T.C. thermistor input value ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
7: Positive torque limit ○ ○
8: Negative torque limit ○ ○
9: Regenerative torque limit ○ ○
10: Positive/negative torque limit ○ ○
 When using the Frequency command or speed limit under torque control mode, the corresponding value
for 0 to ±10 V or 4–20 mA is 0–maximum output frequency (Pr.01-00).
 When using the Torque command or torque limit, the corresponding value for 0 to ±10 V or 4–20 mA is 0–
maximum output torque (Pr.07-14).
 When using torque compensation, the corresponding value for 0 to ±10 V or 4–20 mA is 0–moto’s rated
torque.
Positive to rque
03-00~0 2=7
03-00~0 2=9 Positive to rque limit
Reg enerative
torque limit
03-00~0 2=10
Positive/negat ive torque limit
Reverse F orw ard
03-00~0 2=10
Positive/negat ive torque limit 03-00~0 2=9
Reg enerative
torque limit
03-00~0 2=8
Neg ative to rque limit
Neg ative T orq ue
12-03-1
07-19: Source of tor que offset

03-00~02: Analog i nput s el ec tions (AUI1/A CI/AUI2)
03-03~05: Analog i nput bias (AUI1/A CI/AUI2)
03-06~08: AUI1/A CI/AUI2 bias mode
Analog input + Analog input gain Tor que

07-19=1 for preload
03-00~02=3 03-09~11
+/-
Bias mode
03-06~08
B ias
03-03~05
 Analog Input Bias 1 (AUI1)

Settings -100.0–100.0%
 Sets the corresponding AUI1 voltage for the external analog input 0.
Reserved
 Analog Input Bias 1 (AUI2)

Control Mode VF VFPG SVC FOCPG FOCPM Default:0.0
Settings -100.0–100.0%
 Sets the corresponding AUI2 voltage for the external analog input 0.
 The relation between external input voltage/current and setting frequency is equal to -10–10 V (4–20 mA)
corresponding to 0–60 Hz.
Reserved
 AUI1 Positive/negative Bias Mode

 AUI2 Positive/negative Bias Mode

Settings 0: Zero bias
1: Lower than or equal to bias
2: Higher than or equal to bias
3: Use bias as the base to get the absolute value of bias voltage (unipolar)
4: Using bias as the base (unipolar)
 In a noisy environment, you can use a negative bias to provide a noise margin. It is recommended that
you NOT use less than 1 V to set the operating frequency.
12-03-2
03-00
to
03-02
03-09~03-11 gain is positive
0 Z er o bias
4 4 1 Serv e bias as the center, lower than bias =bias

2 Serv e bias as the center, gr eater than bias=bias
T he absolute value of the bias v oltage
3 while s er ving as the c enter (unipolar)
4 Serv e bias as the center (unipolar)
2 2
-1 0 V -9 -8 -7 -6 -5 -4 -3 -2 -1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0V
Negativ e bias bias
2
4 bias
Positiv e bias
 Analog Input Gain 1 (AUI1)

Settings 0.0–500.0%
Reserved
 Analog Input Gain 1 (AUI2)

 Pr.03-03–Pr.03-11 are used when the Frequency command source is the analog voltage/current signal.
 Analog Input Filter Time (AUI1)

Reserved
 Analog Input Filter Time (AUI2)

 Analog signals, such as those entering AUI1 and AUI2, are commonly affected by interference that affects
the stability of the analog control. Use the Input Noise Filter to create a more stable system.
 If Pr.03-14 is large, the control is more stable, but the response to the input is slower. If Pr.03-14 is small,
the control may be unstable, but the response to the input is faster.
Load Compensation Auto-tuning

Settings 0: No function
1: Auto-tunes with running without load
2: Auto-tunes with running with load
 Use torque compensation function to avoid the roll-back generated by using IM to work with spiral gear.
12-03-3
 This function is only valid for AUI1.

 Auto-tuning process:
Start
Run (0Hz) the car for more
than 5 seconds with larger
than 50% of the load.
Set
Pr.03-00 = 3
Pr.03-06 = 4
When tuning is finished,
Pr.03-23 = 0
Pr.03-15 will become 0.
Set Check
Pr.07-19 = 0 Pr.03-03 Analog Input Bias 1 (AUI1)
Pr.03-09 Analog Input Gain 1 (AUI1)
Set
Pr.03-15 = 1 NO Set
Pr.07-13 = 2
Pr.07-19 = 1
Run (0Hz) the car for more

than 5 seconds without load
Check ride comfort
When tuning is finished,

Pr.03-15 will become 0. YES
End
Set
Pr.03-15 = 2
Reserved
 Analog Output Selection 1

 Analog Output Selection 2
Settings 0: Output frequency (Hz)
1: Frequency command (Hz)
2: Motor speed (RPM)
3: Output current (rms)
4: Output voltage
5: DC bus voltage
6: Power factor angle
7: Power factor
8: Output torque
9: AUI1
10: Reserved
11: AUI2
12: q-axis current
13: q-axis feedback value
12-03-4
14: d-axis current

15: d-axis feedback value
16: q-axis voltage
17: d-axis voltage
18: Torque command
19–20: Reserved
21: Power output
 When setting to 0, it is output frequency, not ASR output frequency.
 Analog Output Gain 1

 Analog Output Gain 2
Settings 0–200.0%
 Sets the corresponding voltage for the analog output 0.
 Analog Output Value in REV Direction 1

 Analog Output Value in REV Direction 2
Settings 0: Absolute value in output voltage
1: Output 0 V in REV direction
10V 10V 10V
frequency frequency frequency

0V 0V 0V
03-19=0 03-19=1 03-19=2
Selection for the analog output direction
Analog Input Type (AUI1)

Analog Input Type (AUI2)
Settings 0: Bipolar (±10 V)
1: Unipolar (0–10 V)
 When this parameter is set to 0 (bipolar), the input function direction is determined by the input signal.
 0: And Pr.03-00=1 or 2, AUI decides the operation direction.
 1: And Pr.03-00=1, the FWD/REV terminal decides the operation direction.
 1: And Pr.03-00=2, setting Pr.02-01–Pr.02-08 to 39 decides the operation direction.
12-03-5
12-03-6

 Zero Step Speed Frequency
 1st Step Speed Frequency
 2nd Step Speed Frequency
 3rd Step Speed Frequency
 4th Step Speed Frequency
 The multi-function input terminals (refer to Pr.02-01–Pr.02-08) select one of the AC motor drive multi-step
speeds (including the master frequency, in total 16 speeds). Pr.04-00–Pr.04-15 determine the speeds
(frequencies) as shown above.
12-04-1

– Direct docking mode only
Control Mode VF VFPG SVC FOCPG FOCPM Default: -

12-04-2
05 IM Parameters
Motor Auto-tuning
Control Mode VF Default: 0
1: Dynamic test (Rs, Rr, Lm, Lx, no-load current) [motor runs]
2: Static Test [motor does not run]
Set Pr.05-00 to 1 or 2, and then press the RUN key on the digital keypad KPC-CC01 (Pr.00-15=2) to start
auto-tuning. Or when the drive is in manual mode (inspection), run the upward operation or downward
operation (Pr.00-15=1) to start auto-tuning immediately. In the process of auto-tuning, an “Auto tuning”
warning continuously displays on the digital keypad until it is finished.
 Pay attention to the following notes when Pr.05-00=1 (dynamic test):
2. Make sure the motor is not loaded before auto-tuning, and that the shaft is not connected to any
belt or gear motor. Set this parameter to 2 if you cannot separate the motor from the load.
3. Enter the correct values for Pr.01-01, Pr.01-02, Pr.05-01, Pr.05-02, Pr.05-03 and Pr.05-04. Refer to
motor capacity to set the acceleration/deceleration time.
4. After auto-tuning is finished, check if Pr.05-05–Pr.05-09 all have values.
5. Equivalent circuit diagram:
NOTE:
 In torque/vector control mode, do not run motors in parallel.
 Do not use torque/vector control mode if the motor rated power exceeds the rated power for the AC
motor drive.
 The no-load current is usually 20–50% of the rated current.
 The rated speed cannot be larger or equal to 120 f/p (f: output frequency Pr.01-01, p: Number of
Motor Poles Pr.05-04).
 After auto-tuning is finished, activate the drive again to make it operate when the auto-tuning
command source is the external terminal.
Motor Rated Current

Control Mode VF VFPG SVC FOCPG Unit: Amp
Default: #.##
Settings (40–120%) * Pr.00-01 Amps
12-05-1
 Set this value according to the rated motor frequency from the motor nameplate.
Example: Suppose the rated current for 7.5 HP (5.5 kW) models is 25 A and the default is 22.5 A. In this
way, the current range is from 10 A (25 * 40%) to 30 A (25 * 120%).
 As the table below shows, the defaults vary according to the different motor drive outputs in HP and in kW.
Motor Drive’s
3* 5* 5 7.5 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 100
Output (HP)
Motor Drive’s
2.2 3.7 4 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75
Output (kW)
Motor Rated
230V Current (A) 9.82 13.91 16.36 19.64 24.54 36.82 47.46 63 71.18 108 131.72
Default
Motor Rated
460V Current (A) 9.41 10.64 13.91 18.82 24.54 31.1 36.82 47.46 65.46 81.82 104.72 135
Default
*: single-phase models.
Motor Rated Power

Control Mode SVC FOCPG Default: #.##
Settings 0.00–655.35 kW
 Sets the rated power of the motor. The default is the power of the drive.
Motor Rated Speed (rpm)

Control Mode VFPG SVC FOCPG Default: 1710
Settings 0–65535
 Sets the motor rated speed from the value on the motor nameplate.
Number of Motor Poles

Control Mode VF VFPG SVC FOCPG Default: 4
Settings 2–48
Motor No-load Current

Control Mode VFPG SVC FOCPG Unit: Amp
Default: #.##
Settings 0–Pr.05-01 default
 As the table below shows, the defaults vary according to the different motor drive output in HP and in kW.
Motor Drive’s
3* 5* 5 7.5 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 100
Output (HP)
Motor Drive’s
2.2 3.7 4 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75
Output (kW)
Motor Current
230V w/o Load (A) 3.44 4.87 5.73 6.85 8.5 12.56 15.97 20.78 23.22 33.51 39.52
Default
Motor Current
460V w/o Load (A) 3.29 3.71 4.81 6.43 8.26 10.28 11.99 15 19.64 24.55 31.42 40.5
Default
*: single-phase models.
12-05-2
Rs of Motor
Rr of Motor
Control Mode SVC FOCPG Default: 0.000
Settings 0.000–65.535 Ω
Lm of Motor
Lx of Motor
Control Mode SVC FOCPG Default: 0.0
Settings 0.0–6553.5 mH
 Torque Compensation Low Pass Filter Time

Control Mode SVC Default: 0.020
 Slip Compensation Low Pass Filter Time

 Setting Pr.05-10 and Pr.05-11 changes the response time for the compensation.
 When you set Pr.05-10 and Pr.05-11 to 10 seconds, it maximizes the response time for the compensation.
If the settings are too low, the system may become unstable.
 Torque Compensation Gain

Control Mode VF VFPG Default: 0
Settings 0–10
 You can set this parameter so that the AC motor drive increases its voltage output for a higher torque.
 Slip Compensation Gain

 When the motor drive controls an asynchronous motor, the load and slip increase. Use this parameter to
correct the frequency and lower the slip to make the motor run near the synchronous speed under the
rated current. When the output current is larger than the motor no-load current, the drive compensates the
frequency according to the Pr.05-13 setting. If the actual speed is slower than the expected speed,
increase the setting and vice versa.
 This is only valid in SVC mode.
 Slip Deviation Level

Settings 0–1000%
0: Disable
 Slip Deviation Detection Time
Control Mode VFPG SVC FOCPG Default:1.0
 Over-slip Action
12-05-3

Settings 0: Warn and keep operation
 Pr.05-14–Pr.05-16 set the allowable slip level and over-slip action when the drive is running.
 When Pr.05-16 is set to 1 (Fault and ramp to stop), if brake or operation contactor is OFF under the
circumstance that STO or MI40 (Enable drive function) is not deactivated during deceleration, elevator still
runs even brake has engaged (brake wear), and electric arc occurs when operation contactor is OFF.
 Hunting Gain
Settings 0–10000
0: Disable
 The motor has current wave motion under some specific conditions. You can improve this situation by
setting this parameter. You can set it to 0 for current wave motion in the high frequency range or when
running with PG. When the current wave motion happens in the low frequency range, increase Pr.05-17.
Accumulated Motor Operation Time (Min.)

Settings 0–1439 minutes
Accumulated Motor Operation Time (Day)

Settings 0–65535 days
 Pr.05-18 and Pr.05-19 record the motor operation time. You can clear the records by setting the values to
0. Operating time that is less than 60 seconds is not recorded.
 Core Loss Compensation

Control Mode SVC Default: 10
Settings 0–250%
Accumulated Motor Power-on Time (Min.)

Settings 0–1439 minutes
Accumulated Motor Power-on Time (day)

Settings 0–65535 days
 Slip Compensation Gain % (power generation mode)

Control Mode VF SVC Default: 0.0
12-05-4
 Slip Compensation Gain % (electricity mode)

Control Mode VF SVC Default: 0.0
 When in VF mode, you do NOT have to set Pr.05-13. To satisfy the demand for different compensation
gains in power generation mode and electricity mode, set Pr.05-23 and Pr.05-24.
 When in SVC mode, set Pr.05-13 first. To satisfy the demand for different compensation gains in power
generation mode and electricity mode, set Pr.05-23 and Pr.05-24.
12-05-5
12-05-6
 Low Voltage Level
Settings 230V models: 160.0–220.0 V
460V models: 320.0–440.0 V
 Sets the Lv level.
input voltage
30V(60V)
Pr. 06-00
LV
 Input Phase-loss Protection during Operation

 Sets the phase-loss protection action for power at input side. The phase-loss affects the drive’s control
characteristics and life.
 Over-current Stall Prevention during Acceleration

Settings 0: Disable
0–250% (rated current of the motor drive)
 During acceleration, the AC motor drive output current may increase abruptly and exceed the value
specified in Pr.06-02 due to rapid acceleration or excessive load on the motor. When you enable this
function, the AC motor drive stops accelerating and keeps the output frequency constant until the current
drops below the maximum value.
06-02
Over-Current
Detection current
Level
Output
Over-Current Stall
Frequency
prevention during
Acceleration,
frequency held
time
actual acceleration time when over-current stall
prevention is enabled
12-06-1
 Over-current Stall Prevention during Operation

Settings 0: Disable
0–250% (rated current of the motor drive)
 If the output current exceeds the setting specified in Pr.06-03 when the drive is operating, the drive
decreases its output frequency according to the Pr.06-04 setting to prevent motor stall. If the output
current is lower than the setting in Pr.06-03, the drive accelerates (according to Pr.06-04) again to catch
up with the Frequency command value.
Over-Current Stall
Prevention during
Operation, output
Over-Current
frequency decrease
Detection Level
06-03 Output Current
Output
Frequency
Time
over-current stall prevention during operation
 Acceleration/Deceleration Time for Stall Prevention at Constant Speed

Settings 0: Use the current acceleration/deceleration time
1: Use the 1st acceleration/deceleration time
2: Use the 2nd acceleration/deceleration time
3: Use the 3rd acceleration/deceleration time
4: Use the 4th acceleration/deceleration time
5: Use the auto-acceleration/auto-deceleration time
 Sets the acceleration/deceleration time when stall prevention occurs at constant speed.
 Over-torque Detection (OT1)

Settings 0: Over-torque detection disabled
1: Over-torque detection during constant speed operation, continue to operate after
detection
2: Over-torque detection during constant speed operation, stop operating after
detection
3: Over-torque detection during operation, continue to operate after detection
4: Over-torque detection during operation, stop operating after detection
12-06-2
 Over-torque Detection Level (OT1)

Settings 10–250% (rated current of the motor drive)
 Over-torque Detection Time (OT1)
 Over-torque Detection (OT2)

Settings 0: Over-torque detection disabled
1: Over-torque detection during constant speed operation, continue to operate after
detection
2: Over-torque detection during constant speed operation, stop operating after
detection
3: Over-torque detection during operation, continue to operate after detection
4: Over-torque detection during operation, stop operating after detection
 Over-torque Detection Level (OT2)

 Over-torque Detection Time (OT2)

 Pr.06-05 and Pr.06-08 determine the drive’s operating mode after over-torque is detected.
 Over-torque is detected according to the following method: if the output current exceeds the over-torque
detection level (Pr.06-06, default is 150%) and also exceeds the over-torque detection time (Pr.06-07,
default is 0.1 second), the keypad displays the fault code “OT1/OT2”. If using a multi-function output
terminal for over-torque detection, the output is ON. Refer to Pr.02-11–02-22 for details.
current
5%
Pr.06-06,
Pr.06-09
Pr.06-07, 06-10
 Current Limit
Control Mode FOCPG FOCPM Default: 200
 Sets the drive’s maximum output current.
12-06-3
Electronic Thermal Relay

Settings 0: Standard motor
1: Inverter motor
2: Disabled
 Prevents self-cooled motor from overheating at low speeds. You can use an electrical thermal relay to limit
the drive’s output power.
 Electronic Thermal Characteristic

 The parameter is set by the drive’s output frequency, current and operation time for activating the I2t
electronic thermal protection function. The function is activated for 150% of the setting current in Pr.06-13.
Operation
tim e( m in)
5
3
60Hz
2
1
Load
0 50 100 150 200 fac tor (% )
 IGBT Overheat Warning (oH1)

Settings 0.0–110.0°C
 Stall Prevention Limit Level

Settings 0–100% (Refer to Pr.06-02, Pr.06-03)
 When the operating frequency is larger than Pr.01-01, Pr.06-02 = 150%, Pr.06-03 = 100% and Pr.06-15 =
80%:
Stall Prevention Level during acceleration = Pr.06-02 x Pr.06-15 = 150% x 80% = 120%.
Stall Prevention Level at constant speed = Pr.06-03 x Pr.06-15 = 100% x 80% = 80%.
Stall Prevention Level
01-01
06-02 x06-02
output frequency
06-15
frequency
01-01
12-06-4
Present Fault Record

Second Most Recent Fault Record
Third Most Recent Fault Record
Fourth Recent Fault Record
Fifth Most Recent Fault Record
Sixth Most Recent Fault Record
Control VF VFPG SVC FOCPG FOCPM Default: 0

mode
Settings 0: No fault
1: Over-current during acceleration (ocA)
2: Over-current during deceleration (ocd)
3: Over-current during constant speed (ocn)
4: Ground fault (GFF)
9: Over-voltage during constant speed (ovn)
10: Over-voltage at stop (ovS)
11: Low voltage during acceleration (LvA)
12: Low voltage during deceleration (Lvd)
13: Low voltage during constant speed (Lvn)
17: Bulk capacitor overheat (oH2)
18: Abnormal IGBT temperature detected (tH1o)
19: Abnormal bulk capacitor temperature detected (tH2o)
20: Unusual cooling fan operation (FAn)
21: Overload (oL) (150%; 1 minute, motor drive overloaded)
22: Motor overload (EoL1)
23: Reserved
25: Reserved
28: Reserved
29: Reserved
35: W-phase current detection error (cd3)
36: cc current clamp hardware error (Hd0)
37: oc (over-current) hardware error (Hd1)
12-06-5
38: ov (over-voltage) hardware error (Hd2)

39: GFF (ground fault) hardware error (Hd3)
40: Auto-tuning error on motor’s parameter (AuE)
41: Reserved
42: PG feedback error (PGF1)
44: PG feedback stall (PGF3)
46: Reserved
47: Reserved
48: Reserved
50: Emergency stop from external terminals (EF1)
51: Reserved
52: Password error after three attempts (Pcod)
53: Reserved
54: Illegal communication command (cE01)
55: Illegal communication address (cE02)
56: Communication data length error (cE03)
57: Communication attempts to write to a read-only address (cE04)
60: Brake transistor error (BF)
61–63: Reserved
64: Mechanical brake feedback error (MBF)
65: PG hardware error (PGF5)
66: Magnetic contactor error (MCF)
67: Motor output phase loss (MPHL)
68: CAN BUS disconnected (CANF)
69–71: Reserved
72: Safe torque loss (STL1)
73: PG cd hardware error (PGcd)
74: PG absolute signal error (PGHL)
75: PG Z phase signal loss (PGAF)
82: U-phase output phase loss (OPHL)
83: V-phase output phase loss (OPHL)
84: W-phase output phase loss (OPHL)
94: BTTx Fail (btt)
95: BTTx Error (bttE)
 The parameters record when the fault occurs and forces a stop. For the Lv, it records when it is operating,
or it warns without recording.
12-06-6
 Fault Output Setting Method

Settings 0: According to settings in Pr.06-22–Pr.06-25 (four sets)
1: According to the binary setting (fifteen sets)
 This parameter is used with the settings 35–38 in Pr.02-11–Pr.02-22 (multi-function output). The fault
output selections 1–4 correspond to Bit 0–3.
 This parameter provides two setting methods for the fault output.
0: Set according to the settings in Pr.06-22–Pr.06-25.
1: Set according to the binary setting. Refer to the following example for details.
Example:
Assume that:
Pr.02-13 (Multi-function output 3 R1A (Relay 3)) is set to 35 Bit0 (Pr.06-22).
Pr.02-14 (Multi-function output 4 R2A (Realy4)) is set to 36 Bit1 (Pr.06-23).
Pr.02-15 (Multi-function output 5 (MO1)) is set to 37 Bit2 (Pr.06-24).
Pr.02-16 (Multi-function output 6 (MO2)) is set to 38 Bit3 (Pr.06-25).
Also assume that external fault (EF) outputs with the following signal: R1A = 1, R2A = 1, MO1 = 0 and
MO2 = 1. The corresponding Bit 3–0 is 1011.
Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Fault Code
- - - - 0: No fault
0 0 0 1
0 0 1 0
0 0 1 1 13: Low voltage during constant speed (Lvn)
17: Bulk capacitor overheat (oH2)
0 1 0 0
18: Abnormal IGBT temperature detected (tH1o)
19: Abnormal bulk capacitor temperature detected (tH2o)
1 0 0 0 20: Unusual cooling fan operation (FAn)
0 1 0 1 21: Overload (oL) (150%; 1 minute, motor drive overloaded)
22: Motor overload (EoL1)
0 1 1 0
0 1 1 1
12-06-7

1 0 0 0
35: W-phase current detection error (cd3)
36: cc (current clamp) hardware error (Hd0)
37: oc (over-current) hardware error (Hd1)
38: ov (over-voltage) hardware error (Hd2)
39: GFF (ground fault) hardware error (Hd3)
1 0 0 1 40: Auto-tuning error on motor’s parameter (AUE)
41: Reserved
1 0 1 0 42: PG feedback error (PGF1)
0 1 1 1 44: PG feedback stall (PGF3)
46: Reserved
1 0 1 0
47: Reserved
48: Reserved
1 0 1 1
50: Emergency stop from external terminals (EF1)
1 0 0 1 52: Password error after three attempts (Pcod)
54: Illegal communication command (cE01)
55: Illegal communication address (cE02)
56: Communication data length error (cE03)
1 1 0 0 57: Communication attempts to write to a read-only address
(cE04)
1 0 0 0 60: Brake transistor error (BF)
61–63: Reserved
1 0 1 1
64: Mechanical brake feedback error (MBF)
1 0 0 0 65: PG hardware error (PGF5)
1 0 1 1 66: Magnetic contactor error (MCF)
1 0 1 1 67: Output phase loss (MPHL)
1 1 0 1 68: CAN BUS disconnected (CANF)
1 1 1 0 72: Safe torque loss (STL1)
1 0 0 0 73: PG cd hardware error (PGcd)
1 0 0 0 74: PG absolute signal error (PGHL)
1 0 0 0 75: PG Z phase signal loss (PGAF)
1 1 1 0 76: Safe torque output stops (STO)
1 1 1 0 77: Safe torque loss 2 (STL2)
1 1 1 0 78: Safe torque loss 3 (STL3)
1 0 1 1 82: U-phase output phase loss (OPHL)
1 0 1 1 83: V-phase output phase loss (OPHL)
1 0 1 1 84: W-phase output phase loss (OPHL)
12-06-8

- - - - 86: Leveling switch short-circuited (LSS)
- - - - 87: Leveling switch open-circuited (LSo)
1 0 0 0 94: BTTx Fail (btt)
1 0 0 0 95: BTTx Error (bttE)
 Fault Output Option 1

Settings 0–65535 sec. (refer to bit table for fault code)
 You can use these parameters with multi-function output (set Pr.02-11–Pr.02-22 to 35–38) for the specific
requirement. When a fault occurs, the corresponding terminals are activated. You must convert binary
value to decimal value when setting Pr.06-22–Pr.06-25.
Bit0 Bit1 Bit2 Bit3 Bit4 Bit5 Bit6

Fault Code
current Volt. OL SYS FBK EXI CE
0: No fault
1: Over-current during acceleration (ocA) ●
2: Over-current during deceleration (ocd) ●
3: Over-current during constant speed (ocn) ●
4: Ground fault (GFF) ●
5: IGBT short-circuit (occ) ●
6: Over-current at stop (ocS) ●
7: Over-voltage during acceleration (ovA) ●
8: Over-voltage during deceleration (ovd) ●
9: Over-voltage during constant speed (ovn) ●
10: Over-voltage at stop (ovS) ●
11: Low voltage during acceleration (LvA) ●
12: Low voltage during deceleration (Lvd) ●
13: Low voltage during constant speed (Lvn) ●
14: Low voltage at stop (LvS) ●
15: Input phase loss (PHL) ●
16: IGBT overheat (oH1) ●
17: Bulk capacitor overheat (oH2) ●
18: Abnormal IGBT temperature detected
●
(tH1o)
19: Abnormal bulk capacitor temperature
●
detected (tH2o)
20: Unusual cooling fan operation (FAn) ●
21: Overload (oL) (150%; 1 minute, motor
●
drive overloaded)
22: Motor overload (EoL1) ●
23: Reserved
24: Motor PTC overheat (oH3) ●
12-06-9

Fault Code
25: Reserved
26: Over-torque 1 (ot1) ●
27: Over-torque 2 (ot2) ●
28: Reserved
29: Reserved
30: Memory writing error (cF1) ●
31: Memory reading error (cF2) ●
32: Isum current detection error (cd0) ●
33: U-phase current detection error (cd1) ●
34: V-phase current detection error (cd2) ●
35: W-phase current detection error (cd3) ●
36: cc (current clamp) hardware error (Hd0) ●
37: oc (over-current) hardware error (Hd1) ●
38: ov (over-voltage) hardware error (Hd2) ●
39: GFF (ground fault) hardware error (Hd3) ●
40: Auto-tuning error on motor’s parameter
●
(AUE)
41: Reserved ●
42: PG feedback error (PGF1) ●
43: PG feedback loss (PGF2) ●
44: PG feedback stall (PGF3) ●
45: PG slip error (PGF4) ●
46: Reserved ●
47: Reserved ●
48: Reserved ●
49: External fault input (EF) ●
50: Emergency stop from external terminals
●
(EF1)
51: Reserved
52: Password error after three attempts
●
(Pcod)
53: Reserved
54: Illegal communication command (cE01) ●
55: Illegal communication address (cE02) ●
56: Communication data length error (cE03) ●
57: Communication attempts to write to a
●
read-only address (cE04)
58: Modbus transmission time-out (cE10) ●
59: Keypad transmission time-out (cP10) ●
60: Brake transistor error (BF) ●
61–62: Reserved
63: Reserved ●
64: Mechanical brake feedback error (MBF) ●
65: PG hardware error (PGF5) ●
66: Magnetic contactor error (MCF) ●
67: Output phase loss (MPHL) ●
12-06-10

Fault Code
68: CAN BUS disconnected (CANF) ●
72: Safe torque loss (STL1) ●
73: PG cd hardware error (PGcd) ●
74: PG absolute signal error (PGHL) ●
75: PG Z phase signal loss (PGAF) ●
76: Safe torque output stops (STO) ●
77: Safe torque loss 2 (STL2) ●
78: Safe torque loss 3 (STL3) ●
82: U-phase output phase loss (OPHL) ●
83: V-phase output phase loss (OPHL) ●
84: W-phase output phase loss (OPHL) ●
94: BTTx Fail (btt) ●
95: BTTx Error (bttE) ●
 PTC (Positive Temperature Coefficient) Detection Action

 Sets the action after detecting PTC.
 PTC Level
 Sets the PTC level. 100% PTC level corresponds to the maximum analog input value.
 PTC Detection Filter Time

 See Parameter Group 03 Analog Input/ Output Parameters for details.
Phase Loss Detection of Drive Output at Start-up (MPHL)

Settings 0: Disable
1: Enable
 1: Auto-detect whether the connection between the drive and motor is normal whenever the drive runs. If
an error occurs to the connection between the drive and the motor (broken or loose wiring) or there is no
output for the drive’s any or all of the three phases, the drive displays fault code “67” to indicate motor
output phase loss.
12-06-11
Accumulated Drive Power-on Time at the First Fault (min.)

Accumulated Drive Power-on Time at the Second Fault (min.)
Accumulated Drive Power-on Time at the Third Fault (min.)
Accumulated Drive Power-on Time at the Fourth Fault (min.)
Accumulated Drive Power-on Time at the Fifth Fault (min.)
Accumulated Drive Power-on Time at the Sixth Fault (min.)
Control Mode VF VFPG SVC FOCPG Default: Read only
Settings 0–65535 min.
Accumulated Drive Power-on Time at the First Fault (day)

Accumulated Drive Power-on Time at the Second Fault (day)
Accumulated Drive Power-on Time at the Third Fault (day)
Accumulated Drive Power-on Time at the Fourth Fault (day)
Accumulated Drive Power-on Time at the Fifth Fault (day)
Accumulated Drive Power-on Time at the Sixth Fault (day)
Control Mode VF VFPG SVC FOCPG Default: Read only
Settings 0–65535 day
 Fault and Warning Action

Settings Bit 0 = 0: Display Lv fault and coast to stop
Bit 0 = 1: Display Lv warn and coast to stop
Bit 1= 0: Fan lock, fault and coast to stop
Bit 1 = 1: Fan lock, warn and continue operation
Bit 2 = 0: Software GFF protection enabled
Bit 2 = 1: Software GFF protection disabled
Voltage of Emergency Power

Settings 24.0–375.0 VDC
48.0–750.0 VDC
 This parameter works with setting 43 (EPS function) for Pr.02-01–Pr.02-08 (multi-function input
commands).
Emergency Power (EPS) Mode Operation Speed

 Emergency Power (EPS) ON Operation Direction

12-06-12
Settings 0: Run according to current command

1: Run according to the operation direction of power generation mode, and execute
the power generation direction detection when in power generation mode.
2: After determining the power generation direction, the host controller sends a
running direction command. (When at STOP, the direction of power generation
mode (MO = 32) confirms and the direction of power generation mode does not
remain.) Execute the power generation direction detection every time.
3: After determining the power generation direction, the host controller sends a
running direction command. (When at STOP, the direction of power generation
mode (MO =32) confirms and the direction of power generation mode remains.)
Execute the power generation direction detection one time.
4: Run according to the operation direction of power generation mode, and execute
the power generation direction detection when in normal mode.
 Pr.06-46 is enabled when the external terminal detects the emergency power signal EPS (MI=43).
 When you set Pr.06-46 to 1 and a forward/reverse run command is given, the drive checks for the
elevator loading and operates in the power regeneration direction (the motor is in power generating
status). The drive uses and operates in the direction that was detected as its power regeneration
direction. For safety, the drive does not operate in user command direction to prevent emergency power
voltage drop (EPS).
 When you set Pr.06-46 to 4 (motor with gear box, for IM):
1. When the normal mode runs to the largest power factor angel, the results are saved in Pr.06-69.
2. Compare the power factor angle detected by the power generation direction with Pr.06-68 setting
value, if the value is larger than Pr.06-68, the current direction is saved in Pr.06-70.
3. When in emergency power mode, the drive runs according to the Pr.06-70 operation direction.
 VF and SVC control modes: In the time setting in Pr.06-47, the drive detects the elevator loading status by
performing forward/reverse run. Then the elevator operates in the power regeneration direction (the motor
is in power generating status). Refer to the diagram below for the Auto-Detection Timing Graph.
Drive's DC volt age Low voltage level

Emergency DC voltage
Operation comma nd
ON
FWD /REV
Emergency pow er ON
det ect ion MI= 43 06-47 06-44
Power generation Operation spe ed
direction search of enege ncy power
time
Output F requ ency Ref er to auto-det ection

time graph f or more d etail
Drive is ready ON 07-03
MO=9 DC brake t ime
Power generation MO=31 ON
direction searching
ON
Power generation MO=32
direction
12-06-13
C F C F C F
A B D E B D E B E G
Output Frequency
Motor's Elec tro-

magnetic Valve
DC Brak ing
Mec hani cal Brake
Up/Down Command
A Pr.02-31: Magnetic Contactor Contracting Delay E Pr.02-30: Brake Engage Delay Time when
Time between Drive and Motor Elevator Stops
B Pr.02-29: Brake Release Delay Time when Elevator F Pr.07-04: DC Brake Stopping Time
Starts G Pr.02-32: Magnetic Contactor Release
C Pr.07-03: DC Brake Activation Time Delay Time between Drive and
D Pr.06-47: Power Generation Direction Search Time Motor
Auto-detection Timing Diagram

 FOCPG/PM Control Mode: In the time setting in Pr.06-47, the drive remains at zero-speed and it is able
to determine the elevator loading without performing forward/reverse run. Then the elevator operates in
the power regeneration direction (the motor is in power generating status). Refer to the diagram below
for the Auto-Detection Timing Graph.
Drive's DC vo lt age Low voltage level

Emergency DC voltage
Operation comma nd
ON
F WD /REV
Emergency pow er ON
det ect ion MI= 43 07 -0 3
DC brake t ime 06 -4 4
Operation spe ed
of enege ncy power
Output F requ ency
06 -4 7
Drive is ready ON Power Generatio n Dire ction
MO=9 Searching Time
ON
direction searching
ON
direction
12-06-14
 Power Generation Direction Search Time

Power Capacity of Emergency Power (EPS)

Settings 0.0–100.0 kVA
 When using emergency power (EPS), you must set the parameter to the required power capacity for the
emergency power, and then the AC motor drive calculates the acceptable elevator speed (Pr.06-44) with
the following equation.
I motor _ rated = 05 − 01 08 − 01 (PM Motor)
 (Induction Motor)/
06 − 48 × 0.5
Veps _ max =
3 × I motor _ rated
Veps _ max
f eps _ lim it = × 01 − 01
01 − 02
When the Frequency command > fEPS, the operation speed of emergency power (EPS) is fEPS.
When the Frequency command ≤ fEPS, the operation speed of emergency power (EPS) is set according
to the current Frequency command.
 Power Factor Angle Level for Power Generation Direction

Settings 0.0–150.0〫
 During operation, if the largest power factor angle is larger than Pr.06-68 setting value, the power
generation direction is the current operation direction.
Reference Level for Power Factor Angle during Operation

Settings -200.0–200.0〫
 The largest power factor angle during operation.
Power Generation Direction

Settings 0: FWD
1: REV
 UPS Output Delay Time

UPS Stops Output Delay Time

12-06-15
 Pr.06-71: At power failure, the contactor sends a MI signal to inform the drive to activate UPS. Then, the
drive sends a MO signal to activate the UPS contactor after Pr.06-71 delay time.
 Pr.06-72: After the controller deactivates the emergency power mode, it stops sending a MO signal to
deactivate the UPS power after Pr.06-72 delay time.
 Related parameters: multi-function input commands Pr.02-01–Pr.02-08 function setting 54 (Power failure
signal) and multi-function output terminals Pr.02-11–Pr.02-16 function setting 49 (Emergency power mode
action).
EPS Flow Chart
12-06-16
Mains power outage Disables FWD/REV

commands
Automatic Rescue
The host sends [EPS
Device (ARD) is ON
Enable] to [MI=43]
The host sends [EPS

Enable] to [MI=43] ARD is OFF
NO
MI=43
Check
Enable
YES
Sends FWD/REV
commands
The elevator
reaches the level
EPS Flow Chart (ARD or UPS)
The steps to set ARD/UPS as EPS are as follows:

1. Set MI = 43 (EPS function)
2. Set Pr.06-46 = EPS mode selection
3. Set Pr.06-29 = Emergency power voltage running
4. Set Pr.06-48 = Emergency power capacity running
5. Set Pr.06-47 = Power generation direction search time
6. Set Pr.06-68 = Detecting level of power factor at the direction of power generation
NOTE: ARD or UPS can automatically judge whether to cut off the power or not.
12-06-17
Mains power outage The host sends [EPS

UPS is ON
Disable] to [MI=43]
NO
Magnetic Contactor
The host sends [EPS MI=43
Enable] to [MI=43] Check
Disable
NO
NO
MI=54
Check if MI=43
power is off Check
Enable
YES
Sends FWD/REV
Pr.06-72
commands
Delay time (sec.)
Pr.06-71 The elevator

Delay time (sec.) reaches the level MO=49
is OFF
MO=49 Disables FWD/REV

is ON commands UPS is OFF
EPS Flow Chart (Battery)
The steps to set battery as EPS are as follows:

1. Set MI = 54 (Power failure signal)
2. Set MI = 43 (EPS function)
3. Set MO = 49 (Emergency power mode action)
4. Set Pr.06-46 = EPS mode selection
5. Set Pr.06-29 = Emergency power voltage running
6. Set Pr.06-48 = Emergency power capacity running
7. Set Pr.06-47 = Power generation direction search time
8. Set Pr.06-68 = Detecting level of power factor at the direction of power generation
9. Set Pr.06-71 = MO enables UPS delay time
10. Set Pr.06-72 = MO disables UPS delay time
NOTE: When using battery as EPS in an elevator system, auxiliary contact of the contactor should be used to
judge whether to cut off the power and notify the drive.
12-06-18
 STO Latch Selection

Settings 0000h: STO fault latched, resending RUN command is required
0001h: STO warning latched, resending RUN command is required
 0000h: STO fault latched, resending RUN command is required
If STO is ON in any condition and a fault occurs, it does not reset until STO is back to normal and use a
RESET command or power-on again after resending the RUN command.
 0001h: STO warning latched, resending RUN command is required
If STO is ON in any condition and a warning occurs, it does not reset until STO is back to normal and
resend the RUN command.
 0002h: STO fault latched
If STO is ON in any condition and a fault occurs, it does not reset until STO is back to normal and use a
RESET command or power-on again.
 0003h: STO warning unlatched
If STO is ON in any condition and a warning occurs, it automatically resets when STO is back to normal.
 For more information on the timing diagram, see Section 16-5.
 Make sure there is no risk, which is assessed by the elevator controller, before using the STO warning
unlatched function.
 Fault codes STL1 to STL3 are regarded as fault latched (you cannot set Pr.06-49).
 MO’s Action when Retrying after Fault

Settings 0: Output
1: No output
 Determines whether to display the fault indication when the following faults occur:
15: Input Phase loss (PHL)
12-06-19
 Two MO terminals are affected by this parameter and should be set up as:
MO = 10: Low voltage waning (LV)
MO = 11: Fault Indication
 Number of Times to Retry after Fault

Settings 0–10 times
 To determine the number of times to retry when the following faults occur:
 After every retry attempt, the number of times to retry is automatically reduced by one as displayed on the
keypad.
 The principles for the number of times to reset:
1. Reset the fault manually.
2. After running normally for 10 minutes, the motor drive returns to the prior setting.
3. The motor drive is powered on and powered off again.
 Time Interval between Retries

 Determines the time interval between retries when the following faults occur:
12-06-20

 A minimum time interval between retries is 5.5 seconds when OCx/GFF faults are triggered.
Malfunction
DC Breaking DC Breaking
RUN command (forward/reversly)
MI1 =40: Enable the motor drive
MO#12: Release the mechnical brake

Pr06-52
MO #46: Attempting to reconnect while malfunction Time interval of attempting to reconnect while malfunction
Auto - Reset
Pr02-11~Pr02-16: MO#46: Malfunction Indication
Frequency Command when the Most Recent Fault Occurred

Output Frequency when the Most Recent Fault Occurred

Output Current when the Most Recent Fault Occurred

Settings 0.00–655.35 Amps
Motor Frequency when the Most Recent Fault Occurred

Output Voltage when the Most Recent Fault Occurred

Settings 0.0–6553.5 V
DC Bus Voltage when the Most Recent Fault Occurred

Output Power when the Most Recent Fault Occurred

Output Torque when the Most Recent Fault Occurred

12-06-21
Settings 0.00–655.35%
IGBT Temperature when the Most Recent Fault Occurred

Settings -3276.8–3276.7℃
Multi-input Terminals Status when the Most Recent Fault Occurred

Settings 0000h–FFFFh
Multi-output Terminals Status when the Most Recent Fault Occurred

Motor Drive Status when the Most Recent Fault Occurred

Permanent Operation Direction Count (H)

Settings 0–60000
Permanent Operation Direction Count (L)

Settings 0–9999
Single Operation Direction Count (H)

Settings 0–20
Single Operation Direction Count (L)
Settings 0–9999
Number of Times for Single Operation Reset

Settings 0–100
Number of Times for Operation Direction

Settings 0.00–200.00 k
Function Selection for Operation Times

Settings 0–2
12-06-22
 When you set Pr.06-79 to 0:

Disable the operation direction count function and clear parameters (Pr.06-75, 06-76, and 06-78), and add
one time to the number of times for single operation reset (pr.06-77).
Enable the operation direction count function and add one time to the permanent operation direction
count and single operation direction count whenever the operation direction changes. If the single
operation direction count is larger than Pr.06-78, SERV warning code will be triggered and continues
operation.
Enable the operation direction count function and add one time to the permanent operation direction
count and single operation direction count whenever the operation direction changes. If the single
operation direction count is larger than Pr.06-78, SERV fault code will be triggered before operation.
Output Frequency when Fault 2 Occurred

DC Bus Voltage when Fault 2 Occurred

Output Current when Fault 2 Occurred

IGBT Temperature when Fault 2 Occurred

Settings -3276.8–3276.7ºC




12-06-23











12-06-24

12-06-25
12-06-26
 Brake Transistor Level
Settings 230V models: 350.0–450.0 VDC
460V models: 700.0–900.0 VDC
 Sets the DC bus voltage at which the brake transistor is activated.
Brake Transistor Hysteresis Voltage

 Used with Pr.07-00 to make the activated voltage level within range in order to prevent the brake resistor
from overheating due to frequent ON/OFF of the brake transistor caused by fluctuated DC bus voltage.
 DC Brake Current Level at Start-up

Settings 0–100% of the rated current of the motor drive
 Sets the level of the DC brake current output to the motor at start-up. When setting the DC brake current,
the rated current (Pr.00-01) is 100%. It is recommended that you start with a low DC brake current level
and then increase until you reach the proper holding torque. However, the DC brake current cannot
exceed the motor’s rated current to prevent the motor from burnout. Therefore, DO NOT use the DC brake
for mechanical retention, otherwise injury or accident may occur.
 When in FOCPG/FOCPM mode, you can enable the DC brake function without setting up this parameter.
 DC Brake Activation Time

 Sets the length of time that the DC brake current is supplied to motor when activating the drive.
 DC Brake Stopping Time

 Sets the length of time that the DC brake current is supplied to motor when stopping the drive.
12-07-1
 Start-point for DC Brake

 Determines the frequency at which the DC brake begins during deceleration. When the setting is less than
the start frequency (Pr.01-09), the start-point for the DC brake begins at the minimum frequency.
Output freque ncy
DC Brake DC Brake
Activation 07-05 Stopp in g
Time 01-09 Start-point for Time
Start
DC brake
frequen cy time during
07-0 3 stopping 07-0 4
Run /Stop OFF

ON Time
DC Brake Time
 DC Brake Proportional Gain

Settings 1–500
 Sets the output voltage gain when DC braking.
 Dwell Time at Acceleration

 Dwell Time at Deceleration

 Dwell Frequency at Acceleration

 Dwell Frequency at Deceleration

 In a heavy load situation, dwelling can temporarily stabilize the output frequency.
 Use Pr.07-07–Pr.07-10 with heavy load to prevent over-voltage or over-current.
12-07-2
Frequency
07-10
07-08 Dwell
07-09
Dwell Frequency
Dwell Time
Frequency at Decel.
07-07 at Decel.
at Accel.
Dwell Time
at Accel. Time
Dwell at accel./decel.
 Cooling Fan Control

Settings 0: Cooling fan is always ON.
1: One minute after AC motor drive stops, cooling fan is OFF.
2: AC motor drive runs and cooling fan is ON; AC motor drive stops and cooling fan
is OFF.
3: Cooling fan is ON to run when preliminary IGBT temperature (°C) reached.
4: Cooling fan is always OFF.
 Use this parameter for the fan control.
 When set to 3, the fan starts to run until the heat sink temperature is less than 40°C if temperature
exceeds 40°C.
 Torque Command
Control Mode Default: 0.0
Settings -150.0–150.0% (Pr.07-14 setting = 100%)
 This parameter sets the Torque command. When Pr.07-14 is 250% and Pr.07-12 is 100%, the actual
Torque command = 250 x 100% = 250% of the motor rated torque.
 Torque Command Source

Control Mode Default: 2
Settings 0: Use the KPC-CC01 digital keypad
1: Use the RS-485 serial communication
2: Use the analog signal (Pr.03-00)
 Specifies the Torque command source (Torque command is in Pr.07-12).
 Maximum Torque Command

Settings 0–300% of the rated motor drive torque
 Sets the maximum Torque command value (the motor rated torque is 100%).
 Torque Command Filter Time

Control Mode Default: 0.000
12-07-3
 When the setting is too long, the control is stable but the control response is delayed. When the setting is
too short, the response is quick but the control may be unstable. Adjust the setting according to your
control and response situation.
Speed Limit
Settings 0: Use the settings in Pr.07-17 and Pr.07-18
1: Use the Frequency command source (Pr.00-14)
torque torque torque
frequency frequency frequency
07-18 07-17 07-18 00-14 00-14 07-17

Pr.07-16=0 07-16=1 07-16=1
Running/opposite running When it is forward running, When it is reverse running,
direction are running direction is limited running direction is limited
limited by Pr.07-17 by Pr.00-14 by Pr.07-17
and Pr.07-18. opposite running direction opposite running direction
is limited by Pr.07-18. is limited by Pr.00-14.
 Torque Mode + Speed Limit

Settings 0–120%
 Torque Mode - Speed Limit

Settings 0–120%
 Limits the speed for forward and reverse running in torque mode (Pr.01-00 Maximum Output Frequency =
100%).
 Torque Offset Source

Control Mode SVC FOCPG FOCPM Default: 0
Settings 0: Disable
1: Use the analog input (Pr.03-00)
2: Use the torque offset setting (Pr.07-20)
3: Use the external terminals (by Pr.07-21–Pr.07-23)
 Specifies the torque offset source.
 When set to 3, the torque offset sources are Pr.07-21, Pr.07-22 and Pr.07-23 according to the multi-
function input terminal settings (31, 32 or 33).
Pr.02-01–Pr.02-08 Pr.02-01–Pr.02-08 Pr.02-01–Pr.02-08
Torque offset
is set to 31 is set to 32 is set to 33
OFF OFF OFF N/A
OFF OFF ON 07-23
OFF ON OFF 07-22
OFF ON ON 07-23+07-22
ON OFF OFF 07-21
ON OFF ON 07-21+07-23
ON ON OFF 07-21+07-22
ON ON ON 07-21+07-22+07-23
12-07-4
 Torque Offset Setting

Control Mode SVC FOCPG FOCPM Default: 0.0
Settings 0.0–100.0% (motor drive rated torque)
 Sets the torque offset. The motor rated torque is 100%.
 High Torque Offset

 Middle Torque Offset

 Low Torque Offset

 When set to 3, the torque offset sources are Pr.07-21, Pr.07-22 and Pr.07-23 according to the multi-
function input terminal settings (31, 32 or 33). The motor rated torque is 100%.
 Forward Motor Torque Limit

 Forward Regenerative Torque Limit
 Reverse Motor Torque Limit
 Reverse Regenerative Torque Limit
Settings 0–300% (rated torque of the motor drive)
 The motor rated torque is 100%. The settings for Pr.07-24–Pr.07-27 compare with Pr.03-00=7, 8, 9, 10.
The minimum of the comparison result is torque limit. The diagram below illustrates the torque limit.
12-07-5
Po sitiv e
to rque
Rev ers e rege nerat iv e mo de Forward mo tor mode
06-1 1 c urrent limit 06-1 1 c urrent limit
Ex te rnal ana lo g t erminals Ex te rnal an alog t erminals The lev el o f t orque limit will b e
Pr. 03-00~ 02 P r. 03-00 ~02 th e min. va lu e of fo llowing thre e v alues
7: pos itiv e to rque limit 7: pos itiv e t orque limit 1. torq ue limit o f P r.07-2 4 to Pr. 07-26
9: regen erativ e t orque limit 10: pos itive /neg ativ e t orque limit 2. Torque limit of ex terna l analog termina ls
10: pos itiv e/n egat iv e torqu e limit 3. Pr. 06-11 curre nt limit
Pr. 07-27 Pr. 07-24

Rev ers e rege nerat iv e Forwa rd moto r
to rque limit t orque limit
s peed Q ua dr an t II Q ua dr an t I s peed
Q ua dr an t III Q ua dr an t IV
Pr. 07-26 Pr. 07-25

Rev ers e mot or Forward reg enera tive
to rque limit t orque limit
Ex te rnal an alog t erminals

Ex te rnal ana lo g t erminals Pr.0 3-00~ 03-02
Pr. 03-00~ 03-0 2 8: neg ativ e t orque limit
8: nega tiv e to rque limit 9: Regen erativ e t orque limit
10: pos itiv e/n egat iv e torqu e limit 10: pos itive /neg ativ e t orque limit
06-1 1 c urrent limit 06-1 1 c urrent limit

Rev ers e mot or mod e Nega tive Forward re genera tive mode
to rque
 Emergency Stop (EF) & Forced Stop

Settings 0: Coast to stop
1: According to deceleration Time 1
5: According to Pr.01-31
 When the multi-function input terminal is set to 10 or 18 and is ON, the drive operates according to this
parameter setting.
 Time for Decreasing Torque at Stop

Control Mode FOCPG FOCPM Default: 0.000
 When the elevator is stopped and the mechanical brake is engaged, the drive stops output. At the same
time, it produces noise from the reacting force between the motor and the mechanical brake. Use this
parameter to decrease this reacting force and lower the noise.
 Sets the time when torque decreases from 300% to 0%.
RUN/STOP
i 100%
x x
00-01 300% (07-29)=t
i
0%
t
12-07-6
 DC Brake Current Level at Stop

Settings 0–100% of the rated current of the motor drive
 Sets the level of the DC brake current output to the motor at stop. When setting the DC brake current, the
rated current (Pr.00-01) is 100%. It is recommended that you start with a low DC brake current level and
then increase until you reach the proper holding torque. However, the DC brake current cannot exceed the
motor’s rated current to prevent the motor from burnout. Therefore, DO NOT use the DC brake for
mechanical retention, otherwise injury or accident may occur.
 When in FOCPG/FOCPM control mode, you can enable the DC brake without setting up Pr.07-30.
 07-31 Drive Output Torque

 Measurement: Make mechanical brake engage, and enable drive run 3 to 5 seconds. At this time, output
torque value will be displayed on built-in keyboard panel (set Pr.00-04=8). Then, enter the value into
Pr.07-31.
 If the value displays too fast to view, increase Pr.11-21 (Filter Time Display on KPED-LE01).
07-32 Brake Torque Test Function

0: No function
Settings 1: Brake torque test
 Brake torque test action:
1. Make sure the drive’s output torque value has been entered (as described in Pr.07-31).
2. Enter Pr.07-36 and Pr.07-37 according to actual conditions
3. Set Pr.07-32=1. Press RUN key on digital keypad KPC-CC01 or execute inspection upward operation
or downward operation in manual mode (inspection) (set Pr.00-15=1) so that brake torque test can be
run immediately.
4. In the process of brake torque test, warning code bttA (BTTx Testing) will be triggered. Increase 10%
of Pr.07-31 setting value for each time, and a maximum test is 10 times (BTT1 to BTT10). Once the
test succeeds, warning code bttS (BTTx Success) will be displayed.
 Multi-function input terminal MI=57 can also be used to enable the brake torque test.
07-33 Brake Torque Test Distance

Settings 0–65535 ppr
07-34 Brake Torque Test Time

12-07-7
07-35 Most Recent Output Torque Ratio before Brake Torque Test Failure
 Records the most recent output torque ratio before brake torque test failure
 For example: When brake torque test fails in the fifth time, the output torque ratio of brake torque test
failed in the fourth times, that is 0.40, will be displayed.
 07-36 Minimum Output Torque Ratio Allowed during Brake Torque Test
 For example: When brake torque test fails in the fifth times, and the output torque ratio of brake torque test
failed in the fourth times Pr.07-35 is smaller than Pr.07-36, it means the brake torque test fails, and fault
code btt (BTTx Fail) will be triggered on display.
 07-37 Maximum Output Torque Ratio Allowed during Brake Torque Test
 For example: When brake torque test fails in the fifth time,
1. If the output torque ratio of brake torque test in the fifth time Pr.07-35 ≥ Pr.07-36, then brake torque
test succeeds, warning code bttS (BTTx Success) will be displayed on keypad.
2. If the output torque ratio of brake torque test in the fifth time Pr.07-35 < Pr.07-36, then brake torque
test is valid, warning code bttn (BTTx Success) will be displayed on keypad. In this case, check if it is
necessary to adjust Pr.07-37 and execute the brake torque test again.
12-07-8
08 PM Parameters
Motor Auto-tuning
Control Mode FOCPM Default: 0
1: Only for an unloaded motor; auto-measures the angle between magnetic pole
and PG origin (Pr.08-09)
2: Auto-tuning PM parameters (suggested to lock the brake)
3: Auto-measures the angle between magnetic pole and PG origin (Pr.08-09)
 Auto-tuning process: 2, and then 1 or 3.
Set Pr.08-00 to 1 to 3, and then press the RUN key on the digital keypad KPC-CC01 (Pr.00-15=2) to start
auto-tuning. Or when the drive is in manual mode (inspection), run the upward operation or downward
operation (Pr.00-15=1) to start auto-tuning immediately. In the process of auto-tuning, an “Auto tuning”
warning continuously displays on the digital keypad until it is finished.
 Pr.08-00=2: Motor auto-tuning is static test:
2. Enter the correct values for Pr.01-01, Pr.01-02, Pr.08-01, Pr.08-02, Pr.08-03 and Pr.08-04. Refer to
motor capacity to set the acceleration/deceleration time.
3. Note that the motor will run! The shaft needs to be locked by an external force.
4. After auto-tuning is finished, check if Pr.08-05, Pr.08-07, and Pr.08-08 all have values.
 Pr.08-00=1: Auto-measures the angle between the magnetic pole and the PG origin. Pay attention to the
following notes when measuring: (dynamic test)
1. Unload before auto-tuning.
2. If the drive controls the brake, the drive can auto-tune according to the normal sequence after you
complete the wiring and set the brake control parameters.
3. If the host controller controls the brake, make sure that the brake is in release status before auto-
tuning.
 Pr.08-00=3: Auto-measures the angle between the magnetic pole and the PG origin. Pay attention to the
following notes when measuring: (static test)
1. The motor can be loaded or unloaded before auto-tuning.
2. See the reference table for auto-tuning for Pr.10-00 (PG Signal Type).
3. If the drive controls the brake, the drive can auto-tune according to the normal sequence after you
complete the wiring and set the brake control parameters.
4. If the host controller controls the brake, make sure that the brake is in release status before auto-
tuning.
5. Make sure the setting for Pr.10-02 is correct. Incorrectly setting Pr.10-02 causes incorrect positioning
of the magnetic pole and results in the wrong angle between the magnetic pole and PG origin.
NOTE:
 The entered rated speed cannot be larger than or equal to 120 f/p.
 Note that if the contactor and brake are not controlled by the AC motor drive, release it manually.
12-08-1
 Set Pr.08-00 to 1 (unloaded motor) for accurate calculation. If you need to execute this function with a
loaded motor, balance the carriage before execution.
 If you do not balance the carriage in a measured environment, you can execute this function with a
loaded motor by setting Pr.08-00 = 3. It will have a difference of 15–30o for different encoder types.
 “Auto Tuning Err” displays on the digital keypad when stopping due to an AC motor drive fault or human
error, which means the detection fails. Check the wiring connections of the AC motor drive If “PG Fbk
Error” displays on the digital keypad, change the setting of Pr.10-02 (if set to 1, change it to 2). If “PG
Fbk Loss” displays on the digital keypad, check the feedback of Z-phase pulse.
Motor Rated Current

Control Mode FOCPM Unit: Amp
Default: #.##
Settings (40–120%) * Pr.00-01 Amps
 Sets according to the motor rated current as indicated on the motor nameplate. The default is 90% of the
rated current.
 Example: Suppose the rated current for 7.5 HP (5.5 kW) models is 25 A and the default is 22.5 A. In this
case, the current range is from 10 A (25 * 40%) to 30 A (25 * 120%).
 Motor Rated Power

Control Mode FOCPM Default: #.##
 Sets the motor rated power. The default is the power of the drive.
 Motor Rated Speed (rpm)

Settings 0–65535 rpm
 Sets the motor rated speed according to the motor nameplate.
Number of Motor Poles

Settings 2–96
Motor Rs
Control Mode FOCPM Default: 0.000
Settings 0.000–65.535 Ω
Motor Ld
Motor Lq
Settings 0.0–6553.5 mH
12-08-2
Back Electromotive Force

Settings 0.0–6553.5 Vrms
 Sets the back electromotive force (phase-phase RMS value) when the motor is operated at the rated
speed.
 You can get the RMS value by setting Pr.08-00 = 2 (Motor Auto-tuning).
Offset Angle between Magnetic Pole and PG Origin

Settings 0.0–360.0°
 The offset angle between the magnetic pole and PG origin (measured by auto-tuning).
Magnetic Pole Re-orientation

Settings 0: Disable
1: Enable
 Use with Pr.11-00 bit15 = 1.
 Use this function to search for the magnetic pole position only for permanent magnet motors.
 When there is no origin-adjustment for the encoder (Pr.08-09 is 360.0), it only ensures that the motor
operation efficiency can be up to 86% of the best efficiency. In this situation, if you need to improve the
operation efficiency, cycle the power or set Pr.08-10 to 1 to measure the magnetic pole orientation again.
12-08-3
12-08-4
When using the communication interface, the diagram on the
right shows the communication port pin definitions. It is
recommended that you connect the AC motor drive to your PC by
using Delta IFD6530 or IFD6500 as a communication converter.
For details on Modbus communication protocol, see Appendix B.
Modbus Protocol.

 09-00 Communication Address
Default: 1
Settings 1–254
 Sets the communication address for the drive if the AC motor drive is controlled through RS-485
serial communication. The communication address for each AC motor drive must be unique.
 09-01 Transmission Speed

Settings 4.8–115.2kbps
 Sets the transmission speed between the RS-485 master (PLC, PC, etc.) and the AC motor drive.
 09-02 Transmission Fault Treatment

2: Reserved
3: No action and no display
 Determines the treatment if a transmission time-out error (such as disconnection) occurs during
communication.
 When Pr.09-02 is set to 1 (Fault and ramp to stop), if brake or operation contactor is OFF under
the circumstance that STO or MI40 (Enable drive function) is not deactivated during deceleration,
elevator still runs even brake has engaged (brake wear), and electric arc occurs when operation
contactor is OFF.
 09-03 Time-out Detection

0.0: Disable
 Sets the communication time-out value.
 09-04 Communication Protocol

Settings 0: 7, N, 1 for ASCII
1: 7, N, 2 for ASCII
12-09-1
2: 7, E, 1 for ASCII
3: 7, O, 1 for ASCII
12: 8, N, 1 for RTU
13: 8, N, 2 for RTU
14: 8, E, 1 for RTU
15: 8, O, 1 for RTU
16: 8, E, 2 for RTU
17: 8, O, 2 for RTU
 Control by PC (Computer Link)
When using the RS-485 serial communication interface, you must specify each drives
communication address in Pr.09-00. The computer then implements control using the drive’s
individual addresses.
 Modbus ASCII (American Standard Code for Information Interchange): Each byte of data is the
combination of two ASCII characters. For example, one byte of data: 64 Hex, shown as ‘64’ in
ASCII, consists of 6 (36Hex) and 4 (34Hex).
 09-05 Response Delay Time

Settings 0.0–200.0 ms
 If the host computer does not finish the transmitting/receiving process, you can use this parameter
to set the response delay time after the AC motor drive receives communication command as
shown in the following picture.
RS-485 BUS
PC or PLC command Response Message
of the AC Drive
Handling time Response Delay Time
of the AC drive
09-06
– Direct Docking Mode Only
09-13
Control Mode VFPG FOCPG FOCPM Default: -
09-14 PDO Transmission Interval

Settings 0–65535 ms
12-09-2

In this parameter group, ASR is the abbreviation for Adjust Speed Regulator and PG is the abbreviation
for Pulse Generator.
Selection of Encoder
Control Mode VFPG FOCPG FOCPM Default: 0
1: ABZ
2: ABZ+Hall
3: SIN/COS + Sinusoidal
4: SIN/COS + Endat
5: SIN/COS
6: SIN/COS + Hiperface
 When you set Pr.10-02 to 3, 4 or 5, you can set Pr.10-00 only to 0, 1 or 2, and you cannot use 3, 4, 5 and
6.
 When you set Pr.10-00 to 3, the encoder has one sine and one cosine signal for each revolution. The signal
must be: 0.75–1.2 Vpp for the amplitude with phase angle 90°±5 elec. (E.g. ERN 1185 ERN 1387)
 When you set Pr.10-00 to 4 or 6, wait for two seconds after applying the power before executing the RUN
command.
 When you set Pr.10-00 to 5, you must set Pr.08-09 to 360.
 Detection of the magnetic pole:
(1) 1 or 5: The AC motor drive outputs a short circuit to detect the position of the magnetic pole. At this
moment, the motor generates a little noise.
(2) 2: The AC motor drive detects the position of the magnetic pole with the UVW encoder signal.
(3) 3: The AC motor drive detects the position of the magnetic pole with the sine encoder signal.
(4) 4 or 6: The AC motor drive detects the position of the magnetic pole with the communication encoder
signal.
 The table below shows the correspondence among encoder, PG card and auto-tuning
PG Signal Type Applicable PG Card
PG Signal Type Pr.08-00=1 Pr.08-00=3
Setting x=2, 3,…
Pr.10-00=1 A, B, Z EMED-PGAB/ABD-x N/A N/A
Pr.10-00=2 A, B, Z+U, V, W EMED-PGABD- x Rolling test*1 Rolling test*1
Pr.11-00 Bit9=0:
SIN/COS + Sinusoidal Rolling test*1
Pr.10-00=3 EMED-PGHSD-x Rolling test*1
(e.g. ERN1185, ERN1387) Pr.11-00 Bit9=1:
Static test*1
SIN/COS + Endat 2.1
Pr.10-00=4 EMED-PGSD-x Dynamic test*1 Static test*1
(e.g. ECN1313, ECN413)
Pr.10-00=5 SIN/COS EMED-PGHSD-x N/A N/A
SIN/COS + Hiperface
Pr.10-00=6 EMED-PGHSD-x Dynamic test*1 Static test*1
(e.g. SRS50/60)
*1 Static: Brake engaged, no motor running. Dynamic: Brake released, motor rotates less than one revolution.
Rolling: Brake released, motor rotates more than one revolution.
12-10-1
Encoder PPR
Settings 1–25000
 Sets the encoder pulses per revolution (PPR).
Encoder Input Type Setting

Settings 0: Disable
1: Phase A leads in a forward run command and phase B leads in a reverse run
command
FWD REV
A
For war d
running B
2: Phase B leads in a forward run command and phase A leads in a reverse run
command
FWD REV
A
For war d
running B
3: Phase A is a pulse input and phase B is a direction input. (low input=reverse
direction, high input=forward direction)
FWD REV
A
For war d
running B
4: Phase A is a pulse input and phase B is a direction input. (low input=forward
direction, high input=reverse direction)
FWD REV
A
For war d
running B
5: Single-phase input
For war d
running A
 When Pr.10-00 is set to 3, 4, 5 or 6, Pr.10-02 can be only set to 0, 1 or 2, and you cannot use 3, 4 and 5.
 You must enter the correct pulse type for stable control.
 Encoder Feedback Signal Fault Action (PGF1, PGF2)

12-10-2
 Encoder Feedback Signal Fault Detection Time

 When there is a PG loss, encoder signal error, pulse signal setting error or signal error, if time exceeds the
setting for this parameter (Pr.10-04), the PG signal error occurs. Refer to Pr.10-03 for the encoder
feedback signal fault action.
 Encoder Stall Level (PGF3)

Control Mode VFPG SVC FOCPG FOCPM Default: 115
Settings 0–120%
0: Disable
 Determines the maximum encoder feedback signal allowed before a fault occurs. (The maximum output
frequency Pr.01-00 = 100%.)
 Encoder Stall Detection Time (maximum output frequency Pr.01-00 = 100%)

Control Mode VFPG SVC FOCPG FOCPM Default: 0.1
 Encoder Slip Range (PGF4) (maximum output frequency Pr.01-00 = 100%)

Settings 0–50%
0: Disable
 Encoder Slip Detection Time (maximum output frequency Pr.01-00=100%)

Control Mode VFPG SVC FOCPG FOCPM Default: 0.5
 Encoder Stall and Slip Error Action (maximum output frequency Pr.01-00 =
100%)
 When the difference of (rotation speed－motor frequency) exceeds the Pr.10-07 setting, and the detection
time exceeds Pr.10-08 or the motor frequency exceeds Pr.10-05 setting, the drive starts to count time. If
the detection time exceeds Pr.10-06, the encoder feedback signal error occurs. Refer to Pr.10-09 encoder
stall and slip error action.
Mode Selection for UVW Input

Settings 0: Z signal is at the falling edge of U-phase
1: Z signal is at the rising edge of U-phase
12-10-3
 0: The operation is U->V->W, Z signal is at the falling edge of U-phase.

 1: The operation is U->V->W, Z signal is at the rising edge of U-phase.
Pr.10- 10=1
Z Signal
Z Signal
Pr.10- 10=0
 ASR (Auto Speed Regulation) Control (P) of Zero Speed

 ASR (Auto Speed Regulation) Control (I) of Zero Speed

 ASR (Auto Speed Regulation) Control (P) 1

 ASR (Auto Speed Regulation) Control (I) 1

 ASR (Auto Speed Regulation) Control (P) 2

 ASR (Auto Speed Regulation) Control (I) 2

 ASR 1/ASR2 Switch Frequency

0: Disable
 ASR P determines the proportional control and associated gain (P). ASR I determines the integral control
and associated gain (I).
 When you set the integral time to 0, it is disabled. Pr.10-17 defines the switch frequency for the ASR1
(Pr.10-13, Pr.10-14) and ASR2 (Pr.10-15, Pr.10-16).
12-10-4
PI
10-15
10-16
10-13
10-14
10-11
10-12
10-20 10-21
Hz
0Hz 10-17
 When using multi-function input terminals to switch ASR1/ASR2, the following diagram shows the
operation.
Setting multi-function input terminal to 17
(ASR1/ASR2 switch)
OFF ON OFF
ASR 1 ASR 2 ASR 1
0.1 sec 0.1 sec
 ASR Primary Low Pass Filter Gain

 Defines the ASR command filter time.
 When Pr.11-00 is set to 1 ASR auto-tuning, Pr.10-18 is invalid.
 Zero Speed Position Control Gain (P)

Settings 0.00–655.00%
 When Pr.11-00 is set to bit 7=1, Pr.10-19 is valid
 Low Speed ASR Width Adjustment

 High Speed ASR Width Adjustment

 These two parameters set the width of the slope of the ASR command during zero speed to low speed or
Pr.10-17 to high speed.
12-10-5
PI
10-15
10-16
10-13
10-14
10-11
10-12
10-20 10-21
0Hz 10-17
Hz
 Zero Speed Position Control Holding Time

 When Pr.11-00 is set to bit 7=1, Pr.10-22 is valid.
 Sets this parameter when elevator jerk at start-up or carriage inversion occurs. In principle, the holding
time cannot exceed the time when frequency starts output.
 Zero Speed Position Control Low Pass Filter Time

 Zero Speed Position Control Activation Mode Selection

Settings 0: After the brake release set in Pr.02-29
1: After the brake signal input (Pr.02-01–02-08 is set to 42)
 When Pr.10-24 = 0, use the zero speed control with Pr.02-29 (refer to the explanations in Pr.02-32).
 Elevator Leveling (Zero Speed Gain P)

 Elevator Leveling (Zero Speed Integral I)

 Elevator Starting (Zero Speed Gain P)

 Elevator Starting (Zero Speed Integral I)

12-10-6
01-25=S2 01-26=S3
01-12 Pr01-13 Decel. Time 1
Accel. Time 1
S 4 01-29 S5 Switch Frequency
27 =
01 -
01-31 Decel. Time w/o RUN command
Output Frequency
01-24=S1 01-30=S5
DC Brake
07-03 DC Brake Activation Time 07-04 DC Brake Stopping Time
MO = 12
Release the
Mechanical Brake
02-29 Brake Release Delay 02-30
Time when Elevator Starts
10-22
11-00 bit 7=1 Zero speed Position Holding Time
Zero-Speed 10-27/28
Position Control
Elevator Starts Zero Speed PI 10-25/ 10-26
10-11/ 10-12 Elevator Leveling PI
Auto Speed Regulation Control of
Zero Speed PI
 PG Card Frequency Division Output

Settings 0–31
 Setting to 0 is the same as setting to 1:
0: No frequency division
1: Frequency division by 1 (remains the same as the original frequency)
 PG Card Frequency Division Output Type

Control Mode VFPG FOCPG FOCPM Default: 0000h
Settings 0000h–0008h
 See Chapter 7 for more information about PG cards.
 PG Card C+/C-
Control Mode VFPG FOCPG FOCPM Default: 0000h
Settings 0000h–0001h
 When using a Heidenhain ERN1387 encoder, use Pr.10-31 to adjust the definition of the Delta PG card
EMED-PGHSD-3’s terminal 10 and terminal 11 (see the table below). Refer to p.7-17 for detailed terminal
descriptions.
 Delta PG card: EMED-PGHSD-3 (D-sub Terminal #)
5 4 3 2 1
10 9 8 7 6
15 14 13 12 11
Heidenhain ERN1387
Terminal # Pr.10-31=0000h Pr.10-31=0001h
10 C- C+
11 C+ C-
 After connecting Delta PG card EMED-PGHSD-4 according to the descriptions in Section 7-4, you must
set Pr.10-31=0001h.
12-10-7
Over-acceleration Level

Settings 0.0–20.0 m/s²
Over-acceleration Detection Time

Over-acceleration Detection Selection

Settings 0: Always detect

1: Detect during operation
12-10-8
System Control
Control Mode FOCPG FOCPM Default: 0000h
Settings Bit 0 = 0: No function
Bit 0 = 1: ASR auto-tuning; PDFF enabled
Bit 7 = 1: Zero speed position control is enabled
Bit 9 = 0: Dynamic PG origin auto-tuning with load (support by PGHSD-x)
Bit 9 = 1: Static PG origin auto-tuning with load by enabling PGHSD-x
Bit 15 = 0: When power is applied, detect the position of the magnetic pole again
Bit 15 = 1: When power is applied, start from the magnetic pole position of the
previous power failure
 Bit 0 = 1: Enable the PDFF function and the system generates an ASR setting. At this time, Pr.10-11–
Pr.10-16 are invalid and Pr.11-09–Pr.11-10 are valid.
12-11-1
 When Bit 7 = 1, zero speed position control is enabled (refer to Chapter 12 Parameter Group 02 Elevator
Timing Diagram). Pr.10-22 is valid only when bit 7 is set to 1, and this function only supports PM motors.
 When Bit 9 = 1, valid only when Pr.10-00 is set to 3, and the mechanical brake must be in engaged status.
 Elevator Speed
Settings 0.10–4.00 m/s
 Traction Sheave Diameter

Settings 100–2000 mm
 Gear Ratio
Suspension Ratio
Settings 0 = 1: 1
1 = 2: 1
2 = 4:1
3 = 8:1

Mechanical Inertial Ratio
Settings 1–300%
 You can calculate the load inertia according to the settings of motor parameters, Pr.11-02 Traction
Sheave Diameter, Pr.11-14 Motor Current at Acceleration and Pr.11-15 Carriage Acceleration. You can
use this parameter to adjust the mechanical inertia ratio.
 Mechanical inertia reference value (%):
12-11-2
Load /
IM PM
Motor
Without load 40 10
With load 80–120 40
 Zero speed Bandwidth

Settings 1–40 Hz
 Low speed Bandwidth

Settings 1–40 Hz
 High speed Bandwidth

Settings 1–40 Hz
 After estimating the inertia and setting Pr.11-00 =1 (auto-tuning), you can adjust parameters Pr.11-06,
Pr.11-07 and Pr.11-08 separately by speed response. The larger the value, the faster the response. Pr.10-
17 is the switch frequency between the low speed and high speed bandwidth.
 PDFF Gain Value

Settings 0–200%
 After you estimate and set Pr.11-00=1 (auto-tuning), use Pr.11-09/11-10 to reduce overshoot. Adjust the
PDFF gain value according to the actual situation.
 In addition to traditional PI control, it also provides the PDFF function to reduce overshoot for speed
control.
1. Get system inertia
2. Set Pr.11-00 to 1
3. Adjust Pr.11-09 and Pr.11-10 (a larger value suppresses overshoot better). Adjust according to the
actual condition.
PI
PDFF
It is recommended to disable
this function (Pr.11-09=0) for
Y/ connection switch and
ASR1/ASR2 switch application.
 Speed Feed Forward Gain

Settings 0–500
 Pr.11-09 and Pr.11-10 are enabled when Pr.11-00 is set to Bit 0 = 1.
12-11-3
 Notch Filter Depth

Settings 0–20 db
 Notch Filter Frequency
 Sets the resonance frequency of the mechanical system. Adjust it to a smaller value to suppress the
mechanical system resonance.
 A larger value improves resonance suppression function.
 The notch filter frequency is the mechanical frequency resonance.
 Keypad Display for Low Pass Filter Time

 Lowers the blinking frequency of the LCD display.
 Motor Current at Acceleration

Settings 50–200%
 Carriage Acceleration
Settings 0.20–2.00 m/s2
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
 Zero Speed Parking Bandwidth

Settings 1–40 Hz
 PWM Mode (Pulse-Width Modulation Mode)

Settings 0: DPWM Mode (Digital Pulse-Width Modulation Mode)

1: SVPWM mode (Space-Vector Pulse Width Modulation Mode)
 11-21 Filter Time Display on KPED-LE01

 Adjusts filter time displayed on built-in keyboard panel.
12-11-4
 User-defined Parameter 1
Settings 0–9999
Settings 0–9999
Settings 0–9999
Settings 0–9999
Settings 0–9999
Settings 0–9999
Settings 0–9999
Settings 0–9999
Settings 0–9999
Settings 0–9999
Settings 0–9999
12-12-1
Settings 0–9999
Settings 0–9999
Settings 0–9999
Settings 0–9999
Settings 0–9999
Settings 0–9999
Settings 0–9999
Settings 0–9999
Settings 0–9999
Settings 0–9999
Settings 0–9999
12-12-2
Settings 0–9999
Settings 0–9999
Settings 0–9999
Settings 0–9999
Settings 0–9999
Settings 0–9999
Settings 0–9999
Settings 0–9999
Settings 0–9999
Settings 0–9999
 Commonly used parameters can be defined in parameter group 12.
 Enter the parameters from group 00 to group 11 into group 12 (it saves up to 32 parameters).
 The saved values can also be the parameter addresses (but the hexadecimal value must be converted to a
decimal value).
 Examples of user-defined parameters
12-12-3
Example 1:
If you need to enter Pr.08-03 into Pr.12-00, enter 0803 into Pr.12-00. Then, the keypad displays the
setting for Pr.08-03 in Pr.13-00.
Example 2:
If you need to enter parameter addresses 2102H and 211BH with the digital keypad, convert 211BH to a
decimal value before entering (see below for details).
The setting method for 211BH:

Convert 211BH (hexadecimal) to a decimal value:
21 1B
1 x1 6 + 11 x1 6 =1 6+11= 2 7
1 0
in p ut 2 12 7
12-12-4

– View User-defined Parameters

Settings Pr.00-00–Pr.11-20
Present Fault Record

Display
0616 (Same as Pr.06-16)
Address
Motor Operation at Present Fault Time (min.)

Display
0632 (Same as Pr.06-32)
Address
Motor Operation at Present Fault Time (day)

Display
0633 (Same as Pr.06-33)
Address
Frequency Command at Present Fault

Display
0653 (Same as Pr.06-53)
Address
Output Frequency at Preset Fault

Display
0654 (Same as Pr.06-54)
Address
Output Current at Present Fault

Display
0655 (Same as Pr.06-55)
Address
Motor Frequency at Present Fault

Display
0656 (Same as Pr.06-56)
Address
12-13-1
Output Voltage at Present Fault

Display
0657 (Same as Pr.06-57)
Address
DC Bus Voltage at Present Fault

Display
0658 (Same as Pr.06-58)
Address
Output Power at Present Fault

Display
0659 (Same as Pr.06-59)
Address
Output Torque at Present Fault

Display
0660 (Same as Pr.06-60)
Address
Power Module IGBT Temperature at Present Fault

Display
0661 (Same as Pr.06-61)
Address
Multi-function Terminal Input Status at Present Fault

Display
0662 (Same as Pr.06-62)
Address
Multi-function Terminal Output Status at Present Fault

Display
0663 (Same as Pr.06-63)
Address
Drive Status at Present Fault

Display
0664 (Same as Pr.06-64)
Address
Second Most Recent Fault Record

Display
0617 (Same as Pr.06-17)
Address
12-13-2
Motor Operation at Second Most Recent Fault Time (min.)

Display
0634 (Same as Pr.06-34)
Address
Motor Operation at Second Most Recent Fault Time (day)

Display
0635 (Same as Pr.06-35)
Address
Third Most Recent Fault Record

Display
0618 (Same as Pr.06-18)
Address
Motor Operation at Third Most Recent Fault Time (min.)

Display
0636 (Same as Pr.06-36)
Address
Motor Operation at Third Most Recent Fault Time (day)

Display
0637 (Same as Pr.06-37)
Address
Fourth Most Recent Fault Record

Display
0619 (Same as Pr.06-19)
Address
Motor Operation at Fourth Most Recent Fault Time (min.)

Display
0638 (Same as Pr.06-38)
Address
Motor Operation at Fourth Most Recent Fault Time (day)

Display
0639 (Same as Pr.06-39)
Address
Fifth Most Recent Fault Record

Display
0620 (Same as Pr.06-20)
Address
12-13-3
Motor Operation at Fifth Most Recent Fault Time (min.)

Display
0640 (Same as Pr.06-40)
Address
Motor Operation at Fifth Most Recent Fault Time (day)

Display
0641 (Same as Pr.06-41)
Address
Sixth Most Recent Fault Record

Display
0621 (Same as Pr.06-21)
Address
Motor Operation at Sixth Most Recent Fault Time (min.)

Display
0642 (Same as Pr.06-42)
Address
Motor Operation at Sixth Most Recent Fault Time (day)

Display
0643 (Same as Pr.06-43)
Address
AC Motor Drive Identity Code

Display
0 (Same as Pr.00-00)
Address
Date Code Y.WKD

Display
1561 (Same as Pr.15-61)
Address
 Displays the year / week / day that the program of this firmware version is completed. For example,
20.321 indicates that the program is completed on the first day of the 32th week in year 2020.
12-13-4
Chapter 13 Warning Codes | VFD-ED
Chapter 13 Warning Codes

Warning code displays differently on digital keypad KPC-CC01 and built-in keyboard panel KPED-LE01.
Examples of their different displays show as below.
 Example of warning code shows on digital keypad KPC-CC01:
 Example of warning code shows on built-in keyboard panel KPED-LE01:
13-1
ID Display on
Display on KPC-CC01 Descriptions
No. KPED-LE01
CE01
Illegal communication command
Warning
1
CE01 Cause
Comm. Cmd. Err
Communication command error
CE02
Illegal data address
Warning
2
CE02 Cause
Data Adrr. Err
Data address error
CE03
Communication data length error
Warning
3
CE03 Cause
Data Length Err
Communication data length exceeds 1–20 characters
CE04 Attempt to write to a read-only address.

Warning
4 Cause
CE04 Communication error occurred when attempting to
Wrong Writing write values into 0x21xx, 0x22xx read-only address.
CE10
Modbus transmission time-out
Warning
5
CE10 Cause
Comm. Time Out
Communication cable error
CP10
Digital keypad KPC-CC01 transmission time-out
Warning
6
CP10 Cause
Keypad time out
Communication cable or digital keypad error
SE1 Keypad copy parameter error
Warning Cause
7
SE1 Keypad copy errors, including communication delays,
Keypad Copy Err
communication error (keypad received error FF86)
and parameter value error.
SE2
Keypad copy parameter failure
Warning
8
SE2 Cause
Keypad Copy Fail
Keypad copy done but parameter writing error
oH1
IGBT overheat warning
Warning
9
oH1 Cause
IGBT Over Heat
IGBT temperature is over the default 90˚C (Pr.06-14).
13-2
ID Display on
No. KPED-LE01
oH2
Capacitor overheat warning
Warning
10
oH2 Cause
Capacitance oH
The temperature of the capacitor is over 65˚C.
PGF1 PG feedback error

Warning Cause
15  PGF1 When Pr.10-03 = 0 (default = 2), a warning message
displays instead of a fault message when an error
occurs.
PGF2 PG feedback loss warning
Warning Cause
16  PGF2 Pr.10-03 = 0 (default = 2), a warning message
occurs.
PGF3 PG feedback stall warning
Warning Cause
17  PGF3 Pr.10-09 = 0 (default = 2), a warning message
occurs.
PGF4 PG slip error warning
Warning Cause
18  PGF4 Pr.10-09 = 0 (default = 2), a warning message
occurs.
PHL Phase loss
Warning Cause
19
PHL When Pr.06-01 =0 (default = 2), a warning message
Phase Loss
displays instead of a fault message when a phase
loss occurs.
ot1 Over-torque 1
Warning Cause
20
ot1 When Pr.06-05 =1 or 3 (default = 0), a warning
Over Torque 1
message displays instead of a fault message when
there is an over-torque detection.
ot2 Over-torque 2
Warning Cause
21
ot2 When Pr.06-05 =1 or 3 (default = 0), a warning
Over Torque 2
message displays instead of a fault message when
there is an over-torque detection.
oH3 Motor overheat (PTC)
Warning
22 Cause
oH3 When Pr.06-26 = 0 (default = 0), a warning message
Motor Over Heat (PTC) displays when there is a PTC detection.
13-3
ID Display on
No. KPED-LE01
Over-slip error
oSL
Cause
Warning
24 When Pr.05-16 = 0 (default = 0), a warning message
oSL displays when the slip deviation level is over the
Over Slip Warn setting in Pr.05-14 and the slip deviation detection
time is longer than the setting in Pr.05-15.
tUn
Warning
25 Auto-tuning is in process
tUn
Auto tuning
FAn Fan error warning
Warning Cause
26  Fan When Pr.06-45 bit 1 = 1, a warning message displays
Fan Off when the cooling fan is locked (when bit1 = 1, there is
an output error).
dCAn CAN Bus off
Warning
27  CAN OFF
Cause
CAN Bus disconnection or PDO communication time-
CAN bus Off out
STOA Safe Torque Off alarm

Warning
28  STOA
Cause
Safe torque output function is off and Pr.06-49 = 0001h
STO Warning or 0003h.
Leveling switch signal error
When elevator runs downward, LU signal is still
active. When elevator runs upward, LD signal is still
LS active.
43  Cause
Leveling switch (LU/LD) action error
Corrective Action
Check if the action of leveling switch (LU/LD) is
normal.
BTTx Testing
Brake torque test is running
bttA
Cause
When brake torque test is running, this warning code
48  will be triggered.
Corrective Action
When brake torque test is finished, this warning will
be automatically cleared.
13-4
ID Display on
No. KPED-LE01
BTTx Normal
Brake torque test is valid
bttn
Cause
Maximum output torque ratio allowed during brake
49  torque test (Pr.07-37) is too large
Corrective Action
Adjust Pr.07-37 Maximum Output Torque Ratio
Allowed during Brake Torque Test
bttS
BTTx Success
50  Brake torque test is finished.
13-5
13-6
Chapter 14 Fault Codes | VFD-ED
Chapter 14 Fault Codes

Fault code displays differently on digital keypad KPC-CC01 and built-in keyboard panel KPED-LE01.
Examples of their different displays show as below.
 Example of fault code shows on digital keypad KPC-CC01:
 Example of fault code shows on built-in keyboard panel KPED-LE01:
NOTE: Check Pr.06-16 to Pr.06-21 for the most recent fault records.
14-1
*: ID No. are in accordance with the settings of Pr.06-16 to Pr.06-21.

ID Display on
No.* KPED-LE01
Over-current during acceleration
(output current exceeds three times the drive’s rated current during
acceleration).
Fault corrective action

1  ocA
1. Short-circuit at motor output: Check for possible poor
insulation at the output.
oc at Accel 2. Acceleration Time is too short: Increase the Acceleration
Time.
3. AC motor drive output power is too small: Replace with a
drive with larger capacity.
Over-current during deceleration
(output current exceeds three times the drive’s rated current during
deceleration).

2  ocd 1. Short-circuit at motor output: Check for possible poor
oc at Decel 2. Deceleration Time is too short: Increase the Deceleration
Time.
Over-current during steady operation
(output current exceeds three times the drive’s rated current
during constant speed).

3  ocn 1. Short-circuit at motor output: Check for possible poor
oc at Normal SPD
2. Sudden increase in motor load: Check for possible motor stall.
Ground fault
When one or more of the output terminals is (are) grounded, and
the short circuit current is more than 60% of the AC motor drive
rated current, the AC motor drive power module may be damaged.
NOTE: The short circuit protection is to protect the AC motor
Fault drive, not to protect you.
4  GFF
corrective action
Ground Fault 1. Check the wiring connections between the AC motor drive and
motor for possible short circuits, also check connection to
ground.
2. Check whether the IGBT power module is damaged.
3. Check for possible poor insulation at the output.
Short circuit is detected between the IGBT module upper bridge and
lower bridge.
Fault
5  occ corrective action
Short Circuit Contact the dealer or manufacturer to return the motor drive to the
factory for repair.
Over-current at stop
Hardware failure in over-current detection
Fault
6  ocS corrective action
oc at Stop Contact the dealer or manufacturer to return the motor drive to the
factory for repair.
14-2
ID Display on
No.* KPED-LE01
DC bus over-voltage during acceleration
230V: 405 VDC; 460V: 810 VDC

7  ovA 1. Check if the input voltage falls in the rated AC motor drive
ov at Accel input voltage range.
2. Check for possible voltage transients.
3. If DC bus over-voltage is due to regenerative voltage,
increase the Acceleration Time or add an optional brake
resistor.
DC bus over-voltage during deceleration
230V: 405 VDC; 460V: 810 VDC

8  ovd 1. Check if the input voltage falls in the rated AC motor drive
ov at Decel input voltage range.
3. If DC bus over-voltage due to regenerative voltage, increase
the Deceleration Time or add an optional brake resistor.
DC bus over-voltage at constant speed

230V: 405 VDC; 460V: 810 VDC

9  ovn 1. Check if the input voltage falls in the rated AC motor drive
ov at Normal SPD input voltage range.
3. If DC bus over-voltage due to regenerative voltage, increase
the Deceleration Time or add an optional brake resistor.
Over-voltage at stop
Hardware failure in voltage detection.
Fault
10  ovS corrective action
ov at Stop 1. Check if the input voltage falls in the rated AC motor drive
input voltage range.
DC bus voltage during acceleration is less than the setting in Pr.06-

00.
Fault
11  LvA
corrective action
Lv at Accel
1. Check if the input voltage is normal.
2. Check for possible sudden load change.
DC bus voltage during deceleration is less than the setting in Pr.06-
00.
Fault
12  Lvd corrective action
Lv at Decel
14-3
ID Display on
No.* KPED-LE01
DC bus voltage at constant speed is less than the setting in Pr.06-00
Fault
corrective action
13  Lvn
Lv at Normal SPD
Low voltage at stop
Fault
corrective action
14  LvS
Lv at Stop
Phase Loss
Fault
corrective action
15  PHL
Check power source input to make sure all three input phases are
Phase Loss
connected correctly.
IGBT overheating
IGBT temperature exceeds protection level
3–5 HP, 50–60 HP: 105ºC
7.5–30 HP: 95ºC
Fault 40–100 HP: 110ºC
16  oH1
corrective action
IGBT Over Heat
1. Ensure that the ambient temperature falls in the specified
temperature range.
2. Make sure heat sink is not obstructed. Check if the fan is
operating
3. Check if there is enough ventilation clearance for the AC
motor drive.
Capacitor overheating
Capacitor’s temperature exceeds the protection level.
3–100 HP: 65ºC
Fault
17  oH2 corrective action
Capacitance oH temperature range.
2. Make sure heat sink is not obstructed. Check if the fan is
operating
3. Check if there is enough ventilation clearance for the AC
motor drive.
IGBT overheating protection fault
Fault
corrective action
18  tH1o
Contact the dealer or manufacturer to return the motor drive to the
Thermo 1 Open
factory for repair.
14-4
ID Display on
No.* KPED-LE01
Capacitor module overheating fault
Fault
corrective action
19  tH2o
Thermo 2 Open
factory for repair.
Cooling fan does not run properly.

20  FAn Check if the cooling fan is covered by dust and needs to be cleaned.
Fan Locked
factory for repair if necessary.
The output current causes the motor drive to be overload. If the
output current is 150% higher than the drive’s rated current, the
Fault motor drive can sustain the output for a maximum of 60 seconds.
21  oL
corrective action
Over Load
1. Check if the motor is overloaded.
2. Increase the output capacity of the motor drive.
The output current causes the motor to be overload. If the output
current is 150% higher than the drive’s rated current, the motor can
sustain the output for a maximum of 60 seconds.
Fault
22  EoL1 corrective action
Thermal Relay 1
1. Check the setting for motor full-load current (Pr.05-01).
2. Check if motor is overloaded and change to a higher power
motor.
Motor overheating
The AC motor drive internal temperature exceeds the setting in
Pr.06-27 (PTC level).
Fault
corrective action
24  oH3
1. Make sure that the motor is not obstructed.
Motor Over Heat
temperature range.
3. Change to a higher power motor.
The ot1 and ot2 fault codes appear when the following conditions
occur:
Fault
26  ot1 - The output current exceeds the setting in Pr.06-06 (Over-torque
Over Torque 1 Detection Level (OT1)> and Pr.06-09 (Over-torque Protection
Level (OT2).
14-5
ID Display on
No.* KPED-LE01
- The output current lasts longer than the time setting in Pr.06-07
and Pr.06-10.
- You set Pr.06-05 or Pr.06-08 to 2 or 4.
Fault
27  ot2 corrective action
Over Torque 2 1. Check if the motor is overloaded.
2. Check if the setting in Pr.05-01 IM (Motor Full-load Current)
and Pr.08-01 PM (Motor Full-load Current) are appropriate.
3. If necessary, increase the motor output capacity.
Cannot program internal EEPROM.

30  cF1
1. Press RESET key to reset to the default.
EEPROM Write Err
2. Contact the dealer or manufacturer to return the motor drive
to the factory for repair.
Cannot read internal EEPROM.

31  cF2 1. Press RESET key to reset to the default.
EEPROM Read Err
Hardware failure in current detection

32  cd0 Reboot the motor drive. If fault code continues to display on the
Isum Sensor Err
keypad, contact the dealer or manufacturer to return the motor drive
U-phase current detection error

33  cd1 Reboot the motor drive. If fault code continues to display on the
Ias Sensor Err
V-phase current detection error

34  cd2 Reboot the motor drive. If fault code continues to display on the
Ibs Sensor Err
14-6
ID Display on
No.* KPED-LE01
W-phase current detection error

35  cd3 Reboot the motor drive. If fault code continues to display on the
Ics Sensor Err
CC (current clamp) hardware error

36  Hd0 Reboot the motor drive. If fault code continues to display on the
cc HW Error
OC hardware error

37  Hd1 Reboot the motor drive. If fault code continues to display on the
oc HW Error
OV hardware error

38  Hd2 Reboot the motor drive. If fault code continues to display on the
ov HW Error
GFF hardware error

39  Hd3 Reboot the motor drive. If fault code continues to display on the
GFF HW Error
Auto-tuning error

40  AUE 1. Check the cabling between drive and motor.
Auto Tuning Err
2. Check if the motor capacity and the parameter settings are
appropriate and try again.
PG feedback error (command direction is different from the
feedback direction)
Fault
42  PGF1 corrective action
PG Fbk Error
When PG feedback control is enabled, check if Pr.10-01 (Encoder
PPR) is set to 0.
14-7
ID Display on
No.* KPED-LE01
PG feedback loss
Fault
43  PGF2 corrective action
PG Fbk Loss
Check the PG feedback wiring.
PG feedback stall

44  PGF3 1. Check the PG feedback wiring.
2. Check if the settings for PI gain and acceleration/deceleration
PG Fbk Over SPD are appropriate (Pr.10-05, Pr.10-06).
PG slip error

45  PGF4 1. Check the PG feedback wiring.
2. Check if the settings for PI gain and acceleration/deceleration
PG Fbk Deviate are appropriate (Pr.10-07, Pr.10-08).
External Fault
When you set the Multi-Function Input command (MI1–MI8) to #10
Fault EF input (Pr.07-28) and when multi-function input terminals are

49  EF triggered to close, the motor drive stops running.
External Fault
corrective action
Press RESET after you clear the fault.
Emergency Stop
When you set the Multi-Function Input command (MI1–MI8) to #28
Fault Emergency stop (EF1) (Motor coasts to stop), the motor drive stops
50  EF1 running.
Emergency Stop
corrective action
Press RESET after you clear the fault.
Password error
After entering the wrong password three consecutive times, the
keypad is locked.
Fault
52  Pcod corrective action
Password Error
Refer to Pr.00-07 and Pr.00-08 settings for more information. Cycle
the power for the motor drive to clear the lock and enter the correct
password.
14-8
ID Display on
No.* KPED-LE01
Illegal function code
Fault
corrective action
54  cE01
Check if the function code is correct (function code must be 03, 06,
Comm Cmd Err
10, 63).
Illegal data address (00H to 254H)
The data address for 0X2XX is between 0X2000–0X2005. Any
Fault
address out of this range is a fault.
55  cE02
Data Addr Err
corrective action
Check if the communication data address is correct.
Illegal data length
The data length must be between 1 to 20 digits. Any length out of
Fault this range is a fault.

56  cE03
corrective action
Data length Err
Check if the data length is smaller than the minimum value or larger
than the maximum value.
Attempt to write value to read-only communication address
Communication addresses such as 0X21XX, 0X22XX are read-only.
Fault
Any command sent to these addresses causes a fault.
57  cE04
Wrong Writing
corrective action
Check if the communication address is correct.
Modbus communication time-out (Pr.09-02–Pr.09-03)
Fault
58  cE10 corrective action
Comm Time Out Check if the communication wiring is correct.
Keypad KPC-CC01 transmission time-out
Fault
corrective action
59  cP10
1. Check if the communication wiring is correct
Keypad Time Out
2. Check if there is anything wrong with the keypad
Brake transistor fault

60  BF If the fault code continues to display on the keypad after you press
Braking Fault
RESET key, contact the dealer or manufacturer to return the motor
drive to the factory for repair.
14-9
ID Display on
No.* KPED-LE01
Mechanical brake failure
The feedback signal and the release signal are not consistent.

64  MBF
1. Check if the mechanical brake signal is correct.
Mech. Brake Fail
2. Check if the mechanical brake detection time setting (Pr.02-35)
is correct.
PG card hardware error
corrective action
Fault
1. Check if the PG feedback wiring is correct.
65  PGF5
2. If fault code continues to display on the keypad, contact the
PG HW Error
dealer or manufacturer to return the motor drive to the factory
for repair.
Magnetic contactor error
The feedback signal and the release signal are not consistent.
Fault
corrective action
66  MCF
1. Check if the magnetic contactor signal is correct.
Contactor Fail
2. Check if the magnetic contactor detection time setting (Pr.02-
36) is correct.
Motor output phase loss.
corrective action
1. Unbalanced three-phase impedance of the motor. Replace the
motor.
Fault 2. Check if the motor wiring is incorrect.
67  MPHL 3. Check if a single-phase motor is used.
Motor Phase Loss
4. Check if the current sensor is broken.
5. Check if temporary power supply is used or any grounding fault.
6. Make sure the capacity of the drive matches the motor.
7. Any abnormal motor current spikes or drops may trigger
MPHL.
CAN Bus off
Fault
corrective action
68  CANF
1. Check that the CAN Bus is wired correctly.
CAN Bus Off
2. Verify that there is no PDO communication time-out.
69 Reserved
70 Reserved
71 Reserved
14-10
ID Display on
No.* KPED-LE01
STO1–SCM1 internal hardware error.
corrective action
1. Check the STO1/SCM1 wiring.
F au l t 2. Reset the emergency switch (ON) and reboot the motor drive.
72  STL1 3. Check the voltage at least > 11 V.
S TO L o ss 1 4. Check the wiring between STO1 and E24V, and the wiring
between SCM1 and DCM.
5. After checking all the wiring, reboot the motor drive. If STL1 still
appears, contact the local dealer or manufacturer.
PG card wiring error

73  PGcd Incorrect wiring for pin C+, C-, D+, D-. Verify if the wiring matches
PG cd Wrong Wire
the descriptions in Section 7-3 (EMED-PGHSD-3) and Section 7-4
(EMED-PGHSD-4).
PG absolute signal error
corrective action
Fault 1. Check if the encoder absolute positions (C+/C- and D+/D-) and
74  PGHL PG card are properly wired.
PG Hall loss Err 2. If the cables are properly wired but the fault code still displays
on the keypad, contact the dealer or manufacturer to return the
motor drive to the factory for repair.
PG Z-phase signal loss
corrective action
Fault 1. Check if the encoder’s Z-phase signal and PG card are properly
75  PGAF wired.
Z Sig. loss Err 2. If the cables are properly wired but the fault code still displays
on the keypad, contact the dealer or manufacturer to return the
motor drive to the factory for repair.
Safe Torque Off function is enabled.
corrective action
1. Check the wiring for STO1/SCM1 and STO2/SCM2.
Fault 2. Reset the emergency switch (ON) and reboot the motor drive.
76  STO 3. Check the voltage at least > 11 V.
Safe Torque Off 4. Check the wiring between STO1/STO2 and E24V, and the
wiring between SCM1/SCM2 and DCM.
5. After checking all the wiring, reboot the motor drive. If STO still
14-11
ID Display on
No.* KPED-LE01
STO2–SCM2 internal hardware error.
corrective action
1. Check the STO2/SCM2 wiring.
F au l t 2. Reset the emergency switch (ON) and reboot the motor drive.
77  STL2 3. Check the voltage at least > 11 V.
S TO L o ss 2 4. Check the wiring between STO2 and E24V, and the wiring
between SCM2 and DCM.
5. After checking all the wiring, reboot the motor drive. If STL2 still
Internal hardware error.
F au l t
corrective action
78  STL3
After checking all the wiring, reboot the motor drive. If STL3 still
S TO L o ss 3
U-phase output phase loss
corrective action
motor.
82  2. Check if the motor wiring is incorrect.
3. Check if a single-phase motor is used.
V-phase output phase loss
corrective action
motor.
14-12
ID Display on
No.* KPED-LE01
W-phase output phase loss
corrective action
motor.
Leveling switch short-circuited

When elevator runs downward, LD signal will be inactive. When
elevator runs upward, LU signal will be inactive. When elevator is
running, there will be signal active for LU and LD whenever passing
86  through each floor. If not so, this fault code will be triggered.
corrective action
Check if the action of leveling switch (LU/LD) is normal.
Leveling switch open-circuited

When elevator executes leveling, either LU or LD is open-circuited
or both are open-circuited, this fault code will be triggered.
87 
corrective action
Check if the action of leveling switch (LU/LD) is normal.
BTTx Fail
Brake torque test failed
corrective action
94  1. Minimum output torque ratio allowed during brake torque test
(Pr.07-36) is too large. Adjust Pr.07-36 Minimum Output
Torque Ratio Allowed during Brake Torque Test
2. Mechanical brake clamping force is insufficient. Adjust or
replace the mechanical brake.
BTTx Error
Brake torque test action error
95  corrective action

Poor wiring connection. Check MI terminal wiring (FWD, REV, and
MI=57).
14-13
14-14
Chapter 15 Maintenance and TroubleshootingVFD-ED
Chapter 15 Maintenance and Troubleshooting
15-1 Maintenance and Inspections

15-2 Greasy Dirt Problems
15-3 Fiber Dust Problems
15-4 Corrosion Problems
15-5 Industrial Dust Problems
15-6 Installation and Wiring Problems
15-7 Multi-function Input / Output Terminal Application Problems
15-1
The AC motor drive has various warnings and protections against errors such as over-voltage, low
voltage, or over-current. Once an error occurs, the protections activate, the AC motor drive stops output,
activates the error contacts, and the motor coasts to stop. Please refer to the warning/fault display from
the AC motor drive and look up the corresponding causes / corrective actions in Chapter 13 Warning
Codes and Chapter 14 Fault Codes. The fault record is stored in the AC motor drive internal memory and
can store the six most recent error messages. You can read it from the digital keypad or through the
communications by accessing the parameters.
The AC motor drive includes a large number of electronic components, including ICs, resistors,
capacitors, transistors, cooling fans and relays. These components do not last forever. Even under
normal circumstances, they will eventually become error-prone if used past their lifespans. Therefore,
you must perform periodic preventive maintenance to identify defective and worn out parts, and eliminate
the causes of malfunctions in the AC motor drive at an early stage. At the same time, parts that have
exceeded their product life should be replaced whenever possible to ensure safe operation.
Visual checks should be done regularly to monitor the AC motor drives operation, and to make sure
nothing unusual happens. Check the situations listed in the following table.
 Wait five seconds after a fault has been cleared before pressing RESET with the
input terminal keypad.
 The drive must first be switched off for at least five minutes for ≤ 22 kW models, and
10 minutes for ≥ 30kW models until the charging indicator turns off, and the voltage
between terminals ○ + – ○
- must be lower than 25 VDC before it is safe to open the
cover to begin maintenance operations.

 Only qualified personnel can work on maintenance or replace parts. (Remove metal
items such as watch, rings, and other metal items before operation, and use only
insulated tools.)
 Never modify internal components or wiring.
 The performance and the surrounding environment should meet the standard
specifications. There should be no abnormal noise, vibration, or odor.
15-2
15-1 Maintenance and Inspections

For regular maintenance, first stop operation, then turn off the power, and then take off the outer cover.
Even after turning off the power supply, charging voltages remaining in the filter capacitor require some
time to discharge. To avoid danger, operation must not start until the charging indicator goes off, and you
confirm the voltage with a voltmeter to be below the safety value (≤ 25 VDC).
Ambient environment
Maintenance Period
Items to Check Methods and Criterion
Daily Half Year One Year
Check the ambient temperature, humidity, Visual inspection and
and vibration and check for any dust, gas, measurement with equipment 
oil or water drops. with standard specification
Check for any dangerous objects Visual inspection 
Voltage
Maintenance Period
Check that the voltage of main circuit and Measure with multimeter with

control circuit are correct. standard specifications.
Digital keypad display

Maintenance Period
Check that the display is clear for reading Visual inspection 
Check for any missing characters Visual inspection 
Mechanical parts
Maintenance Period
Check for any abnormal sound or vibration Visual and audible inspection 
Check for any loose bolts Securely tighten 
Check for any deformed or damaged parts Visual inspection 
Check for any color change caused by
Visual inspection 
overheating
Check for any dust or dirt Visual inspection 
15-3
Main circuit
Maintenance Period
Check for any loose or missing bolts Securely tighten 
Check for machine or insulator deformation,
crack, damage or color change due to Visual inspection 
overheating or ageing
Check for any dust or dirt Visual inspection 
Main circuit terminals and wiring

Maintenance Period
Check the terminal and copper plate for
color change or deformation due to Visual inspection 
overheating
Check for damage to the wiring insulation
or color change
Main circuit terminal block

Maintenance Period
Check for any damage Visual inspection 
Main circuit filter capacitor

Maintenance Period
Check for any liquid leaks, color change,
crack or buckling of the exterior cover
Check if the safety valve is not removed or
if the valve is obviously expanded
Measure static capacity when required - 
Main circuit resistor

Maintenance Period
Check for any odors or insulation cracks
Visual and audible inspection 
due to overheating
Check for any disconnections Visual inspection 
Measure with multimeter with
Check for damaged connections 
standard specifications
15-4
Main circuit transformer and reactor

Maintenance Period
Check for any abnormal vibration or odors Visual and audible inspection 
Main circuit magnetic contactor and relay

Maintenance Period
Check for any sound of vibration while
Audible inspection 
running
Check that the contact works correctly Visual inspection 
Main circuit PCB and connector

Maintenance Period
Tighten the screws and press
Check for any loose screws and connectors 
the connectors firmly in place.
Check for any odors and color change Visual and smell inspection 
Check for any crack, damage, deformation
or corrosion
Check for any liquid leaks or deformation in
capacity
Cooling system cooling fan

Maintenance Period
Visual, audible inspection, and
turn the fan by hand (turn off the
Check for any abnormal sound or vibration 
power before operation) to see if
it rotates smoothly.
Check for any loose bolts Securely tighten 
Check for any color change due to
overheating
Cooling system ventilation channel

Maintenance Period
Check for any obstruction in the heat sink,
air intake or air outlet
NOTE: Use a chemically neutral cloth to clean and use a dust cleaner to remove dust when necessary.
15-5
15-2 Greasy Dirt Problems

Serious greasy dirt problems generally occur in processing industries such as machine tools, punching
machines and so on. Please be aware of the possible damages that greasy oil may cause to your
drive.
1. Electronic components that silt up with greasy oil may cause the drive to burn out or even explode.
2. Most greasy dirt contains corrosive substances that may damage the drive.
Solution:
Install the AC motor drive in a standard cabinet to keep it away from greasy dirt. Clean and remove
greasy dirt regularly to prevent damage to the drive.
15-6
15-3 Fiber Dust Problems

Serious fiber dust problems generally occur in the textile industry. Please be aware of the possible
damages that fiber may cause to your drives.
1. Fiber that accumulates or adheres to the fans leads to poor ventilation and causes overheating
problems.
2. Plant environments in the textile industry have higher degrees of humidity that may cause the drive
to burn out, become damaged or explode due to wet fiber dust adhering to the devices.
Solution:
Install the AC motor drive in a standard cabinet to keep it away from fiber dust. Clean and remove fiber
dust regularly to prevent damage to the drive.
15-7
15-4 Corrosion Problems

Corrosion problems may occur if any fluids flow into the drives. Please be aware of the possible
damages that corrosion may cause to your drive.
1. Corrosion of internal components may cause the drive to malfunction and possibility to explode.
Solution:
Install the AC motor drive in a standard cabinet to keep it away from fluids. Clean the drive regularly to
prevent corrosion.
15-8
15-5 Industrial Dust Problems

Serious industrial dust pollution frequently occurs in environments such as stone processing plants,
flour mills, cement plants, and so on. Please be aware of the possible damages that industrial dust
may cause to your drives.
1. Dust accumulating on electronic components may cause overheating problem and shorten the
service life of the drive.
2. Conductive dust may damage the circuit board and may even cause the drive to explode.
Solution:
Install the AC motor drive in a standard cabinet and cover the drive with a dust cover. Clean the
cabinet and ventilation holes regularly for good ventilation.
15-9
15-6 Installation and Wiring Problems

When wiring the drive, the most common problem is incorrect wire installation or poor wiring. Please
be aware of the possible damages that poor wiring may cause to your drives.
1. If screws are not fully tightened, then sparking may occur as impedance increases.
2. If you have opened the drive and modified the internal circuit board, the internal components may
have been damaged.
Solution:
Ensure that all screws are tightened when installing the AC motor drive. If the AC motor drive functions
abnormally, send it back to Delta for repair. DO NOT try to modify or repair the internal components or
wiring.
15-10
15-7 Multi-function Input / Output Terminal Application Problems

Multi-function input / output terminal errors are generally caused by over-usage of the terminals and
not following the specifications. Please be aware of the possible damages that multi-function input /
output terminal errors may cause to your drives.
1. Input / output circuit may burn out when the terminal usage exceeds the specified limit.
Solution:
Refer to the user manual for multi-function input / output terminals usage and follow the specified
voltage and current. DO NOT exceed the specification limits.
15-11
15-12
Chapter 16 Safe Torque Off Function | VFD-ED
Chapter 16 Safe Torque Off Function
16-1 Failure Rate of the Drive’s Safety Function

16-2 Description of STO’s Functions
16-3 Wiring Diagram
16-4 Related Parameters
16-5 Timing Diagram Description
16-6 Fault Codes Related to STO
16-1
16-1 Failure Rate of the Drive’s Safety Function

Item Definition Standard Performance
Channel 1: 80.08%
SFF Safe Failure Fraction IEC61508
Channel 2: 68.91%
HFT (Type A
Hardware Fault Tolerance IEC61508 1
subsystem)
IEC61508 SIL 2
SIL Safety Integrity Level
IEC62061 SILCL 2
PFH Average frequency of dangerous failure [h-1] IEC61508 9.56×10-10
PFDav Probability of Dangerous Failure on Demand IEC61508 4.18×10-6
Category Category ISO13849-1 Category 3
PL Performance level ISO13849-1 d
MTTFd Mean time to dangerous failure ISO13849-1 High
DC Diagnostic coverage ISO13849-1 Low
Table 16-1
16-2
16-2 Description of STO’s Functions

The STO (Safe Torque Off) function is to cut off the motor’s power supply to prevent the motor from
producing torque force. The STO function is run by two independent hardware circuits to control the
drive signals emitted by the motor’s current, and then to cut off motor drive’s power module output in
order to safely stop the motor drive.
The following table describes the terminal functions.

Signal Channel Status of Photo Coupler
STO1–SCM1 ON (High) ON (High) OFF (Low) OFF (Low)

STO
Signal
STO2–SCM2 ON (High) OFF (Low) ON (High) OFF (Low)
STL2 mode STL1 mode STO mode

Drive Output Status Ready
(Torque output off) (Torque output off) (Torque output Off)
Table 16-2
 STO is Safe Torque Off

 STL1–STL3 means an STO internal hardware error.
 STL3 means STO1–SCM1 and STO2–SCM2 has an internal circuit error.
 STO1–SCM1 ON (High): means STO1–SCM1 has connection to a +24 VDC power supply.
 STO2–SCM2 ON (High): means STO2–SCM2 has connection to a +24 VDC power supply.
 STO1–SCM1 OFF (Low): means STO1–SCM1 has no connection to a +24 VDC power
supply.
 STO2–SCM2 OFF (Low): means STO2–SCM2 has no connection to a +24 VDC power
supply.
16-3
16-3 Wiring Diagram

16-3-1 Internal Safety Circuit
Drive’s internal safety circuit shows as Figure 16-1 below.
+24V C2000
VFD-ED
V+
STO1
SCM1
STO2 CPU
Line
drive
Ga te
d rive M
SCM2
DCM
C OM
Figure 16-1
16-4
16-3-2 Internal Safety Circuit Terminals
The part D in Figure 16-2 below shows the default for terminals +24V-STO1-STO2 and terminals
SCM1-SCM2-DCM in the drive’s internal safety circuit, which are short-circuited when they are
delivered from the factory.
Figure 16-2
+24V C2000
VFD-ED
V+
STO1
SCM1
STO2
S
CPU
Line
drive
Ga te
d rive M
S
SCM2
DCM
C OM
Figure 16-3
16-5
16-3-3 Drive’s Control Circuit Wiring Diagram
1. Remove the E24V-STO1-STO2 short circuit.

2. Figure 16-4 below shows the wiring. The contract for safety interlock circuit must be closed
during the normal situation so that the motor drive can run.
3. In STO mode, if you switch on the safety interlock circuit, the motor drive stops outputting and
the keypad displays STO.
4. If the restart permission signal is OFF before the elevator controller issues the command to
start the elevator, it means that the STO function is currently malfunctioned or M1 magnetic
contactor error has occurred, and then the elevator is unable to start (R1 cannot be ON).
Figure 16-4
NOTE: R” in R1/R2 stands for Relay; “M” in M1 stands for MC (Magnetic Contactor)
16-6
16-4 Related Parameters

 06-49 STO Latch Selection
Settings 0000h: STO fault latched, resending RUN command is required
0001h: STO warning latched, resending RUN command is required
 02-11 Multi-function Output 1: RA, RB, RC (Relay 1)

Default: 0
 02-12 Multi-function Output 2: MRA, MRB, MRC (Relay 2)
Default: 0
 02-13 Multi-function Output 3: R1A, R12C (Relay 3)
 02-14 Multi-function Output 4: R2A, R12C (Relay 4)
 02-15 Multi-function Output 5: MO
 02-16 Multi-function Output 6: MO2
1: Operation indication
11: Malfunction indication
42: STO Output Error
 02-23 Multi-function Output Terminal Direction

Default: 0
This parameter uses bit setting. If the bit is 1, the multi-function output terminal acts in
the opposite direction.
Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
- - MO6 MO5 MO4 MO3 MO2 MO1 R2A R1A MRA RA
 STO output default: Pr.02-15 (MO1 = 42 Logic Output A). You can also set Pr.02-23 (Multi-output
direction) to choose Logic Output B.
Output Safety Status
Drive Status Logic Output A Logic Output B
(Pr.02-15=42) (Pr.02-15=42)
(Pr.02-23=16)
Normal Broken circuit (Open) Short circuit (Closed)
STO Short circuit (Closed) Broken circuit (Open)
STL1–STL3 Short circuit (Closed) Broken circuit (Open)
Table 16-3
16-7
16-5 Timing Diagram Description

16-5-1 Normal Operation Status
As shown in Figure 16-5, when the STO1–SCM1 and STO2–SCM2 are ON (safety function is not
required), the motor drive executes “Operating” or “Output Stop” according to the RUN/STOP
command.
Figure 16-5
16-5-2 Pr.06-49 = 0000h, STO fault latched, resending RUN command is required
If STO is ON in any condition and a fault occurs, it does not reset until STO is back to normal and use
a RESET command or power-on again after resending the RUN command.
Figure 16-6
16-8
16-5-3 Pr.06-49 = 0001h, STO warning latched, resending RUN command is required
If STO is ON in any condition and a warning occurs, it does not reset until STO is back to normal and
resend the RUN command.
Figure 16-7
16-5-4 Pr.06-49 = 0002h, STO fault latched

If STO is ON in any condition and a fault occurs, it does not reset until STO is back to normal and use
a RESET command or power-on again.
Figure 16-8
16-9
16-5-5 Pr.06-49 = 0003h, STO warning unlatched

If STO is ON in any condition and a warning occurs, it automatically resets when STO is back to
normal.
Figure 16-9
16-5-6 STL1
Figure 16-10
16-5-7 STL2
Figure 16-11
16-10
16-6 Fault Codes Related to STO

06-16 Present Fault Record
06-17 Second Most Recent Fault Record
06-18 Third Most Recent Fault Record
06-19 Fourth Recent Fault Record
06-20 Fifth Most Recent Fault Record
06-21 Sixth Most Recent Fault Record
Settings 72: Safe torque loss (STL1)
Fault Code Reading Description

72 (STL1) Safe torque loss (STL1) STO1–SCM1 internal circuit error.
Safe Torque Off function is enabled while Pr.06-
76 (STO) Safe torque output stops (STO)
49 is set to 0000h or 0002h.
77 (STL2) Safe torque loss 2 (STL2) STO2–SCM2 internal circuit error.
STO1–SCM1 and STO2–SCM2 internal circuit
78 (STL3) Safe torque loss 3 (STL3)
error.
16-11
16-12
Appendix A. EMC Standard Installation GuideVFD-ED
Appendix A. AC Motor Drives EMC

Standard Installation Guide
EMC Compliance Practice
A-1 Introduction
A-2 How to Prevent EMC
A-3 Solution to EMC: Grounding
A-4 Solution to EMC: Shielding
A-5 Solution to EMC: Filter
A-1
Preface
When an AC motor drive is installed in a noisy environment, radiated and/or conducted noise via
signal and power cables can interfere with the correct functioning, cause errors or even damage to the
drive. To prevent this, some AC motor drives have an enhanced noise resistance but the results are
limited and it is not economical. Therefore, an effective method would be finding the cause of the noise
and use the right solution to achieve “no emission, no transmission and no reception of noise”. All
three solutions should be applied.
Finding the Noise

• Ensure whether the error is caused by noise.
• Find the source of the noise and its transmission path.
• Confirm the signal and the source of noise
Solutions
• Ensure whether the error is caused by noise.
• Find the source of the noise and its transmission path.
• Confirm the signal and the source of noise
A-2
A-1 Introduction
A-1-1 What is EMC
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) is the ability of an electrical device to function properly in
electromagnetic environments. It does not emit electromagnetic noise to surrounding equipment and is
immune to interference from surrounding equipment. The goal is to achieve high immunity and low
emission; these two properties define the quality of EMC. In general, electrical devices react to high
and low frequency phenomena. High frequency phenomena are electrostatic discharge (ESD); pulse
interference; radiated electromagnetic field; and conducted high frequency electrical surge. Low
frequency phenomena refer to mains power harmonics and imbalance.
The standard emission and immunity levels for compliance depend on the installation location of the
drive. A Power Drive System (PDS) is installed in an industrial or domestic environment. A PDS in a
domestic environment must have lower emission levels and is allowed to have lower immunity levels.
A PDS in an industrial environment is allowed to have higher emission levels but must have more
severe immunity levels.
A-1-2 EMC for AC Motor Drive

When an AC motor drive is put into operation, harmonic signal will occur at the AC drive’s power input
and output side. It creates a certain level of electromagnetic interference to the surrounding electrical
devices and the mains power network. An AC motor dive is usually applied in industrial environments
with a strong electromagnetic interference. Under such conditions, an AC drive could disturb or be
disturbed.
Installing the AC motor drive accurately will decrease EMC influences and ensure long-term stability of
the electricity system. It is strongly suggested to follow Delta’s user manual for wiring and grounding. If
any difficulties or problems arise, follow the instructions and measures as indicated in this EMC
Standard Installation Guide.
A-3
A-2 How to Prevent EMC

A-2-1 Types of EMC: Common-mode and Differential Mode Noise
The electromagnetic noise of an AC motor drive can be distinguished into common-mode and
differential-mode noise. Differential-mode noise is caused by the stray capacitance between the
conducting wires and common-mode noise is caused by the common-mode coupling current path
created by the stray capacitance between the conducting wires and ground.
Basically, differential-mode noise has a greater impact to the AC motor drive and common-mode noise
has a greater impact to high-sensitivity electronic devices. An excessive amount of differential-mode
noise may trigger the circuit protection system of the AC motor drive. Common-mode noise affects
peripheral electronic devices via the common ground connection.
EMC problems can be more serious when the following conditions apply:
• When a large horsepower AC motor drive is connected to a large horsepower motor.
• The AC motor drive’s operation voltage increases.
• Fast switching of the IGBTs.
• When a long cable is used to connect the motor to the AC motor drive.
A-2-2 How does EMC Transmit (Noise Transmission)

Noise disturbs peripheral high-sensitivity electrical devices/systems via conduction and radiation, their
transmission paths are shown hereafter:
1. Noise current in the unshielded power cable is conducted to ground via stray capacitances into a
common-mode voltage. Whether or not other modules are capable to resist this common-mode
noise depends on their Common-Mode Rejection Ratio (CMRR), as shown in Figure A-1.
Noise Unshielded cable
Send Receive
Load
Cstray
Ground
Figure A-1
A-4
2. Common-mode noise in the power cable is transmitted through the stray capacitance and coupled
into the adjacent signal cable, as shown in Figure A-2. Several methods can be applied to reduce
the effect of this common-mode noise; for example, shield the power cable and/or the signal
cables, separate the power and signal cables, take the input and output side of the signal cable
and twist them together to balance out the stray capacitance, let power cables and signal cables
cross at 90°, etc.
Unshielded cable
Noise
Cstray
Power
supply Cable System
Ground
Figure A-2
3. Common-mode noise is coupled via the power cable to other power systems then the cable of
such a power system is coupled to the transmission system, as shown in Figure A-3.
Unshielded cable
Noise
Cstray
Send Receive
Load
Ground
Figure A-3
A-5
4. The common-mode noise of an unshielded power cable is transmitted to the ground via the stray
capacitance. Since both shielded wire and unshielded wire are connected to a common ground,
other systems can be interfered with by the common-mode noise that is transmitted from the
ground back to the system via the shield. See Figure A-4.
Noise Unshielded cable
Send Receive
Cstray
Load
Cstray
Ground
Figure A-4
5. When excessive pulse modulated currents pass through an un-grounded AC drive cable, it acts as
an antenna and creates radiated interference.
A-6
A-3 Solution to EMC: Grounding

The leakage current of an electronic equipment is conducted to ground via the grounding wire and the
ground electrode. According to Ohm’s law, potential differences may arise when the electrode’s
ground and the ground’s ground resistance are different.
According to Ohm’s law, the earth resistance for electrode and the ground are different; in this case,
potential differences may arise.
A-3-1 Protective Grounding & Functional Grounding

Please carefully read the following instructions if two types of grounding are applied at the same time.
Protective grounding is applied outside buildings and must have low resistance. On the other hand,
functional grounding can be applied inside buildings and must have low impedance.
The goal of EMC is to avoid any interference effects. Grounding for EMC can be distinguished by
frequency. For frequencies lower than 10 kHz, a single point ground system should be used and for
frequencies higher than 10 kHz, a multiple point ground system should be used.
• Single Point Grounding: all signal grounds of all IT equipment are connected in series to form a
single reference point. This point can be grounded directly to earth; to the designated grounding
point or to the safety point that is already grounded.
• Multiple Point Grounding: all signals of all IT equipment are grounded independently.
• Hybrid Grounding: this type of grounding behaves differently for low and high frequencies. When
two pieces of IT equipment (A and B) are connected via a shielded cable, one end is connected
directly to ground while the other end is connected to ground via a capacitor. This type of
grounding system fulfils the criteria for high and low frequency grounding.
• Floating grounding: the signals of all IT equipment are isolated from each other and are not
grounded.
DC current flows evenly throughout the conductor section. But AC current flows towards the
conductor’s surface as frequency increases; this is called the “skin effect”. It causes the effective
cross-section area to be reduced with increasing frequency. Therefore, it is suggested to increase the
effective ground cross-section area for high frequencies by replacing pigtail grounding by braided
conductors or strip conductors. Refer to the Figure A-5 below.
A-7
Pigtail
HF
LF-HF
2
1
Braided
3 strapl
Figure A-5
This is why a thick short ground wire must be implemented for connecting to the common grounding
path or the ground busbar. Especially when a controller (e.g. PLC) is connected to an AC motor drive,
it must be grounded by a short and thick conducting wire. It is suggested to use a flat braided
conductor (ex: metal mesh) with a lower impedance at high frequencies.
If the grounding wire is too long, its inductance may interfere structure of the building or the control
cabinet and form mutual inductance and stray capacitance. As shown in the Figure A-6, a long
grounding wire could become a vertical antenna and turn into a source of noise.
Painted
sheet metal
HF
Long PE
Figure A-6
A-8
A-3-2 Ground Loops

A ground loop occurs when the pieces of equipment are connected to more than one grounding path.
In this case, the ground current may return to the grounding electrode via more than one path. There
are three methods to prevent ground loops:
1. Use a common power circuit
2. Single point grounding
3. Isolate signals, e.g. by photocouplers
Cable
Equipment Equipment
A B
Earth plane
Figure A-7
Good
Cable
Accompanying cable
Equipment Equipment
A B
Very good
Cable
Earth plane
Figure A-8
In order to avoid “Common Mode Noise”, use parallel wires or twisted pair wiring. Follow this rule and
also avoid long wires, it is suggested to place the two wires as close to each other as possible.
A-9
A-3-3 Earthing Systems

The international standard IEC60364 distinguishes three different earthing system categories, using
the two-letter codes TN, TT, IT.
• The first letter indicates the type of earthing for the power supply equipment (generator or
transformer).
T: One or more points of the power supply equipment are connected directly to the same earthing
point.
I: Either no point is connected to earth (isolated) or it is connected to earth via high impedance.
• The second letter indicates the connection between earth and the power supply equipment.
T: Connected directly to earth (This earthing point is separate from other earthing points in the
power supply system.)
• N: Connected to earth via the conductor that is provided by the power supply system
• The third and fourth letter indicate the location of the earth conductor.
S: Neutral and earth conductors are separate
C: Neutral and earth are combined into a single conductor
A-10
TN system
TN: The neutral point of the low voltage transformer or generator is earthed, usually the star point in a
three-phase system. The body of the electrical device is connected to earth via this earth connection
at the transformer.
Protective earth (PE): The conductor that connects the exposed metallic parts of the consumer.
Neutral (N): The conductor that connects to the start point in a three-phase system or that carries the
return current in a single-phase system.
L1
L2
L3
N
PE
Figure A-9
TN-S system
TN-S: PE and N are two separate conductors that are combined together only near the power source
(transformer or generator). It is the same as a three-phase five-wire system.
Figure A-10
A-11
TN-C system
TN-C: PE and N are two separate conductors in an electrical installation similar to a three-phase five-
wire system, but near the power side, PE and N are combined into a PEN conductor similar to a three-
phase four-wire system.
Generator or
transformer
L1
L2
L3
PEN
Earth Consumer
Figure A-11
TN-C-S system
TN-C-S: A combined earth and neutral system (PEN conductor) is used in certain systems but
eventually split up into two separate conductors PE and N. A typical application of combined PEN
conductor is from the substation to the building but within the building PEN is separated into the PE
and N conductors. Direct connection of PE and N conductors to many earthing points at different
locations in the field will reduce the risk of broken neutrals. Therefore, this application is also known as
protective multiple earthing (PME) in the UK or as multiple earthed neutral (MEN) in Australia
Generator or
transformer
L1
L2
L3
N
PE
Earth Consumer Figure A-12
A-12
TT system
TT: The neutral point (N) of the low voltage transformer and the equipment frames (PE) are connected
to a separate earthing point. The Neutral (N) of the transformer and electrical equipment are
connected.
L1
L2
L3
N
PE
Figure A-13
IT system
IT: The neutral point of the transformer and electrical equipment are not earthed, only the equipment
frames PE are earthed.
In the IT network, the power distribution system Neutral is either not connected to earth or is earthed
via high impedance. In such a system, an insulated monitoring device is used for impedance
monitoring.
A built-in filter should be disconnected by the RFI-jumper and an external filter should not be installed
when the AC motor drive or the AC servo motor drive is connected to an IT system.
L1
L2
L3
N
PE
Figure A-14
A-13
Criteria for Earthing System and EMC

TN-S TN-C TT IT
Good Good Good Good
Continuity of the Continuity of the RCD is mandatory Continuity of the
Safety of PE conductor PE conductor PE conductor
Personnel must be ensured must be ensured must be ensured
throughout the throughout the throughout the
installation installation installation
Poor Poor Good Good
High fault current High fault current Medium fault Low current at the
Safety of (around 1kA) (around 1kA) current (< a few first fault (< a few
Property dozen amperes) dozen mA) but
high current at the
second fault
Availability of Good Good Good Excellent
Energy
Excellent Poor (prohibited) Good Poor (should be
avoided)
• Almost • Neutral and PE • Over-voltage • Over-voltage
equipotential are the same risk risk
Problems: • Circulation of • Equipotential • Common–
• Need to handle disturbance Problems: mode filters
the high currents in • Need to handle and surge
leaking exposed the high arrestors must
currents conductive leaking handle the
problem of the parts (high currents phase-to-phase
EMC Behavior
device magnetic-field problem of the voltage.
• High fault radiation) device • RCDs subject
current • High fault • RCD to nuisance
(transient currents (Residual- tripping when
disturbances) (transient current device) common-mode
disturbances) capacitors are
present
• Equivalent to
TN system for
second fault
A-14
A-4 Solution to EMC: Shielding

A-4-1 What is Shielding
Electrostatic shielding is used to isolate equipment so that it will not create electromagnetic field
interference or be influenced by an external electromagnetic field. A conductive material is used for
electrostatic shielding to achieve this isolation. A Faraday cage can be made from a mesh of metal or
a conductive material.
One characteristic of metal is that it is highly conductive and not electrostatic, which offers shielding
and prevents interference by external electrical fields. Metal with its high conductivity protects the
internal devices from high voltages—no voltage will enter the cage even when the cage is
experiencing a high current. In addition, electromagnetic fields can also pass through the Faraday
cage without causing any disturbance.
Electromagnetic shielding is applied to some electrical devices and measurement equipment for the
purpose of blocking interference. Examples of shielding include:
• Earth high-voltage indoor equipment using a metal frame or a high-density metal mesh
• Shielding a power transformer is achieved by wrapping a metal sheet between the primary and
secondary windings or by adding an enamel wire to the winding wire which is then earthed.
• A shielding coating, which is made of metal mesh or conductive fibers to provide effective
protection for the workers who work in a high-voltage environment.
In the picture below, the radio appears to be not fully covered by metal but if the conductivity of the
metal is high, radio waves are completely blocked and the radio will not receive any signal.
Figure A-15 Figure A-16
Mobile phone connections are also established through the transmission of radio waves. This is why
the mobile phone reception is often cut off when we walk into an elevator. The metal walls of the
elevator create the same shielding effect just as if we had entered a metal cage. Another example is a
microwave oven. The microwave door may seem transparent in visible light, but the density of the
metal mesh in the microwave door blocks the electromagnetic waves. A higher density of the metal
mesh offers better shielding.
A-15
Figure A-17
A-4-2 How to Reduce EMC by Shielding

Iron and other metals are high conductivity materials that provide effective shielding at extremely low
frequencies. But conductivity will decrease as:
1. High frequency signals are applied to the conductor
2. Equipment is located in a strong magnetic field
3. The shielding frame is forced into a specific form by machines
It is difficult to select a suitable high-conductivity material for shielding without the help from a shielding
material supplier or a related EMC institution.
Metallic Shielding Effectiveness

Shielding Effectiveness (SE) is used to assess the applicability of the shielding shell. The formula is:
SEdB=A+R+B (Measures where A= Absorption loss (dB)
in dB)
R= Reflection loss (dB)
B= Correction factor (dB) (for multiple reflections in thin
shields)
The absorption loss refers to the amount of energy loss as the electromagnetic wave travels through
the shield. The formula is:
AdB=1.314(fσμ) 1/2t where f= frequency (MHz)
μ= permeability relative to copper
σ= conductivity relative to copper
t= thickness of the shield in centimeters
A-16
The reflection loss depends on the source of the electromagnetic wave and the distance from that
source. For a rod or straight wire antenna, the wave impedance increases as it moves closer to the
source and decreases as it moves away from the source until it reaches the plane wave impedance
(377) and shows no change. If the wave source is a small wire loop, the magnetic field is dominant
and the wave impedance decreases as it moves closer to the source and increases as it moves away
from the source; but it levels out at 377 when the distance exceeds one-sixth of the wavelength.
Electrical Cabinet Design

In a high frequency electric field, shielding can be achieved by painting a thin layer of conductive metal
on the enclosure or on the internal lining material. However, the coating must be thorough and all parts
should be properly covered without any seams or gaps (just like a Faraday cage). That is only the
ideal. Making a seamless shielding shell is practically impossible since the cage is composed of metal
parts. In some conditions, it is necessary to drill holes in the shielding enclosure for installation of
accessories (like optional cards and other devices).
1. If the metallic components are properly welded using sophisticated welding technology to form an
electrical cabinet, deformation during usage is unlikely to occur. But if the electrical cabinet is
assembled with screws, the protective insulating layer under the screw must be properly removed
before assembly to achieve the greatest conductivity and best shielding.
2. Drilling holes for the installation of wires in the electrical cabinet lowers the shielding effectiveness
and increases the chance of electric waves leaking through the openings and emitting interference.
We recommend that the drilled holes are as narrow as possible. When the wiring holes are not
used, properly cover the holes with metal plates or metal covers. The paint or the coating of the
metal plate and metal cover should be thoroughly removed to ensure a metal-to-metal contact or a
conductive gasket should be installed.
3. Install industrial conductive gaskets to completely seal the electrical cabinet and the cabinet door
without gaps. If conductive gaskets are too costly, please screw the cabinet door to the electrical
cabinet with a short distance between the screws.
4. Reserve a grounding terminal on the electrical cabinet door. This grounding terminal shall not be
painted. If the paint already exists, please remove the paint before grounding.
Electrical Wires and Cables

Shielded Twisted Pair (STP) is a type of cable where two insulated copper wires are twisted together
with a metal mesh surrounding the twisted pair that forms the electromagnetic shielding and can also
be used for grounding.
The individual electrical wires and complete cable are surrounded by (synthetic) rubber that provides
insulation and also protects against damage.
There are two types of electrical cables: high voltage and low voltage. The high voltage cable differs
from the low voltage cable in that it has an additional insulation layer called the dielectric insulator
within the plastic sleeve. The dielectric insulator is the most important component in insulation. The
low voltage cable is usually only filled with a soft polymer material for keeping the internal copper wire
in place. The shield has two functions:
A-17
1. To shield the electrical wire and cable.

(1) Electric currents increase as power flows through the power cable and generate an electrical
field. Such interference can be suppressed inside the cable by shielding the power cables or
the electrical wires.
(2) To form a protective earthing. When the cable core is damaged, the leakage current will flow
via the shield to ground.
2. To protect the cable. A power cable used for the computer control purpose generates only
relatively low amount of current inside the cable. Such power cable will not become the source of
interferences but has great possibility to be interfered by the surrounding electrical devices.
Plastic jacket
Dielectric insulator
Metal lic shield
Centre core
A-18
A-5 Solution to EMC: Filter

A-5-1 Filter
Electromagnetic interference is transmitted in two ways, by radiation and by conduction. The most
effective and economical method of reducing radiated interference is to use shielding and of reducing
conducted interference is to use an electromagnetic filter.
Noise interference can be divided into two categories: high frequency (150 kHz–300 MHz) and low
frequency (100–3000 Hz). High-frequency noise fades more over distance and has a shorter wave-
length, while low-frequency noise fades less over distance and has a longer wave-length. Both types
of interference are transmitted through power cables and power leads, affecting the power supply side.
High-frequency interference at the power side can be eliminated or attenuated by mounting a filter.
The filter consists of coils and capacitors. Some drives do not have a built-in filter, in which case the
installation of an external option filter is required. Figure A-20 below shows a standard filter diagram.
Figure A-20
A filter is composed of a Differential Mode section (to eliminate noise below 150 kHz) and a Common
Mode section (to eliminate noise above 150 kHz). For high-frequency noise, the inductor acts as a
high impedance to form an open circuit and the capacitor acts as a low impedance to form a short
circuit. Proper design and dimensioning of inductors and capacitors give a resonant circuit to absorb
harmonic currents. Capacitor Cy is earthed to lead the harmonic currents to the ground.
External Filter
The filter and the AC drive should be installed in the control cabinet or on the mounting plate that is
earthed to ground. The motor cable must be shielded and as short as possible. Use the filters
recommended by Delta to ensure compliance with EMC standards.
A-19
Figure A-21
AC Motor Drives with Built-in Filter

1. Since interferences are suppressed by installing an earthed capacitor in the filter, the amount of
current to ground (leakage current) could result in electric shocks to personnel or the power
system. Please be aware of this problem.
2. Since the leakage current to ground can be high, it is crucial to implement protective earthing to
prevent electrical shocks.
Filter Installation (With and Without)
< 15 m @ 60 Hz with EMC Filter < 15 m @ 60 Hz without EMC Filter
Zero Phase Reactor (Choke)

Interferences can also be suppressed by installing a zero phase reactor at the power supply side
and/or the AC Motor Drive’s output, depending on where the interference is. Since currents are large
at the power input and the AC Motor Drive’s output, please carefully select the magnetic core with
A-20
suitable current handling capability. An ideal magnetic material for large currents is compound
magnetic powder. It has a higher current handling capability and higher impedance compared to pure
metallic magnetic cores. It is therefore suitable to implement in a high frequency environment. The
impedance can also be enhanced by increasing the turn ratio.
Zero Phase Reactor Installation

There are two installation methods, depending on the size of the zero phase reactor and the motor
cable length.
1. Wind the motor cable through the middle of a zero-phase reactor four times. Place the reactor and
the AC Motor Drive as close to each other as possible.
Figure A-24
2. Place all wires through the middle of four zero-phase reactors without winding.
Zero Phase Reactor
Power R/L1 U/T1
Supply
S/L2 V/T2 MOTOR
T/L3 W/T3
Figure A-25
Analog Input Signals

If the analog input signals are affected by noise from the AC motor drive, connect a capacitor and a
ferrite core as indicated in Figure A-26 below. Wind the wires around the core in same direction for 3
times or more.
AVI/ACI/AUI
C
ACM
Ferrite core
Figure A-26
A-21
A-5-2 Harmonic Interference

The AC motor drive’s input current is non-linear, the input rectifier generates harmonics. Harmonics
must be limited to within a certain range to avoid impact the mains power and to avoid current
distortion to ensure surrounding devices are not influenced. An AC Motor Drive with built-in DC reactor
suppresses harmonic currents (Total Harmonic Current Distortion THID) effectively and therefore
reduces the harmonic voltage peaks (Total Harmonic Voltage Distortion).
Harmonic Current at the Power Supply Side
(A) Fund amen tal Sin e Wa ve (A) Fund amen tal Sin e Wa ve
(6 0Hz) (6 0Hz)
(B) 3 Ha rmo nic (B) 5th Ha rmon ic

rd
(1 80H z) (3 00H z)
(C) H armo nica lly (C) H armo ni ca lly

Di sto rte d Wa ve Di sto rted Wa ve
Figure A-27
Suppression of Harmonic Currents

Reactor
When a large portion of lower order harmonic currents (5th, 7th, 11th ,etc.) occur at the power input,
surrounding devices will be disturbed and the power factor will be low as a result of reactive power.
Installing a reactor at the AC Motor Drive’s input effectively suppresses lower order harmonic currents.
Bus
Chok e
Line
Chok es
Inv erter M otor
Figure A-28
A-22
AC Reactor
Installed in series with the power supply and is effective in reducing low order current harmonics.
Features of an AC reactor include:
1. Reduces the harmonic currents to the AC Motor Drive and increases the impedance of the power
supply.
2. Absorbs interferences generated by surrounding devices (such as surge voltages, currents, and
mains surge voltages) and reduce their effect on the AC Motor Drive.
3. Increases the power factor.
DC Reactor
A DC-Reactor is installed between the rectifier and the DC-bus capacitor to suppress harmonic
currents and to achieve a higher power factor.
Current Wave Diagrams
Without Reactor
150
100
50
-50
-100
-150
0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500
Figure A-29
With Reactor
150
100
50
-50
-100
-150
0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500
Figure A-30
A-23
A-24
Appendix B. Modbus ProtocolVFD-ED
Appendix B. Modbus Protocol
B-1 Code Description

B-2 Data Format
B-3 Communication Protocol
B-4 Address List
B-5 Exception Response
B-1
 This appendix helps users to control by computers and monitor drive parameters and status
through Modbus by using RS-485 serial communication interface
 When using the communication interface, the diagram on the
right shows the communication port pin definitions. It is
recommended that you connect the AC motor drive to your PC by
using Delta IFD6530 or IFD6500 as a communication converter.
For details on communication port as the right diagram shows,
see the lower right corner in Figure 3-5 in Chapter 3 Wiring.
 The default communication formats for communication port:
1. Modbus ASCII mode
2. 9600 bps serial communication baud rates
3. 7-bit data character
4. No parity bit
5. 2 stop bit
 Modbus ASCII (American Standard Code for Information Interchange): Each byte of data is the
combination of two ASCII characters. For example, one byte of data: 64 Hex, shown as ‘64’ in
ASCII, consists of ‘6’ (36Hex) and ‘4’ (34Hex)
B-1 Code Description
The communication protocol is in hexadecimal, ASCII: “0”…“9”, “A”…“F”, every hexadecimal value
represents an ASCII code. The following table shows some examples.
Character ‘0’ ‘1’ ‘2’ ‘3’ ‘4’ ‘5’ ‘6’ ‘7’
ASCII code 30H 31H 32H 33H 34H 35H 36H 37H
Character ‘8’ ‘9’ ‘A’ ‘B’ ‘C’ ‘D’ ‘E’ ‘F’

ASCII code 38H 39H 41H 42H 43H 44H 45H 46H
B-2 Data Format
1. 10-bit character frame (For ASCII)
(7, N, 2)
Start Stop Stop
bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
bit bit
7-data bits
10-bits character frame
(7, E, 1)
Start Even Stop

bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 parity bit
7-data bits
(7, O, 1)
B-2
Start Odd Stop

bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 parity bit
7-data bits
2. 11-bit character frame (For RTU)

(8, N, 2)
Start Stop Stop
bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 bit bit
8-data bits
(8, E, 1)
Start Even Stop

bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
parity bit
8-data bits
(8, O, 1)
Start Odd Stop

bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
parity bit
8-data bits
B-3 Communication Protocol
1. Communication data frame

ASCII mode:
STX Start character = ‘:’ (3AH)
Address High Communication address:
Address Low one 8-bit address consists of 2 ASCII codes
Function High Command code:
Function Low one 8-bit command consists of 2 ASCII codes
DATA (n-1) Contents of data:
……. n x 8-bit data consists of 2n ASCII codes
DATA 0 n ≤ 16, maximum of 32 ASCII codes (20 sets of data)
LRC Check High LRC checksum:
LRC Check Low one 8-bit checksum consists of 2 ASCII codes
END High End characters:
END Low END1= CR (0DH), END0= LF(0AH)
B-3
RTU mode:
START Defined by a silent interval of larger than / equal to 10 ms
Address Communication address: 8-bit binary address
Function Command code: 8-bit binary command
DATA (n-1)
Contents of data:
…….
N × 8-bit data, n ≤ 16
DATA 0
CRC Check Low CRC checksum:
one 16-bit CRC checksum consists of 2 8-bit binary
CRC Check High
characters
END Defined by a silent interval of larger than / equal to 10 ms
2. Communication address (Address)

00H: broadcast to all AC motor drives
01H: AC motor drive of address 01
0FH: AC motor drive of address 15
10H: AC motor drive of address 16
:
FEH: AC motor drive of address 254
Function (function code) and data (data characters)

03H: read data from a register
Example: Reading two continuous data from register address 2102H, AMD address is 01H.
ASCII mode:
Command Message Response Message
STX ‘:’ STX ‘:’
‘0’ ‘0’
Address Address
‘1’ ‘1’
‘0’ ‘0’
Function Function
‘3’ ‘3’
‘2’ Number of register ‘0’
‘1’ (count by byte) ‘4’
Starting register
‘0’ ‘1’
‘2’ Content of starting ‘7’
‘0’ register 2102H ‘7’
Number of register ‘0’ ‘0’
(count by word) ‘0’ ‘0’
‘2’ ‘0’
Content of register 2103H
‘D’ ‘0’
LRC Check
‘7’ ‘0’
CR ‘7’
END LRC Check
LF ‘1’
CR
END
LF
B-4
RTU mode:
Address 01H Address 01H
Function 03H Function 03H
21H Number of register
Starting data register 04H
02H (count by byte)
Number of register 00H Content of register 17H
(count by word) 02H address 2102H 70H
CRC Check Low 6FH Content of register 00H
CRC Check High F7H address 2103H 00H
CRC Check Low FEH
CRC Check High 5CH
3. 06H: single write, write single data to a register.

Example: Writing data 6000 (1770H) to register 0100H. AMD address is 01H.
ASCII mode:
‘0’ ‘0’
Address Address
‘1’ ‘1’
‘0’ ‘0’
Function Function
‘6’ ‘6’
‘0’ ‘0’
‘1’ ‘1’
Target register Target register
‘0’ ‘0’
‘0’ ‘0’
‘1’ ‘1’
‘7’ ‘7’
Register content Register content
‘7’ ‘7’
‘0’ ‘0’
‘7’ ‘7’
LRC Check LRC Check
‘1’ ‘1’
CR CR
END END
LF LF
RTU mode:
Address 01H Address 01H
Function 06H Function 06H
01H 01H
00H 00H
17H 17H
Register content Register content
70H 70H
CRC Check Low 86H CRC Check Low 86H
CRC Check High 22H CRC Check High 22H
B-5
4. 10H: write multiple registers (can write at most 20 sets of data simultaneously).
Example: Set the multi-step speed of an AC motor drive (address is 01H),
Pr.04-00 = 50.00 (1388H), Pr.04-01 = 40.00 (0FA0H.)
ASCII mode:
ADR 1 ‘0’ ADR 1 ‘0’
ADR 0 ‘1’ ADR 0 ‘1’
CMD 1 ‘1’ CMD 1 ‘1’
CMD 0 ‘0’ CMD 0 ‘0’
‘0’ ‘0’
‘4’ ‘4’
‘0’ ‘0’
‘0’ ‘0’
‘0’ ‘0’
Number of register ‘0’ Number of register ‘0’
(count by word) ‘0’ (count by word) ‘0’
‘2’ ‘2’
Number of register ‘0’ ‘E’
LRC Check
(count by byte) ‘4’ ‘8’
‘1’ CR
END
‘3’ LF
The first data content
‘8’
‘8’
‘0’
‘F’
The second data content
‘A’
‘0’
‘9’
LRC Check
‘A’
CR
END
LF
RTU mode:
ADR 01H ADR 01H
CMD 10H CMD 10H
04H 04H
00H 00H
Number of register 00H Number of register 00H
(Count by word) 02H (Count by word) 02H
Quantity of data (byte) 04 CRC Check Low 41H
13H CRC Check High 04H
The first data content
88H
0FH
The second data content
A0H
CRC Check Low ‘9’
CRC Check High ‘A’
B-6
5. Checksum
(1) ASCII mode (LRC Check):
LRC (Longitudinal Redundancy Check) is calculated by summing up the values of the bytes
from ADR1 to last data character then calculating the hexadecimal representation of the 2’s-
complement negation of the sum.
Example:
01H + 03H + 21H + 02H + 00H + 02H = 29H, the 2’s-complement negation of 29H is D7H.
(2) RTU mode (CRC Check):
CRC (Cyclical Redundancy Check) is calculated by the following steps:
Step 1: Load a 16-bit register (called CRC register) with FFFFh.
Step 2: Exclusive OR the first 8-bit byte of the command message with the low order byte of
the 16-bit CRC register, putting the result in the CRC register.
Step 3: Examine the LSB of CRC register.
Step 4: If the LSB of CRC register is 0, shift the CRC register one bit to the right, fill MSB with
zero, then repeat step 3. If the LSB of CRC register is 1, shift the CRC register one bit
to the right, fill MSB with zero, Exclusive OR the CRC register with the polynomial value
A001H, then repeat step 3.
Step 5: Repeat step 3 and 4 until you perform eight shifts. This processes a complete 8-bit byte.
Step 6: Repeat step 2 through 5 for the next 8-bit byte of the command message. Continue
doing this until all bytes are processed. The final contents of the CRC register are the
CRC value. When transmitting the CRC value in the message, the upper and lower
bytes of the CRC value must be swapped, that is, the lower order byte is transmitted
first.
6. The following is an example of CRC generation using C language.

Unsigned char* data  a pointer to the message buffer
Unsigned char length  the quantity of bytes in the message buffer
unsigned int crc_chk(unsigned char* data, unsigned char length)
{
int j;
unsigned int reg_crc=0xffff;
while(length--){
reg_crc ^= *data++;
for(j=0;j<8;j++){
if(reg_crc & 0x01){ /* LSB(b0)=1 */
reg_crc=(reg_crc>>1) ^ 0xa001;
}else{
reg_crc=reg_crc >>1;
}
}
}
return reg_crc; // return register CRC
}
B-7
B-4 Address List

1. ASCII
 Reads one or more parameter values: 3Ah (start bit‘：’) + 30h 31h (station address 01) + 30h
33h (function code 03h) + 30h 30h xxh xxh–32h 36h xxh xxh (Modbus address 00xxh–26xxh)
+ xxh xxh xxh xxh (reading length 1) + LRC (checksum) + CR/LF
 Writes one parameter value: 3Ah (start bit‘：’) + 30h 31h (station address 01) + 30h 36h
(function code 06h) + 30h 30h xxh xxh–32h 36h xxh xxh (Modbus address 00xxh–26xxh) +
xxh xxh xxh xxh (writing value) + LRC (checksum) + CR/LF
 Writes 20 parameter values: 3Ah (start bit‘：’) + 30h 31h (station address 01) + 31h 30h
(function code 10h) + 30h 30h xxh xxh–32h 36h xxh xxh (Modbus address 00xxh–26xxh) +
30h 30h 31h 34h (word data length) + 32h 38h (byte data length) + xxh xxh xxh xxh (the first
writing value) + ... + xxh xxh xxh xxh (the 20th writing value) + LRC (checksum) + CR/LF
2. RTU
 Reads one or more parameter values: 01h (station address 01) + 03h (function code 03h) +
00xxh–26xxh (Modbus address) + xxxxh (reading length) + CRC (checksum)
 Writes one parameter value: 01h (station address 01) + 06h (function code 06h) + 00xxh–
26xxh (Modbus address) + xxxxh (writing value) + CRC (checksum)
 Writes 20 parameter values: 01h (station address 01) + 10h (function code 10h) + 00xxh–
26xxh (Modbus address) + 0014h (data length, count by word) + 28h (data length, count by
byte) + xxxxh (the first writing value) + ... + xxxxh (the 20th writing value) + CRC (checksum)
3. AC motor drive parameters (GGnnH): communication station address is Pr.09-00 setting value
Modbus
Attribute (Function Code) Description
Address
GG means parameter group, nn means parameter number. For
GGnnH R(03H) / W(06H, 10H) example, the Modbus address of Pr.04-10 is 040AH when
reading by Delta VFDsoft.
4. Control command (20xx): communication station address is Pr.09-00 setting value

Attribute
Function Modbus
(Function Size Description
Name Address
Code)
00B: No function 1. Remains the status
01B: Stop specified by a first
U16 bit1–0
10B: Run command until a
11B: JOG + Run second command is
bit3–2 Reserved received.
00B: No function 2. Valid only when
R (03H) /
Operation 01B: FWD operation command
2000H W (06H,
command bit5–4 10B: REV source is set to
10H)
communication
U16 11B: Change direction
(Pr.00-15=2).
00B: 1st accel. / decel. 1. Valid only when 2000h
01B: 2nd accel. / decel. bit12 is set to 1.
bit7–6
10B: 3rd accel. / decel. 2. Obtain the current
11B: 4th accel. / decel. running speed by
B-8
Attribute
Function Modbus
Name Address
Code)
0000B: zero step speed reading 2107h.
0001B: 1st step speed
0010B: 2nd step speed
0011B: 3rd step speed
0100B: 4th step speed
bit11–8
bit12 1: Enable bit06–11 function
bit15 Reserved
R (03H) /
Frequency Frequency command (XXX.XX Hz). There are two decimal
2001H W (06H,
command places for general-purpose drives.
10H)
To trigger an external fault
to the drive to make it
1: External Fault (E.F.)
bit0 stop running. Drive’s stop
Fault / control R (03H) / ON
method can be set
command 2002H W (06H,
through drive parameters.
source 10H)
bit1 1: Reset To clear the fault status
bit15–2 Reserved
5. Status monitor read only (21xx): communication station address is Pr.09-00 setting value
Attribute
Function Modbus
Name Address
Code)
bit7–0: Fault code
Fault status 2100H R(03H) U16
bit15–8: Warning code
Status of RUN / STOP
00B: Drive fully stops
(RUN indicator is OFF / STOP indicator is ON)
Drive
01B: Drive is stopping
operation 2119H R(03H) U16 bit1–0
(RUN indicator flashes / STOP indicator is ON)
status
10B: Drive is in standby status
(RUN indicator is ON / STOP indicator flashes)
11B: Drive is running
B-9
Attribute
Function Modbus
Name Address
Code)
(RUN indicator is ON / STOP indicator is OFF)
bit2 1: JOG command

Operation direction
00B: FWD
(REV indicator is OFF / FWD indicator is ON)
01B: from REV to FWD
bit4–3 (REV indicator flashes / FWD indicator is ON)
10B: from FWD to REV
(REV indicator is ON / FWD indicator flashes)
11B: REV
(REV indicator is ON / FWD indicator is OFF)
bit7–5 Reserved
1: Master frequency controlled by communication
bit8
interface
1: Master frequency controlled by analog / external
bit9
terminal signal
1: Operation command controlled by
bit10
communication interface
bit11 1: Parameter locked
bit12 1: Enable copy parameter from keypad
bit15–13 Reserved
Frequency
2102H R(03H) Drive’s frequency command (XXX.XX Hz)
command
Output
2103H R(03H) Drive’s output frequency (XXX.XX Hz)
frequency
Output Drive’s output current (XX.XX A). Decimal places can be
2104H R(03H)
current referred by the high byte of 211F
DC bus
2105H R(03H) Drive’s DC bus voltage (XXX.X V)
voltage
Output
2106H R(03H) Drive’s output voltage (XXX.X V)
voltage
Multi-step
U16 Drive’s current running speed step given by multi-step speed
speed 2107H R(03H)
command (0 is main speed)
status
Multi-
Display the low word value (Pr.00-04) of user-defined items, the
function 2116H R(03H)
value is low 16 bits data.
display
B-10
6. Status monitor read only (22xx): communication station address is Pr.09-00 setting value
Attribute
Function Modbus
Name Address
Code)
Maximum
user-
2201H R(03H) Maximum Operation Frequency (Pr.01-00)
defined
value
AUI1 Display signal of AUI analog input terminal, -10–10 V
2203H R(03H)
analog input corresponds to -100.00–100.00%
AUI2 Display signal of AUI analog input terminal, -10–10 V
2204H R(03H)
analog input corresponds to -100.00–100.00%
IGBT U16
2206H R(03H) IGBT temperature of drive power module (XXX.XºC)
temperature
Heat sink Display temperature of heat sink (ºC) (only for model 40 HP
2207H R(03H)
temperature and above)
Digital input The status of digital input (ON/OFF), refer to Pr.02-10
2208H R(03H)
status (see Example 01 in Pr.00-04)
Digital
The status of digital output (ON/OFF), refer to Pr.02-23
output 2209H R(03H)
(see Example 02 in Pr.00-04)
status
B-11
B-5 Exception Response
When the drive is using the communication connection, if an error occurs, the drive responds to the
error code and sets the highest bit (bit 7) of the command code to 1 (function code AND 80H) then responds
to the control system to signal that an error occurred.
If the keypad displays “CE-XX” as a warning message, “XX” is the error code at that time. Refer to
the table of error codes for communication error for reference.
ASCII mode RTU mode

STX ‘:’ Address 01H
‘0’ Function 86H
Address
‘1’ Exception code 02H
‘8’ CRC Check Low C3H
Function
‘6’ CRC Check High A1H
‘0’
Exception code
‘2’
‘7’
LRC Check
‘7’
CR
END
LF
The explanation of exception codes:

Error code Explanation
1 Function code is not supported or unrecognized.
2 Address is not supported or unrecognized.
3 Data is not correct or unrecognized.
4 Failure to execute this function code
10 Transmission time-out
B-12
Appendix C. Revision HistoryVFD-ED
Appendix C. Revision History

Firmware Version: V1.11
Issued Edition: 00
Issued Date: June, 2023
Added
Descriptions Chapters
 Added notes for airflow and heat dissipation for single and multiple drive installation Section 2-2
 Added maximum and minimum wire gauge, screw size and tightening torque for
ground terminal.
Section 4-2
 Added recommended wires when installing at an ambient 50°C or above
environment
Section 7-2-6
 Added wiring diagram for frequency division output Section 7-3-5
Section 7-4-5
 Added links for Certifications and Declaration of Conformity (Doc) Section 8-3
 Added data value in tables for derating curves Section 8-5

 Added rollback function parameters in Starting stage.
Section 10-4
 Added Pr.07-29 for comfort function in Stopping stage.
 Pr.00-04: Added setting value 40 (elevator actual speed m/s) and display illustration
Pr. Group 00
 Pr.00-09: Added block diagrams for each control mode
 Pr.01-08: Added SVC control mode Pr. Group 01
 MO40: Added descriptions regarding use with Pr.02-43
 Added multi-function input #MI57, MI59, and multi-function output #MO50, MO51,
MO52
 Pr.02-34: Added related descriptions when actual output H > Pr.02-34, and Pr. Group 02
descriptions regarding setting range and unit varying with Pr.00-10.
 Added Pr.02-40 to Pr.02-42 (direct docking mode only), and Pr.02-43 (Speed
Reached Bandwidth)
 Pr.05-16, Pr.06-01, Pr.06-26, Pr.09-02, Pr.10-03, Pr.10-09: Added notes regarding Pr. Group 05,
setting value “fault and ramp to stop” 06, 09, 10
 Pr.06-50, Pr.06-51, Pr.06-52: Added cross-reference fault codes ocA, ocd, ocn,
ocS, GFF
Pr. Group 06
 Pr.06-52: Added notes regarding minimum time interval
 Pr.06-72: Added two methods 1. ARD or UPS 2. Battery used as EPS
 Added Pr.07-31 to Pr.07-37 brake torque test functions Pr. Group 07
 Added Pr.11-21 (filter time display settings on built-in keyboard panel) Pr. Group 11
 Added warning codes: LS, bttA, bttn, bttS Chapter 13

Pr. Group 06
 Added fault codes: OPHL (U/V/W phase output phase loss), LSS, LSo, btt, bttE
Chapter 14
C-1
Updated
 Updated Personal Repair Request service link Section 1-4
 Updated data value for MI1 to MI8 Default (NPN Mode) Section 5-3
Updated recommended filter selections for the following models:
 VFD055ED43S: from EMF033A43A to EMF018A43A
Section 6-6
 VFD075ED43S: from EMF033A43A to EMF018A43A
 VFD150ED43S: from B84143D0075R127 to EMF033A43A
Section 6-7
 Updated information on digital keypad from KPC-CE01 to KPC-CC01
Section 9-4
 Updated IFD6530 driver download link Section 6-8
Section 7-1-2
Section 7-2 to 7-4
 Deleted discontinued option cards: EMED-PGABD-1, EMED-PGHSD-1, EMED-
Section 10-3
PGHSD-2
Pr. Group 10, 11
Section 14
 Updated terminal DGND to GND in wiring diagrams Section 7-2 to 7-4
 Maximum external power is 12V, deleted 24V related information
 Updated wiring diagrams in external power Section 7-2-3
 Updated note item 3: from A, B, Z to /A, /B, /Z
 Maximum output voltage: deleted “three-phase” Section 8-1
 Output frequency range: updated output frequency upper limit to 299 Hz Section 8-2
 Updated speed control range: 1: 100 (up to 1:1000 when using PG card) to 1:50
(up to 1:1000 when using PG card)
 Maximum output frequency: updated output frequency upper limit to 299.00 Hz Section 8-3
 Categorized Certifications into EMC Directive, Production Compliance,
Production Certifications, and Safety Certification.
 Updated digital keypad KPC-CC01 to latest
Chapter 09
 Simplified Chinese language is not supported in this version.
 Updated function parameters in All stage.
Section 10-4
 Updated parameters for comfort function in Starting stage.
 Pr.01-38: Updated the process and steps for two methods of sending leveling
signals
Chapter 10
 Updated drive’s output frequency upper limit: Pr.01-00, Pr.01-01, Pr.01-03,
Pr. Group 01
Pr.01-05, Pr.01-07, Pr.01-09, Pr.01-10, Pr.01-11, Pr.01-22, Pr.01-23, Pr.01-29,
Pr.01-39
 Multi-function input MI#39: Updated cross-reference from Pr.03-01 to Pr.03-00
 Pr.02-34: Updated drive’s output frequency upper limit to 299.00 Hz, and deleted
tolerance range plus–minus sign
Pr. Group 02
 Pr.02-38, Pr.02-39: Updated elevator timing diagram
 Pr.02-25, Pr.02-26, Pr.02-27, Pr.02-28, Pr.02-34: Updated drive’s output
frequency upper limit
 Pr.03-15: Updated load compensation auto-tuning process Pr. Group 03
Chapter 10
 Pr.04-00 to Pr.04-15: Updated drive’s output frequency upper limit
Pr. Group 04
C-2
Updated
 Pr.06-01: Updated parameter name
 Pr.06-14: Updated parameter name
 Pr.06-30: Updated parameter setting range and descriptions
 Pr.06-44: Updated drive’s output frequency upper limit
Pr. Group 06
 Pr.06-45: Updated setting value Bit1=1 to "Fan lock, warn and continue
operation"
 Pr.06-46: Updated descriptions
 Pr.06-79: Updated cross-reference ERV/SERV warning/fault code descriptions
 Pr.7-24 to Pr.07-27: Updated cross-reference from Pr.03-00=5, 6, 7, 8 to Pr.03-
00=7, 8, 9, 10 Pr. Group 07
 Pr.07-05, Pr.07-08, Pr.07-10: Updated drive’s output frequency upper limit
 Pr.09-02: Updated setting value 1 to “Fault and ramp to stop”
Pr. Group 09
 Pr.09-04: Moved partial contents in Parameter Group 09 to Appendix B. Modbus
Appendix B
Protocol
 Pr.10-17, Pr.10-20, Pr.10-21: Updated drive’s output frequency upper limit Pr. Group 10
 Pr.11-00: Delated “speed bandwidth control enabled” for setting value Bit 0=1,
Pr. Group 11
and updated text descriptions of “PI adjustment-auto gain” diagram
Pr. Group 06
 Fault code MPHL: Updated fault name and corrective actions
Chapter 14
C-3
C-4

Delta Ia-Mds Vfd-Ed Um en 20230614

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Delta Ia-Mds Vfd-Ed Um en 20230614

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Delta Ia-Mds Vfd-Ed Um en 20230614

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Industrial Automation Headquarters

Delta Electronics, Inc.

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION ................................................................................................................. 2-1

CHAPTER 3 WIRING ................................................................................................................................ 3-1

CHAPTER 4 MAIN CIRCUIT TERMINALS .............................................................................................. 4-1

CHAPTER 5 CONTROL TERMINALS ..................................................................................................... 5-1

CHAPTER 6 OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES ................................................................................….………6-1

CHAPTER 7 OPTION CARDS ................................................................................................................. 7-1

CHAPTER 8 SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................................................... 8-1

CHAPTER 9 DIGITAL KEYPAD ...............................................................................................................9-1

CHAPTER 10 AUTO-TUNING PROCESS…... .......................................................................................10-1

CHAPTER 11 SUMMARY OF PARAMETER SETTINGS....................................................................... 11-1

CHAPTER 12 DESCRIPTIONS OF PARAMETER SETTINGS ........................................................ 12-00-1

CHAPTER 13 WARNING CODES ..........................................................................................................13-1

CHAPTER 14 FAULT CODES ................................................................................................................14-1

CHAPTER 15 MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING…... .......................................................... 15-1

CHAPTER 16 SAFE TORQUE OFF FUNCTION…... ............................................................................. 16-1

APPENDIX A. EMC STANDARD INSTALLATION GUIDE………………………………………………......A-1

APPENDIX B. MODBUS PROTOCOL…………………...……………..…………………………………......B-1

APPENDIX C. REVISION HISTORY……………………………..…………………………………………......C-1

1-1 Nameplate Information

After you receive the AC motor drive, check the following:

1-1 Nameplate Information

1-2 Model Name

1-3 Serial Number

1-4 Apply After-sales Service by Mobile Device

1-4-2 Service Link Label

Scan QR Code to request service

Cannot find the QR Code?

1-5 RFI Switch

NOTE: The RFI switches on Frame s B/C/D/E are at similar locations.

Isolating main power from ground

Important points regarding ground connection

Figure 1-10 Figure 1-11

Floating Ground System (IT Systems)

Asymmetric Ground System (Corner Grounded TN Systems)

Figure 1-12 Figure 1-13

Using the RFI switch

Built-In Keyboard Panel

KPED-LE01 Unit: mm [inch]

2-1 Mounting Clearance

2-1 Mounting Clearance

7.5–15 HP VFD055ED23S/43S, VFD075ED23S/43S,

20–40 HP VFD150ED23S, VFD185ED23S, VFD220ED23S/43S,

40–100 HP VFD300ED23S, VFD370ED23S/43S, VFD450ED43S,

2-2 Airflow and Power Dissipation

VFD037ED21S 23.9 - 23.9 40.7 - 40.7 84 46 130

VFD040ED23S 23.9 - 23.9 40.7 - 40.7 133 49 182

VFD055ED23S 48.5 - 48.5 82.4 - 82.4 212 67 279

VFD075ED23S 48.5 - 48.5 82.4 - 82.4 292 86 379

VFD110ED23S 47.9 - 47.9 81.4 - 81.4 355 121 476

VFD150ED23S 64.6 - 64.6 109.8 - 109.8 490 161 651

VFD185ED23S 102.3 - 102.3 173.8 - 173.8 638 184 822

VFD220ED23S 102.8 - 102.8 174.7 - 174.7 723 217 939

VFD300ED23S 179 30 209 304 51 355 932 186 1118

VFD370ED23S 179 30 209 304 51 355 1112 222 1334

VFD040ED43S 13.7 - 13.7 23.3 - 23.3 123 42 165

VFD055ED43S 48.5 - 48.5 82.4 - 82.4 185 55 240

VFD075ED43S 48.5 - 48.5 82.4 - 82.4 249 71 320